Home

4Motion Device Driver Ver.3.0.10 User Manual

1. Parameter Description Source BS up to 6 BS ID LSB The unique identifier of the BS BS Name The name of the BS New BS BS ID LSB The unique identifier of the BS The management system will reject a BS ID LSB already assigned to another BS in the managed wireless network The format is x y z where x y and z are in the range from 0 to 255 Paging Group ID The Paging Group ID of the BS Applicable only if Idle Mode is enabled The range is from 0 to 65535 Must be set to a value other than 0 Must be unique per BS Bearer IP Address The IP address of the BS s Bearer Interface BS Name The name of the BS An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 32 printable characters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard Parameter Description Center Frequency The center of the frequency band in which the BS will transmit in MHz The available values in accordance with the bands supported by different ODUs are HM 2022 5 to 2217 5 in steps of 0 125 E 2302 5 to 2397 5 in steps of 0 125 E 2487 5 to 2687 5 in steps of 0 125 E 3302 5 to 3397 5 in steps of 0 125 E 3402 5 to 3797 5 in steps of 0 125 The available values for Center Frequencies indicated above are for a Bandwidth of 5 MHz For a different bandwidth the actually valid values are from f1 1 2BW to f2 1 2BW where f1 is the
2. L7 ebe lL vz besse Figure 4 42 The Management Template SNMP Managers Page SNMP Trap Managers Tab The SNMP Trap Managers table includes the following parameter for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry IP Address The IP address of the SNMP Trap Manager The SNMP Trap Manager Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the SNMP Trap Manager The default is 0 0 0 0 which is not a valid value the default in the device is 192 168 0 1 Port Number The port number on which the Trap Manager will listen for messages from the Agent The range is from 1 to 65535 The port on which the management system listens for traps is 162 The default is 0 which is not a valid value Community The name of the SNMP Read Community used by the Trap Manager Traps are sent toward those Managers for which this parameter is configured A string of 1 to 10 printable characters case sensitive The default in the device is public 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager Management Template Parameter Description Enable Site Traps Indicates whether the sending of traps to the management station is enabled or disabled The default is enable 4 6 2 Performance Page The Performance page comprises the Conne
3. ES Figure 7 40 New BS Window 2 Configure the mandatory identification parameters of the BS in the New BS window Parameter Description BS ID LSB The unique identifier of the BS The management system will reject a BS ID LSB already assigned to another BS in the managed wireless network The format is x y z where x y and z are in the range from 0 to 255 Operator ID The unique Identifier of the wireless network operator The same Operator ID must be used by all BSs in the managed wireless network The format is x y z where x y and z are in the range from 0 to 255 The default Operator ID is 255 243 41 Once the user enters a new ID for the first created BS it becomes the new default for new BSs 3 Click OK The new BS will be added to the list of BS available in the BS node 4 To complete the creation of the new BS you should select the newly added BS entry and complete the configuration of the mandatory Bandwidth and Central frequency parameters see Radio Basic Page General Tab on page 248 After clicking Apply you will be prompted to configure some additional mandatory parameters in the Airframe Structure General tab and Air Frame Structure Zones tab After configuring the requested parameters click Apply again 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW nl Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS gt To copy an existing BS The Copy BS featur
4. Mode Create Figure 4 16 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Source Port Tab Create Mode J Revert d Classification Config Name O Fon E H Ta O Enable IUe Source Port E fe ee vi Sam Kl The Classification Rule Source Port tab is applicable only for L3 rules The Source Port parameters of an existing rule cannot be modified The Classification Rule Source Port table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name The Classification Rule Source Port Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name Mandatory for Create Mode Must be a Classification Rule Name that already exists in the target managed objects From To Relevant only if Enable TCP UDP Source Port is enabled The range of values From To of the source ports from the lowest value to the highest value Values range is from 1 to 65535 The default is From 1 To 1 The default in the device is From 1 To 65535 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Parameter Description Enable TCP UDP Source Indicates whether the use of a range of source ports is en
5. Requred Installed Ou Type dag v COU Type Frequency Bard Me Frequency Band MH Maimam Tx Power en Maxaman Tx Power Be Port Configuration Port Configaration Serial Number D External Cavity Fiter Existence Ports Configuration Ports D 2 3 D Tx Power Lien 4 HW Version 35 HW Revision 6 IPA Cord Iretaled edel 1 Steel e Ann Dos Figure 7 26 ODU Page The ODU page includes the following sections E General E Ports 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment 7 6 2 1 2 1 General The General section is divided into sub sections The Required section enables viewing editing the required Type of the ODU It also provide read only properties of the ODU based on the required type Parameter Description ODU Type The required ODU type The required ODU Type of an associated ODU cannot be modified The Type of an ODU that is not associated to any sector can be updated using the drop down menu that includes a list of currently available ODU Types Frequency Band Read only The frequency band supported by the required ODU Type in MHz Maximum Tx Power Read only The maximum Tx power available for the required ODU Type in dBm Port Configuration Read only The Port Configuration of the required ODU Type 1x1 2x2 or 4x2 The Installed section displays read only information about the actual Ty
6. Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway of the bearer interface of the BS Must be in the same subnet with the BS bearer IP Address 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW a Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager 4 5 3 2 ASNGW Pools Tab BS Template Bearer ASNGW Pook Authentication Control Tratlic QoS Rules Bearer Trallic QoS nudes Mode Piters k By cheling an a selected property name you can add k to this fiert LI 8S Load Balancing Pool t DB Load Balsrang Pool 2 Figure 4 37 The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page ASNGW Pools Tab The ASNGW Pools parameters are Parameter Description BS Load Balancing Pool 1 Enable Disable the use of the Primary Pool The default is Enable BS Load Balancing Pool 2 Enable Disable the use of the Secondary Pool The default is Disable Pool 2 can be enabled only if Pool 1 is enabled and includes at least one entry 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template 4 5 3 3 Authentication Tab Bearer ASNGW Pook Adel dn Control Tratlic QoS Bier Bearer Trattic QoS rides Made creat Update Del Fiters 8y clicking an a selected property name you can add k to this fiter LI Defouk Aathenticatee IP Address O Suspended Lap Process O Adtive mss d L
7. Twin Site Creation Antennas No antennas Heading d Antennas Longitude Antennas Latitude d Antennas Tower Heig Antennas Mechanical Antennas Electrical D Antennas Cable Loss 1 o 000 000 E 00 000 N a a o 2 o 000 000 E 00 000 N H H o os el Cancel ge JI Duplicate Site Server 10 10 187 117 User admin Figure 5 5 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 4 The fourth screen of the wizard includes the following parameters Parameter Description Antennas up to 28 No The index number of the antenna Heading deg Used only for information inventory purposes The the azimuth angle in degrees between the center of the horizontal antenna beamwidth and the true north counting clockwise The range is from 0 to 359 Longitude deg Used only for information inventory purposes The longitude of the antenna The format is Wl mmm a Ill is longitude in degrees between 000 to 179 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is E east or W west Latitude deg Used only for information inventory purposes The latitude of the antenna The format is Il mmm aill is longitude in degrees between 00 to 89 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is S South or N north Tower Height m Used only for information inventory purposes The height of the antenna above the ground in meters The range is from 0 to 500 Mechanical Down Til
8. A Azymuth Beam Width in degrees E Elevation Beam Width in degrees G Gain in dBi F Front to Back Ratio in dB lt EDT Supported gt FALSE or TRUE lt EDT Mins The lowest value in the EDT control range lt EDT Max gt The highest value in the EDT control range lt EDT Step gt The EDT control resolution lt Frequency Min gt The lowest supported frequency in GHz lt Frequency Max gt The highest supported frequency in GHz Description A read only description providing general details according to the Antenna Product Type The details include the antenna manufacturer number of ports polarization azymuth beamwidth if other than omni and gain EDT indicates support of Electrical Down Tilt 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description Specification Electrical Down Tilt deg The downwards electrical tilt of the antenna in degrees The range is from 90 0 to 90 0 using 0 1 degree resolution Used only for information inventory purposes The default is 0 Installation Mechanical Down Tilt deg The downwards mechanical tilt of the antenna in degrees as opposed to the electrical tilt already integrated in the antenna and thus taken as reference instead of the horizontal plane The range is from 90 0 to 90 0 using 0 1 degree resolution Used only for information inventory
9. Table 7 5 ODU Status Mask Bit Mapping for Macro Indoor Outdoor ODU Bit Set to 1 Failure None No Failure 1 AU Communication with ODU was lost An error was detected while downloading a table to the ODU The ODU temperature is high Not used 2 3 4 5 Not used 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment 7 6 2 2 7 6 2 2 1 Table 7 5 ODU Status Mask Bit Mapping for Macro Indoor Outdoor ODU Bit Set to 1 Failure 6 Power amplifier failure 7 The ODU has detected an internal hardware problem 8 32 Not used Radio The Radio Node is applicable only for Micro Outdoor BTS It includes two Radio pages Radio 1 and Radio 2 The Radio page includes the properties of the respective Radio Ss figuring qu Lei mx d a wi Radio 1 wa General Requred Fotsbed Rado Type d d e ze Radio Type Frequency Bard Me Frequency Bard Mi Haam Tx Power Bn Hassan Tx Perver Em Port Configuration Port Configuration Serial Number LU External Cavity Fiter Existence Ports Configuration 3 1 Tx Power de 6 0000 Al HW Version leen HW Revision unkrewan IPA Card Not Inetaled HPA HW Version vireg HIR SW Version unknown CPLD SW Version unknown elo 1 pairs wi An Dos Figure 7 27 Radio Page The Radio page includes the following sections E General E Ports General
10. 1 Right click the ODU sub node in the navigation tree and select Create to open the New ODU window ODU Mandatory Parameters ODU type ODU 2300 2360 000N 36 1x1 N 0 v ODU Number ODU 2 ly Figure 7 25 New ODU Window 2 Inthe New ODU window select from the drop down menus the required ODU Type and the ODU Number to be assigned to it only unassigned numbers are available for selection For Indoor BTS ODU numbers range is 1 to 28 For an Outdoor BTS ODU number range is from 1 to 24 3 Click Apply to complete the new ODU creation The new ODU will be added to the list of ODU available in the ODU sub node To fully complete the creation of the ODU you should update the Ports Configuration if necessary and click Apply in the ODU page see ODU lt gt Page on page 194 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment gt To delete an ODU To delete an ODU right click the required ODU entry in the navigation tree and select Delete You will be request to confirm the operation IMPORTANT An associated ODU specified in a Site Sector Association cannot be deleted For more details refer to Site Sector lt gt Page on page 279 7 6 2 1 2 ODU lt gt Page The ODU node includes an ODU lt gt page for each created ODU The ODU lt gt page displays the properties of the respective ODU
11. Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing service interface Applicable only for VLAN and QinQ service interfaces The Service Interface VLAN ID parameter for VLAN service interface SVID for QinQ service interface The range is 1 9 11 to 4094 A Service Interface VLAN ID shall not conflict with other instances of Service Interface VLAN ID and VLAN IDs of Bearer Local Management and External Management interfaces Shall also not conflict with CVID of any transparent MS The default is 0 if selected must be changed to a valid value when creating a new Service Interface Default Gateway IP Address Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing service interface Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces The IP Address of the Default Gateway Must be unique among all the Host Interfaces IPs Bearer Local Management Internal Management External Management existing instances of Service Interface s Tunnel Destination IP Address and Default Gateway IP Address and subnets of Default Gateway IP addresses Should be in the same subnet with the IP Address of the DHCP server proxy relay to be assigned to a service group using this service interface The default is 0 0 0 0 must be changed to a valid value when creating a new Service Interface Subnet Mask Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing service interface Applicable only for VLAN service i
12. Restore Opens the Restore Task Editor for a selected Duplicate Site file enabling to restore the configuration See Restore Configuration Task on page 300 The Restore Task Editor can also be opened by double clicking on the selected file s entry Delete Deletes the selected file s from the database Export Exports the selected file s to the client file system Click to open the Save window browse to the desired location on the client file system and click Save to export the file s Import Imports an Duplicate Site file from the client file system Click to open the Import Duplicate Site File window browse to the location on the client file system where the file is stored select the file and click Import NOTE The Import option is available when right clicking anywhere in the work area without the need to select any existing entry 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual
13. sector association configurable only when adding a new association Parameter Description BS ID LSB The unique ID of the BS AU Slot Number The AU slot number When adding a new sector association double click on the entry to open a drop down menu that includes all available AUs AU Port Number The AU port number When adding a new sector association available only after selecting an AU Double click on the entry to open a drop down menu that includes all available ports according to the type of the selected AU 1 4 fora 4 channels AU 1 2 for a 2 channels AU ODU Number The ODU number When adding a new sector association double click on the entry to open a drop down menu that includes all available ODUs ODU Port Number The ODU port number When adding a new sector association available only after selecting an ODU Double click on the entry to open a drop down menu that includes all available ports according to the type of the selected ODU 1 2 or 4 Antenna Number The antenna number When adding a new sector association double click on the entry to open a drop down menu that includes all available Antennas Antenna Port Number The antenna port number When adding a new sector association available only after selecting an Antenna Double click on the entry to open a drop down menu that includes all available ports according to the type of the selected Antenna 1 2 or 4 The Site S
14. 64 QAM 5 6 The default is QPSK 1 2 Uplink Feedback Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the uplink feedback zone The valid range is from 0 to 69 The default is 0 Uplink Data Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the uplink data zone The valid range is from 0 to 69 The default is 0 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Basic Rate The uplink basic rate QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 16 QAM 1 2 16 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 1 2 64 QAM 2 3 64 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 5 6 The default is QPSK 1 2 Sub Burst Mode Maximum Sub Burst Mode The maximum size of a downlink sub burst The value of this parameter affects the achievable throughput in MIMO B point to point links one MS as follows Basic up to 12 Mbps Standard up to 20 Mbps Enhanced up to 25 Mbps Trial up to 30 Mbps Maximum throughput for two MSs may be increased to up to 16Mbps per MS when set to Standard Enhanced or Trial The default is Basic 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Gi Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS Recommended values for First Zone Minimum Size and Maximum Size Table 7 7 First Zone Minimum Size Recommended Value Range Bandwidth First Zone Basic Map
15. Figure 7 43 Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure General Tab The Air Frame Structure General tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description Cell ID The Cell ID IDCell used for preamble selection The range is from 0 to 31 The default is 0 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 250 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Preamble Group The preamble group 1 or 2 A value of 2 is applicable only for the following combinations of Segment Number and Cell ID values Segment Number 0 Cell ID 0 3 6 9 12 15 Segment Number 1 Cell ID 1 4 7 10 13 16 Segment Number 2 Cell ID 2 5 8 11 14 17 The default is 1 Segment Number The segment BS number in a three sector BS 0 2 This number influences the values available for Preamble Group selection see above and the configuration of Map Major Groups see Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab on page 252 used for the FDC transmission The default is 0 Preamble Index Read only The Preamble Index used by the BS 0 113 Frame Number Offset Controls the offset applied between the internal frame count and the reported frame number The available options are Zero and Random If Random is selected the AU will choose a random number between 0 to 15 The default is zero 0 Total Uplink Duration The total duration of the uplink in
16. The QoS Marking Rules tab includes the following sections E Bearer Traffic QoS Rules E Intra ASN Traffic QoS Rules 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Ga Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS 7 8 3 3 1 Bearer Traffic QoS Rules The Bearer Traffic QoS Rules section includes the Bearer Traffic QoS Rules table and the QoS Rule Parameters Editor The Bearer Traffic QoS Rules table displays the following read only parameters for each existing QoS rule Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the rule An auto sequential number generated automatically when creating a new rule Rule Status The status of the rule Enable or Disable Marking Rule The name of the QoS Marking Rule Select an entry to open the Editor for the selected rule The following buttons are available below the table Button Description Add Adds a new entry to the table and opens the Editor allowing to configure parameters for the new rule Up to a maximum of 16383 rules can be defined Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table The QoS Rule Parameters Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description QoS Rule Parameters Marking Rule Name The name of the QoS Marking Rule An optional s string of up to 32 characters Rule Status The status of the rule Enable or Disable The de
17. The automatically generated index number of the entry Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name The Classification Rule Destination Address Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name Mandatory for Create Mode Must be a Classification Rule Name that already exists in the target managed objects IP Destination Address Relevant only if Enable IP Destination Classifier is enabled The IP Destination address enabled for the classification rule The default is 0 0 0 0 Must be set to a valid value IP Destination Mask Relevant only if Enable IP Destination Classifier is enabled The net mask field that is used to specify a range of IP Destination addresses The default is 0 0 0 0 the default in the device is 255 255 255 255 If selected must be set to a valid value Enable IP Destination Classifier Indicates whether the use of an associated IP Destination address is enabled for the classification rule The default is no 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template 4 4 4 7 Classification Rule Source Port Tab SFA Cotig PHS Rules Class kation Got Classtik atun Rude Proto Cassdz ation Ruke Source Address Gesitt Ride Destination Address Clask abon Rube Source Port Chas lt
18. ves Inetaled Active wamp wane PSU Cord Properbes C Setnunber Requred based Operational 1 Yes Not netaled Down 2 Yes Iretated Operational 3 Yes Inckaled Operational 4 Yes Irstaled Oper stra ele ce Beast mm Dern Figure 7 20 Power Supply Page The Power Supply page includes the following sections E PIU Card Properties E PSU Card Properties 7 6 1 1 1 PIU Card Properties The PIU Card Properties table includes the following parameters for each PIU card slot Parameter Description Slot Number Read only The number of the slot allocated to the PIU card 1 2 Required Indicates whether the PIU card is required in the specific slot Double click on the entry to open a selection drop down menu displaying the available options Yes No The default is Yes Installed Read only The status of the PIU card installation Installed or Not installed Operational Read only The operational status of the PIU card Active or Inactive 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description Required HW Version The required current supply capability of the card Double click on the entry to open a selection drop down menu displaying the available options 58Amp 35Amp The default is 58Amp Installed HW Version Read only The current supply capability of the installed card empty for a
19. C N Level for 64 QAM 2 3 7 see 64 QAM 2 3 parameter above The default is 26 64 QAM 5 6 The C N in dB required for transmitting 64 QAM 5 6 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 64 QAM 3 4 8 to Required C N Level for 64 QAM 3 4 7 see 64 QAM 3 4 parameter above The default is 28 Note The Required C N Levels are configurable only by using the Multiple Configuration task 7 8 2 2 3 Radio Advanced Page Management Tab The Management tab enables defining alarm threshold parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Advanced 0 0 2 55 55 55 ERT WR I Alarm Threshaids for Noise and interfon park Medien Noise Bi Di GG 1 Betas Beaty Cone Figure 7 49 Radio Advanced Page Management Tab The Management tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description Alarm Thresholds for Downlink Dropped Packets Ratio Best Effort The threshold for excessive DL dropped packets ratio in promils of DL packets in all Best Effort services which when exceeded triggers a Best Effort service alarm The range is from 1 to 1000 promil The default is 1000 RT VR The threshold for excessive DL dropped packets ratio in promils of DL packets in all RT VR services which when exceeded triggers an RT VR service alarm The
20. Contents Chapter 8 The Performance Monitoring Viewer 263 8 1 The Performance Monitoring Viewer cccccccsssseeseeeneeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeneneeenes 285 8 2 The Counters Group Selection Section ccssseccceeeeeseeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeenenes 286 8 3 The Counters Selection Section ccccseseeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeseeeeeeensenees 287 8 4 The Graph and Graph Controls Section cccsssecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeees 288 8 5 General Controls eege eege 289 8 5 1 Polling Mu EE 289 CT e a ee 289 E PANE E 289 Chaptor 9S TaSk Saaana EE A AN 290 9 1 Performance Collection TaSK snnsunnennrnnronrnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennennnnnnnne nenne 292 9 1 1 General Tab E 293 9 1 2 Entities E EE 294 91 3 Actions E e a A E aak 295 9 2 Backup Configuration Task cccssseeccsseeeeeeeseseeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeesseneneeseeseeeeeensenees 297 9 3 Restore Configuration Tak eu ustegeiee eeg eegene 300 9 4 Software Upgrade TE 303 9 4 1 The Software Upgrade Task Edmtor eee 303 9 4 2 NPU Software Upgrade iccsccccdisectessadactieenciccestvcdonenensducpe texanenttad weulannadeadieeennvebenee 305 9 4 3 AU Software Upgrade applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS 306 9 5 4Motion File Data Aging TASK csisisisisesenntacsecsndecenedenactwnsenennincnastecennnencininnnsdencnans 309 9 6 OL TaSK shire ces ca ssececcssce cece ecade sence cenecepe cena a
21. Description Cell ID The Cell ID IDCell used for preamble selection The range is from 0 to 31 The default is 0 Preamble Group The preamble group 1 or 2 A value of 2 is applicable only for the following combinations of Segment Number and Cell ID values Segment Number 0 Cell ID 0 3 6 9 12 15 Segment Number 1 Cell ID 1 4 7 10 13 16 Segment Number 2 Cell ID 2 5 8 11 14 17 The default is 1 Segment Number The segment BS number in a three sector BS 0 2 This number influences the values available for Preamble Group selection see above preamble selection and the configuration of Map see below used for the FDC transmission The default is 0 Frame Number Offset Controls the offset applied between the internal frame count and the reported frame number The available options are Zero 0 and Random If Random is selected the AU will choose a random number between 0 to 15 The default is 0 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template Parameter Description Total Uplink Duration The total duration of the uplink in a frame in slots one slot equals 3 symbols To avoid BS BS interference the ul dl allocation must be identical in all BSs in a geographical region The range is 4 7 or 10 for bandwidth of 5 or 10MHz 3 5 or 7 for bandwidth of 7MHz The default is 3 in the device the default is 6
22. Excessive MS number The range is 0 1024 When set to 0 the alarm is disabled The default is 1024 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Maximum EAP Rounds The threshold for the number of EAP rounds in one direction in the same EAP session When this threshold is exceeded alarm is set This threshold may be used to protect the system from hazard EAP sessions with extreme number of messaging round trips The range is 0 100 When set to 0 the alarm is disabled The default is 100 Note The relevant alarm is not supported in current release 7 8 3 3 R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page QoS Marking Rules Tab The QoS Marking Rules tab enables defining Bearer Plan QoS rules Ep A ffe on 10 10 144 3 D i H R6 R8 Bearer Interface 0 0 2 55 55 55 Deng Athenbcation Qos Marking Rules Bearer Traftic QuS Rides Peak Regau Daring Rule QoS Rude Parameters Tl weieng ie Naame Rude Ratus Unable v Condon Service Flow Data Debvery Type aw Il Service Flow Traffic Priorty aw C Enable Servier Fiw Mada Flow Type Serden Flow Meds Flow Typa ation Outer DSCP Marlena 0 E DC 1p Pronty Marking D EI Irkre ASN Traffic QoS Rules H Diltsery Code Poirk trtra ASN 0 802 1p Priority fo F B ch Strech wi Aer LH Figure 7 53 R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page QoS Marking Rules Tab
23. Feedback Tab Updated value range for Start of Ranging Codes Removed consistency rule Updated value range for IR CDMA Allocation Period Removed Contention Based Reservation Timeout Number of Codes Initial Backoff Window Size Final Backoff Window Size PR CDMA Allocation Period Enable polling upon zero bandwidth request all Timing Corrections parameters Maximum CO Region Size August 2009 Radio Advanced Page Diversity Tab New Moved from Radio Basic Page with following changes Downlink Data MIMO Mode is read only Removed all other parameters excluding Downlink Permutation Base and Uplink Permutation Base August 2009 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Radio Advanced Page Channel Removed August 2009 Descriptors Tab Radio Advanced Page Power Tab name changed was Power Control August 2009 Control Tab Levels Added Power Control Correction Factor Removed Feedback Zone and Maximum EIRxP Updated range for PUSC Zone Radio Advanced Page Power Removed August 2009 Control Policy Tab Radio Advanced Page Rate Removed Basic Rate parameters moved to August 2009 Adaptation Tab Services Page Definitions Tab Radio Advanced Page Mobility Tab New Name was Handover August 2009 Removed all SBS and Handover Control parameters Changed the name of RSSI parameter in
24. Location on page 203 for devices with GPS Type set to None Otherwise the values are calculated by the GPS receiver 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Site Page 7 4 2 7 4 2 1 Site Dry Contact Tab The Dry Contact tab is applicable only for Macro Indoor BTSs The Dry Contact tab enables defining the use of input and output alarms 4 D Site General Dry Contact Input Alarm Input Nuniber Nare Serd Aen Carrey 1 Externa Equpmert Ouse ma 2 External Equipmert Clase re 3 External Cqupmert Close nm MN External Equpmert Cose kl 5 External Equipmert Clase ro External Lgupmerk Close e 7 External Equpmerk Ouse kl j Extena Equpmert Clase re Output Aarm D n Number i Name i mate 1 off 2 off d ot elo 1 Retreat of Zen tone _ Figure 7 6 Site Page Dry Content Tab The Dry Contact tab includes the following sections E Inputs Alarm E Output Alarm Inputs Alarm Dry contact input alarms are external devices that are connected to the BTS unit and notify the system when there is a change in external conditions The Inputs Alarm table includes the following parameters Parameter Description Input Number The Input Alarm Number 1 8 Refer to the table below for details on the mapping of Input Alarm Numbers to pins in the ALRM IN connector 4Motion
25. Managing a Single Device 7 5 2 6 4 MS Counters Connectivity Main Counters Group Counters Included Applicable for MS Counters MS Basic Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS 7 5 2 7 Logging Tab The Logging tab is not applicable for Micro Outdoor BTS The Logging tab enables defining various logging parameters including the minimum severity level for which an event generates a log entry H Management Management Interface QoS Marking Rides ACL IP Routing SNMP Manger Performance Loagng Remote Log Server LJ Enable lagging ta server Server IP Log to Pile RW Enable logging to file Leg Severty Performance Set ebe Faut SW Version Connectivity AGW bierg AU Manager 192 168 0 1 Informabonal D E E 1 Betreste wi Zen CH Figure 7 16 Management Page Logging Tab The Logging tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description Remote Log Server Enable logging to server unchecked Indicates whether or not logging to the server is enabled If enabled the server IP address is indicated in the Server IP text box The default is Disable Server IP 192 168 0 1 The server IP address of the server on which logs are to be maintained If logging to server is enabled the Server IP cannot be changed The default is 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Ch
26. Seorky Management Hel wy fie Manager x View 1M Duplicate Se Fin Iw Fiter ele bebe Lal Ske P Ste D NE Type Software Version Fie Nene Date D Results on page O Total O PageSie 100 Se Manager Server 10 10 187 117 User Leinen Figure 10 2 Duplicate Site File Manager You can use the Criteria Select Filters for viewing only files that meet one or several selection criteria The read only details of displayed files are Parameter Description Site IP The IP address of the device as configured during creation of the duplicate site file 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 The File Manager Duplicate Site File Manager Parameter Description BTS Number The ID number of the device Site ID as configured during creation of the duplicate site file NE Type The type of product used for preparing the duplicate site file Software Version The Software Version specified during creation of the Duplicate Site file File Name The name of the file that includes the data and time at which the file was created using the real time clock of the source equipment Date The date and time at which the file was added to the database of the management system using the real time clock of the client Select one or several entries and right click to view the following management options Parameter Description
27. Trigger Setup parameters to Averaging Duration with updated description removed all other Trigger Setup parameters Changed Neighbor Advertisement to Neighbor Advertisement Broadcast Changed the name of Periodic Interval to Interval Removed all other Neighbor Advertisement parameters Radio Advanced Page Scanning Removed August 2009 Tab Radio Advanced Page Removed general Downlink Dropped Packets August 2009 Management Tab Ratio parameter Added new parameters for Alarm Threshold for Downlink Dropped Packet Ratio per service type Added new parameters for Alarm Thresholds for noise and interference level Radio Advanced Page QoS Tab New feature August 2009 Connectivity Basic Page Bearer Added VLAN ID read only August 2009 Tab Updated descriptions of IP Address and Default Gateway 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Connectivity Advanced Page QoS Marking Rules Tab New Name was Bearer Plane Updated range for Service Flow Data Delivery Type August 2009 Connectivity Advanced Page Keep Alive Tab New feature August 2009 Connectivity Advanced Page ID IP Mapping Tab Moved from Connectivity Basic Page to Connectivity Advanced Page August 2009 Services Page Definition Tab Changed the name was previously Service Definition Changed the structure Added paramete
28. and configuring the filtering value The selected criteria name and filtering value for each filtering parameter will be displayed in the Filters area Only entries that match all filtering criteria will be updated IMPORTANT If you do not select any filters all rows of the table in the target devices will be updated with the configured values excluding default pre configured entries in certain tables that cannot be modified After completing configuration of the new row click on the Save button at the bottom of the page The color of the new row will change to black As long as the row is colored green not saved yet you can remove it by clicking on the Revert button above the table Select a previously saved row colored black to edit its parameters To delete a previously saved row select it and click on the Remove button above the table The row will be colored red Actual deletion will take effect after clicking on the Save button Managing Tables in Delete Mode Each row in the table has one or more parameters that provides a unique identification of the entry In Update mode the row identifiers are not mandatory and will be displayed for saved entries only selected for filtering or update To add a row to the table click on the Add button above the table A row will be added to the table and a row configuration editor will open on the right side enabling you to one or several parameters to be used for filtering by
29. configured to a valid unique value Field Value The PHSF value that is the header string to be suppressed The default is null Must be configured to a valid value Mask Value bits The PHSM that contains the bit mask of the PHSF with the bits set that is to be suppressed The default is null Must be configured to a valid value Verify Value Indicates whether or not the PHS header is to be verified The default is No Size Value Bytes The size of the header to be suppressed 0 20 The default is null Must be configured to a valid value An existing PHS Rule cannot be modified The following buttons are available at the bottom of the page Button Description Add PHS Rule Adds a new entry to the PHS Rules table allowing to configure parameters of the new rule Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the PHS Rules table A PHS Rule that is associated to a Classification Rule cannot be deleted 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW 7 7 4 2 Classification Rules Tab The Classification Rules tab enables defining the rules that are used to classify packets transmitted on the bearer plane om i Dags EC 5 it 3 ey is gong From 0 Slo o SI Serene ut E Il 1 Sei wv nn Cone E Figure 7 36 SFA Page Classification Rules Tab The Cl
30. 1 and 2 Radio Number 1 and 2 Radio Port Number 1 for both entries Antenna Number The antenna number 1 and 2 if two 1 port antennas are defined 1 for both entries if a 2 ports antenna is defined Antenna Port Number The antenna port number 1 for both entries for 1 port antennas 1 and 2 for a 2 ports antenna 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 282 Device Driver User Manual Chapter d The Performance Monitoring Viewer Chapter 8 The Performance Monitoring Viewer In This Chapter The Performance Monitoring Viewer on page 285 The Counters Group Selection Section on page 286 The Counters Selection Section on page 287 The Graph and Graph Controls Section on page 288 General Controls on page 289 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Gi Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 The Performance Monitoring Viewer The Performance Monitoring Viewer 8 1 The Performance Monitoring Viewer The Performance Monitoring Viewer enables on line monitoring of graphs for selected counters The graph for an accumulating counter displays the average rate per second during the interval from last polling time defined as Current Value Previous Value Polling Interval For gauge counters marked with a sign before the counter s name the absolute value reported at the polling time is displayed For details on supported counters groups and the counters in each g
31. 29 4 4 2 Service Group e EE 31 AAS QOS ENT E 40 eh SRA LN cc ee E E E 41 4 4 5 Service Profile e E 53 4 4 6 Hot Lining KE 59 4 5 BS Templai ssssssu eagegeenreteber stage aaka EEGEN ees 63 4 5 1 Radio Basic FAQ Coste stdeaceveca en txeaay sa deucecest ccaes cecoecanimcaanidascenecerndeacsutececs eepeecaiiact 63 4 5 2 Radio Advanced Page sisccasccciiccsuetssncenternuss geceuntin tecgvadeacnienntenneennabentatecenteds 75 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Contents 4 5 3 R6 R8 Bearer Interface cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeesenseseeeeeeeneneneeeaees 83 4 6 Management Template sscda cass csssicictinansanescsie ssxnncicissnanincnsinarietansntaestianiniscsciierenannirees 90 4 6 1 SNMP Managers Page E 90 4 6 2 Performance Page siodcess cverreesecasaveacehdcssuyecs decile senceniyedeianveuatcaammsscreteadiseestacensaas 93 4 6 3 Logging Page not applicable for Micro BIO 94 Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager sssssssssssssssrsrrsrrsrrrrrrrrerrerrene 97 5 1 Twin Site e TEE 99 5 2 The Twin Site Creation WiZard ccsccccesseeeesseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeesseeeneeeesees 101 e Introductio E 101 5 2 2 Starting the Twin Site Creation Wizard AEN 102 5 2 3 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 1 ccccccesscceeeeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeneeeeeseeaeeeeeeeneeees 104 5 2 4 Twin Site Creation Wizard Gren 105 5 2 5 Twin Site Creation Wizard Gren 107 5 2 6 Twin
32. 4 64 QAM 5 6 The default is QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 the default in the device is QPSK 1 2 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template Parameter Description Basic Rate for Management The downlink basic rate for management QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 i a E m E E 16 QAM 1 2 E 16 QAM 3 4 E 64 QAM 1 2 E 64 QAM 2 3 E 64 QAM 3 4 E 64 QAM 5 6 The default is QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 the default in the device is QPSK 1 2 Deployment The type of deployment in the area served by the BS Fix or Mobile To support proper handover should be set to Fix only if mobile MSs are not expected The default is Fix 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template Parameter Description BS Basic Rate for Data The downlink basic rate for data QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 16 QAM 1 2 16 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 1 2 64 QAM 2 3 64 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 5 6 The default is QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 the default in the device is QPSK 1 2 Maximum Sub Burst Mode The maximum size of a downlink sub burst The value of this parameter affects the achievable throughput in MIMO B point to point links one MS as follows Basic up to 12 Mbps Stan
33. 4 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard ASN Topology Mismatch Message 122 Figure 6 5 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Import Unique Parameters File 122 Figure 6 6 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Number of BSs Mismatch Message 123 Figure 6 7 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Invalid Unique Parameters Message 123 Figure 6 8 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Merge File 124 Figure 6 9 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Consistency Rules Iesues 124 Figure 6 10 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Summary c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeeeeeeeeeneeees 125 Figure 7 1 The Device Manager Components Indoor BI 129 Figure 7 2 Equipment View Page Macro Indoor BTS ecseceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeseeeeeteeeeees 134 Figure 7 3 Site View Page Macro Outdoor BTS with a 4 channels AU 136 Figure 7 4 Equipment View Page Mini Centralized AN OW 139 Figure 7 5 Site Page General Tab DI 140 Figure 7 6 Site Page Dry Content Tab cxgicace init secessvecttnetede eebe deiert edegeg ees 144 Figure 7 7 L1 L2 Connectivity Page Macro Indoor BI 148 Figure 7 8 L1 L2 Connectivity Page Micro Outdoor BI 151 Figure 7 9 Management Page Management Interface Tab Macro BIO 153 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Figures Figure 7 10 Figure 7 11 Figure 7 12 Figure 7 13 Figure 7 14 Figure 7 15 Figure 7 16 Figure 7 17 Figure 7 18 Figure 7 19 Fi
34. 4 4 4 4 Classification Rule Protocol Tab SFA Contig PHS Rues Classik ation Corti IECH Ride Proovi Gesten Rule Source Address Gesitt Ride Destination Address Class k abon Rute Source Port Cl lt gt Made Create in Dekte ac P Revert d Classification Config Nama i Claeshication Config Nase z O Prod S LI Enable IP Protocol ET SS Dore Figure 4 13 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Protocol Tab Create Mode The Classification Rule Protocol tab is applicable only for L3 rules The IP Protocol parameters of an existing rule cannot be modified The Classification Rule Protocol table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name The Classification Rule Protocol Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name Mandatory for Create Mode Must be a Classification Rule Name that already exists in the target managed objects IP Protocol Relevant only if Enable IP Protocol is enabled The enabled protocol number Value is in the range 1 255 using standard IANA protocol values The default is d 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template M
35. 7 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Scheduler Mode The basis for allocating excess bandwidth among relevant users E Equal Rate Throughput Fairness E Equal Time Resource Fairness The selected mode is applicable for both uplink and downlink schedulers The default is Equal Rate Scheduler DL Abuse Protection Level Applicable only if the selected Scheduler Mode is Equal Rate E None No Protection E Low Limit the DL resources allocated to MSs with very low DL transmission Rate H Medium Limit the DL resources allocated to MSs with low and very low DL transmission Rate The default is None Scheduler UL Abuse Protection Level Applicable only if the selected Scheduler Mode is Equal Rate E None No Protection E Low Limit the UL resources allocated to MSs with very low UL transmission Rate E Medium Limit the UL resources allocated to MSs with low and very low UL transmission Rate The default is None 7 8 3 R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page The R6 R8 Bearer Interface page includes the following tabs E RO R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Tab E RO R8 Bearer Interface Page Authentication Tab E RO R8 Bearer Interface Page QoS Marking Rules Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS 7 8 3 1 R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Tab The Bearer tab enables defining the Beare
36. 86 Figure 4 39 The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Control Traffic QoS Rules Tabie rena a a a a a a am 87 Figure 4 40 The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Traffic QoS Rules TSO ACT LCN EE 88 Figure 4 41 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW The Management Template SNMP Managers Page SNMP Managers Tab 90 Device Driver User Manual Figures Figure 4 42 The Management Template SNMP Managers Page SNMP Trap Managers TAD DE 92 Figure 4 43 The Management Template Performance Page Connectivity ASN GW Counters E EE 93 Figure 4 44 The Management Template Logging Page NPU Logging Tab 94 Figure 4 45 The Management Template Logging Page Log severity Tab 95 Figure 5 1 Duplicate Site Manager 103 Figure 5 2 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 1 ccecccessceseeeeeeeeeeeneneeseseeeeeeeeeseneeesseeeeeenees 104 Figure 5 3 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 2 cceccceseceeceecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeseesseeennenees 105 Figure 5 4 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 3 cceccceseceeeeecesseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeseeeeenenees 108 Figure 5 5 Twin Site Creation Wizard Grep4 EE 111 Figure 5 6 Twin Site Creation Wizard Last Gienp ue 112 Figure 6 1 Excel File Example Configuration with 2 BSs 2 New Gites 118 Figure 6 2 Offline Configuration Tool Starting the Tool 120 Figure 6 3 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Import Backup Fe 121 Figure 6
37. BR Agi network maintenance 3 0_Reusel_Bit01_10M_BF 4M Macro BTS BS npu_3_0_5 SYSTEM E 3 0_Reusel_Bit01_10M_BF 4M Macro BTS 85 EE SYSTEM F A Fault Management 3 0_Reuse1 _Bit01_10M_MI BS npu_3_0_5 SYSTEM A Active Events 3 0_Reusel_Bit01_10M BS npu_3_0 5 SYSTEM Event History 3 0_Reusel_Bit23_10M B5 npu_3_0_5 SYSTEM amp Event Fiter Meneger 3 0_Reusel_Bit23_10M Bs npu_3_0 5 SYSTEM 2 3 0_Reusel_Bit23_10M B5 npu_3_0_5 SYSTEM Event Template Manager 3 0_Reusel_Bit23_10M 55 Ee SYSTEM dh Script Command Manager 3 0_Reuse1_Bit45_10M BS npu_3_0_5 SYSTEM E Event Forwarding NBI Manager 3 0_Reusel_Bit45_10M Bs npu_3_0_5 SYSTEM f configuration Management 3 0_Reuse _Bit45_10M D npu_3_0 5 SYSTEM 3 0_Reuse1_Bit45_10M_MI BS SYSTEM 3 bo Reuses_1oM_MIMO_C 4M Macro BTS Bs SYSTEM Al Duplicate Ste 3 0 Reuse3_10M_MIMO_C 4M Macro BTS B5 SYSTEM Administration 3 0_Reuse3_5M_MIMO_Co 4M Macro BTS BS SYSTEM Task manager 3 0_Reuse3_7M_MIMO_Co 4M Macro BTS 85 SYSTEM D Fle Manager S555 4M Macro BTS Bs jeen jeen_macro_asngw 4M Macro BTS ASN GW jeen ZE Macro Indoor ASN GW 4M Macro BTS ASN GW admin License Manager Macro Indoor BS 4M Macro BTS BS admin 5 amp Security Management Macro Indoor Management 4M Macro BTS Management admin A Audit Log Manager Macro Outdoor ASN GW 4M Macro BTS ODU ASN GW admin Macro Outdoor B5 4M Macro BTS ODU BS admin BR User Manager Macro Outdoor Management 4M Macro BTS ODU Management admin User Profi
38. BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Site Page Parameter Description Name Fire High Temperature Flood Low Fuel Generator Failure E Commercial Power Failure Enclosure Door Open Low Battery Threshold Intrusion Detection External Equipment Failure The name of the input alarm Double click on an entry to open the drop down selection menu with the following options The default for all 8 Input Alarms is External Equipment Failure Send Alarm The default for all 8 Input Alarms is Closed Defines the contacts condition for activating the alarm Close or Open Blocking and no options The default for all 8 Input Alarms is no Indicates whether or not blocking is applied for the input alarm yes or no If blocking is applied alarm will not be generated regardless of the status of the input Double click on an entry to open the drop down selection menu with the yes The mapping of the ALRM IN connector s pins to alarms is Pin Number Alarm Number 3 and 15 4 and 16 1 and 17 6 and 18 7 and 19 8 and 20 Oo a AJ wo PY 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Site Page 9 and 21 7 10 and 22 8 7 4 2 2 Output Alarm Dry contact output alarms can be raised cleared by the
39. Bearer interface IP address ASN GW BTS Number The BTS Number Site ID of the target device MS Outer NAI The Outer NAI string of the selected MS MS Data 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 3 The Network Maintenance Manager Retrieval of MS Data Parameter Description MS ID MAC Address the MS ID MAC address Serving BS ID The full ID of the serving BS Serving BS BTS Number The BTS Number Site ID of the serving device Associated Service Flows per flow assigned to the MS SF ID The Service Flow ID Mapped GRE Key The GRE Key mapped to the Service Flow Direction The direction of the Service Flow Up or Down Assigned IP Address The assigned IP address The following buttons are now available Button Description Refresh Click to refresh the displayed data Home Click to return to the main Network Maintenance Management window De Register MS Click to force de registration of the MS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Sg Device Driver User Manual Chapter 3 The Network Maintenance Manager Retrieval of All MSs Data 3 3 Retrieval of All MSs Data The Retrieval of All MSs Data option is used to retrieve general details related to all MSs served by a specific ASN GW as maintained by the ASN GW H IR couemene manager x Aveo ery setngs x Dames x nems x Al
40. Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Multiple Configuration Template Based Task Multiple Configuration Task Name Multiple 1 SC LI Equipment Template Macro Indoor Management Ga E Preview only Template data won t be sent to equipment s Running Software Version IP Address State Equipment Selector L lleitol end WE recent Figure 9 11 Multiple Configuration Task Editor The Multiple Configuration Task editor comprises the following fields Parameter Description Name The name of the task A string of 1 to 128 characters Description An optional free text field providing a general description of the task Equipment Template Use the Browser button to open the Template Selector and select the template you want to use Preview Only Select to define a preview task Preview option allows getting the full report without performing any actual modification to the devices All validation rules are verified This enables the user to gain confidence on performing the multiple configuration task Typically he will run the multiple configuration task without preview when he has no more errors in the Preview task report The Equipment Selector table includes the following details for each device participating in the task Parameter Description Name The name of the device as configured in the device
41. Click on the Delete button to remove a selected entry from the table 5 2 4 5 Sectors Sector parameters are not applicable for twin site creation of a Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Sector no Read only The sector number Sector Heading The sector heading the center angle of the sector in degrees The range is from 0 to 359 Sector name The sector name A descriptive string of up to 32 printable characters Click Next to open the next screen of the wizard 5 2 5 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 3 This screen is not applicable for twin site creation of a Mini Centralized ASN GW 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard d GR Equipment Manager x Gil Network Maintenance x E Template Manager x Al Duplicate Ste x N Twin Site Creation BSs Source BS BS IDLSB 12 12 53 DL Data Zone Permutation Base UL Feedback Zone Permutation Base UL Data Zone Permutation Base 85 Name New BS BS ID LSB Paging Group 1D Bearer IP ES Name Center Frequency MHz Cell ID Preamble Group Segment Number Frame Number Offset Map Major Groups Default Authenticator IP o Duplicate Site Server 10 10 187 117 User admin Figure 5 4 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 3 The third screen of the wizard includes the following parameters
42. Delivery Type D O Commlink Max Sustened Traffic Rate bps 2 C Oowelink Traffic Pratz d Reference Service Grap O Reference Service interface O Urb Min Reserved Traffic Rate bps LI Upink Max Latency ms E CH tine Feloratad Ster fme a gj Ee bet Figure 4 20 The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page Service Flow Tab Create Mode The Service Flow table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Flow ID The Flow ID of the Service Flow Service Profile Contig Name The name alias of the Service Profile The Service Flow Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Flow ID The Flow ID of the Service Flow A unique number in the range from 1 to 255 The Flow ID of an existing Service Flow cannot be updated Service Profile Contig Name The name alias of the Service Profile Must be a Service Profile Name that exists in the target device Convergence Sublayer Type Convergence Sublayer Type ipv4cs or vlancs The default is ipv4cs viancs service flows can be defined only for the Default Service Profile The Convergence Sublayer Type of an existing Service Flow cannot be updated 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Parameter Description Med
43. Description First Zone Minimum Size The initial size in symbols of the first zone When reuse 3 is used within first zone this parameter should be equal across all BSs within deployment The available options are 2 4 34 2xN where N 1 17 or No Limitation The default is No Limitation See limitations in Table 7 7 below Other values should be avoided In the current release this is the actual size of the first zone For reuse 1 the default no limitation can be used the actual size will be set dynamically according to the configuration For reuse 3 a specific value must be configured 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 252 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Maximum Size Maximum size in symbols for first zone Used mainly for performance control capability within frame The available options are 2 4 34 2xN where N 1 17 or No Limitation The default is No Limitation Maximum Size cannot be lower than Minimum Size In the current release the value of this parameter is ignored First Zone size is defined only by Minimum Size parameter Maximum Map Size Limits the maximum size of maps in slots The available options are 10 20 300 10xN where N 1 30 or No Limitation The default is No Limitation Map Major Groups The major groups allocated to the BS for maps transmission as indicated by the se
44. Enable IP Destination Classifier is enabled The IP destination address enabled for the classification rule The default is 0 0 0 0 Cannot be updated in an existing rule IP Destination Mask Relevant only if Enable IP Destination Classifier is enabled Configurable only when Enable IP Destination Classifier is enabled The net mask field that is used to specify a range of IP destination addresses The default is 255 255 255 255 Cannot be updated in an existing rule Layer 4 applicable only for L3 rules Enable TCP UDP Source Indicates whether the use of a range of source ports is enabled for the Port classification rule The default is Disable Cannot be updated in an existing rule lf enabled then Enable IP Protocol is set to enable Protocol can be either 6 TCP or 17 UDP TCP UDP Source Port Relevant only if Enable TCP UDP Source Port is enabled Configurable only when Enable TCP UDP Source Port is enabled The range of values From To of the source ports from the lowest value to the highest value Values range is from 1 to 65535 The default is From 1 To 65535 Cannot be updated in an existing rule 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Gi Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Port Enable TCP UDP Destination Indicates whether the use of a range of destination ports is enabled for the classification rule The default is Disable
45. ID Read only The BS ID LSB of the Neighbor BS IP Address The IP address of the neighbor BS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description BTS Name Read only The name of the Neighbor BS site BTS Number Read only The BTS Name Site ID of the Neighbor BS site The Neighbor List also includes the following buttons Button Description Add Entry Opens the BS Selector window that enables selection of one or several new candidate neighbors The selected neighbors appears in the neighbor list however the new neighbors are not actually added until the Add Neighboring Task is executed For each new entry in the list you should define the IP Address of the neighbor BS ID IP mapping Action on Selected Neighbors Add Opens the Add Neighboring Task that allows adding the selected BS s to the neighbor list of the current BS Delete Opens the Delete Neighboring Task that allows deleting the selected BS s and their details from the neighbor list of the current BS Get Update Opens the Get Update Neighboring Task that allows getting an update from the selected Neighbor BS sites regarding their current parameters values Network Update To Neighbors Send Updates to All Neighbors Opens the Send Update to All Neighbors Neighboring Task that allows sending updates regarding this BS to all or selec
46. Management 00 cccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenenss 132 7 3 Equipment View Page a sacicsssseciccdetie centestasiettcncacarttatnnedegiensnnteasesundsensntantaasesessesnsanis 134 7 3 1 Equipment View Page for Macro BTS Equipment ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 134 7 3 2 Equipment View Page for Mini Centralized AN GW 138 K WE 2 ne re ree eee ee ten 140 FAA Site General TAD sa esri a E ENK 140 7 4 2 Site Dry Contact Eege nee 144 7 5 eet UE 147 7 5 1 L1 L2 Connectivity PAGS icicicssotssscannscteatsishoncedascactpveaunsd pieuaieseaeeianctenevbdoneianiees 147 7 5 2 Management Page iacsaceianicceeccetatia orem Giestanec cence licence ene 152 7 5 3 ASN GW Bearer Interface Page AAA 176 7 5 4 ASN GW Pools Page geess eege dE 177 7 59 Keep Alive Ee aia eG 178 1 60 UE E 181 FOA EE 181 702 e EE 192 TD BSA E 211 TIA E NEE 211 7 7 2 Service Group PAGS E 214 7 7 3 QoS Marking Me E 225 TIA SFA E 228 Tlo THOR ie lee en 239 Ke WR 243 7 8 1 Creating Copying Deleting a BS siic cess secoriselstrecesntintextanenne dinates 243 DANO E 248 7 8 3 R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page ccccccccsseeencceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseneeeenees 271 L Site SO CUO ss scsiscccssatencsaeetnctecaccentenscntcancanecenesaaled aaan aaa aranana aasa KAn pinaasa danaa danian 278 7 9 1 Creating Deleting a Site Gechor EEN 278 7 9 2 Site Sector lt gt e E 279 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual
47. Management Template SNMP Managers Page SNMP Managers Tab The SNMP Managers table includes the following parameter for each row 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager Management Template Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Read Community The SNMP Read Community string allowing execution of SNMP Get operations A string of 1 to 10 printable characters case sensitive The default is the device is public The SNMP Manager Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Read Community The SNMP Read Community string allowing execution of SNMP Get operations A string of up to 10 printable characters case sensitive The default is public Write Community The SNMP Write Community string allowing execution of SNMP Set and Get operations A string of 1 to 10 printable characters case sensitive The default in the device is private x NOTE The Communities are mandatory and both must be defined other than null Duplication of Communities pairs is not allowed each pair must be unique IMPORTANT If you delete all SNMP Managers you will loose the ability to manage the site using SNMP 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW a Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager Management Template 4 6 1 2 SNMP Trap Managers Tab
48. Mask 255 255 255 0 Next Hop Gateway w z n E Yin 1D 12 802 19 Pricey i nsee Se 1 Ste e Ann Dore Figure 7 10 Management Page Management Interface Tab Micro BTS The Management Interface tab for Micro BTS includes the parameters of the Management Interface 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Source IP Address The IP address of the interface The default is 192 168 1 1 Subnet MAsk The IP subnet mask of the interface The default is 255 255 255 0 Next Hop Gateway The Next Hop Default Gateway for the Management interface VLAN ID The VLAN ID of management traffic The range is 11 100 110 4094 The default is 12 802 1P Priority The 802 1P VLAN Priority of management traffic The range is 0 7 The default is 0 DSCP The DSCP of management traffic The range is 0 63 The default is 0 7 5 2 2 QoS Marking Rules Tab The QoS Marking Rules tab is not applicable for Micro Outdoor BTSs The QoS Marking Rules tab enables defining the rules that classify the signaling and management traffic originating from the NPU into different flows and 802 1p VLAN Priority and or DSCP values to be applied on traffic that match the criteria defined by the applicable classification rules Management Management interface Q05 Marling Rules ACL IP Routing SN Managers Perfor
49. PIU that is not installed 7 6 1 1 2 PSU Card Properties The PSU Card Properties table includes the following parameters for each PSU card slot Parameter Description Slot Number Read only The number of slot allocated to the PSU card 1 4 Required Indicates whether the PSU card is required in the specified slot Double click on the entry to open a selection drop down menu displaying the available options Yes No The default is Yes Installed Read only The status of the PSU card installation Installed or Not installed Operational Read only The operational status of the PSU card Operational or Down 7 6 1 2 NPU Page The NPU page is not applicable for Micro Outdoor BTS The NPU page displays the properties of the NPU card and enables control of the card and configuration of the time for automatic scheduling of the configuration backup 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment NPU Card Properties Slot Number Instaled Yes Sarin Number 7619738 HW Version Number HW Revision Number 3 Operational SW versan Number Shadow SW Version Number Current Running SW Source Control Sturdown ergin No Acton l Fatomatic Configuration Backup Daly Bachup Tise 00 j 00 el 1 etre a Ant Core Figure 7 21 NPU Page The NPU page includes the following E Ca
50. Removed GPS Adapter Required August 2009 Power Feeder Page Applicable only for Indoor BTS August 2009 Antenna Page Changed to reflect the use of the new Antenna Product Type parameter Added Information read only field updated description of Description and Number of Ports Updated ranges for Longitude and Latitude Up to a maximum of 24 antennas can be defined for an Outdoor BTS August 2009 AAA Page Updated structure Accounting Authentication UDP Port parameters removed AAA Name added August 2009 Qos Marking Page Updated range for QoS Marking Rule Name and Service Flow Media Flow Type Marking Rule Name must be unique in the device Added description of functionality of the feature August 2009 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Service Group Page Service Interface Tab Changed Tunnel MTU Size to MTU Size Updated description of Default Gateway IP Address Added Subnet Mask Updated value range for Service Interface Name 1 30 characters Added general description of service interfaces Updated description of Tunnel Destination IP August 2009 Service Group Page Service Groups Tab Changed Client Class Identifier to Vendor Class Identifier Added Secondary DNS Server Added Service group deletion rule rela
51. SW Version and click Finish x NOTE In the current release Supported products NE Type Macro BTS Indoor Macro BTS ODU Macro Outdoor and Micro BTS ODU Micro Outdoor Supported SW Versions 2 5M2 2 5 213 3 1 3 0 5 3 0M 3 0 10 6 4 2 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Import Backup File Offline Configuration Tool Generate Offline Configuration Files for Macro BTS with SVY Version NPU 30M Figure 6 3 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Import Backup File 1 Use the Select File button to open the backup file selection window Only files whose NE Type and SW Version match the selected Wizard Required Parameters will be displayed Select the backup file to be used as the template golden file by the tool 2 Click Next If the selected file cannot be used as a golden file e g the configured ASN Topology is Distributed ASN GW which is not supported in the current release an error message will be displayed 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW eil Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 The Offline Configuration Tool Using the Offline Configuration Tool Only Transparent Mode is supported Figure 6 4 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard ASN Topology Mismatch Message The next step will become available only if a usable file is selected 6 4 3 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Import Unique Parameters File SOT ee mem Figure 6 5 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Impo
52. Serving BS 64 to 63 5 in Hand R i is below the Trigger steps of 0 5 SE threshold in dB Neighbor CINR gt Handover Request The CINR at the Neighbor 64 to 63 5 in BS is above the Trigger steps of 0 5 threshold in dB Neighbor CINR Own CINR gt Handover Request The CINR at the Neighbor 64 to 63 5 in BS minus the CINR at the steps of 0 5 Serving BS is above the Trigger threshold in dB Own RSSI lt Scan Request Handover Request The RSSI at the Serving BS is below the Trigger threshold in dBm 103 75 to 40 in steps of 0 25 Neighbor RSSI gt Handover Request The RSSI at the Neighbor BS is above the Trigger threshold in dBm 103 75 to 40 in steps of 0 25 Neighbor RSSI Own RSSI gt Handover Request The RSSI at the Neighbor BS minus the RSSI at the Serving BS is above the Trigger threshold in dBm 32 to 31 75 in steps of 0 25 Distance Scan Request The Serving BS distance 0 3400 in steps aaa R t from the MS calculated by of 50 if BS BW is ST EE measuring the round trip 10 MHz delay is above the Trigger 0 6800 in steps threshold in meter f of 50 if BS BW is 5 MHz 0 4800 in steps of 50 if BS BW is 7 MHz Note Following any change in Bandwidth the existing Distance triggers must be deleted and redefined 7 8 2 1 4 3 Neighbor List The Neighbor List includes the following parameters for each Neighbor BS Parameter Description BS Neighbor
53. Site Creation Wizard Grend 110 5 2 7 Twin Site Creation Wizard Last Giep ENNEN 112 Chapter 6 The Offline Configuration TOG viencccnsasrocerertnctndercea tena 115 CDI LOEN ooeisi seseetncs cnenentecsns pes nennananaanacaancnssanacsanciesssnsensadsnesssudientiatenanndeunanene 117 6 2 Golden site Configuration Backup File ccceesseceeseseeneeeseneeneeeseeeeeeeeeeenes 117 Gad EX CO UE 118 6 4 Using the Offline Configuration Tool ccccsseseeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 120 6 4 1 Starting the Offline Configuration Tool Wizard 120 6 4 2 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Import Backup Pie 121 6 4 3 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Import Unique Parameters Pie 122 6 4 4 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Merge File csccceeeeseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 124 6 4 5 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Gummam 125 Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ssssssssesssssssrssrrsrrsrrrrrrrnrrrerrerrers 126 7 1 Using the Device Manager ssssssssnennnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnana 128 7 1 1 Introduction to the Device Manager 2eiertgeebrerge ge eege geseNeeeeecaeeie 128 7 1 2 The Device Manager Components AAA 129 7 1 3 Common eege RE TE 130 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Contents 7 1 4 Working with Configuration Tables cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 130 7 2 Introduction to Device
54. Software Upgrade Task Editor includes the following general parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Software Upgrade Task Parameter Description Task Name The name of the task A string of 1 to 128 printable characters Software Download Activity The type of upgrade NPU Software Upgrade or AU Software Upgrade AU Software Upgrade is applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS 9 4 2 The content of the Software Upgrade Settings and Select Equipment sections depend on the selected Software Download Activity NPU Software Upgrade The Software Upgrade Settings section comprises the following action options when NPU Software Upgrade is selected as the Software Download Activity Parameter Description Download to Shadow Loads the upgrade file selected in the File Name selection field below to the Shadow memory of the applicable device s Reboot from Shadow Perform reset and boot from the Shadow file Set as Operational Version Applicable only for devices running from the Shadow file Sets the running file as the new Operational file The previous Operational Main file will now become the new Shadow file File Name Available only if the Download to Shadow option is selected If the default TFTP server is used see below he drop down menu enables selecting one of the relevant files available in the default firmware f
55. The General section is divided into sub sections 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment The Required section enables viewing the read only Type of the BTS It also provide read only properties of the Radio based on the BTS type Parameter Description Radio Type The BTS type Frequency Band The frequency band supported by the BTS Type in MHz Maximum Tx Power The maximum Tx power available for the BTS Type in dBm Port Configuration The Port Configuration of the BTS Type 2x2 The Installed section displays read only information about the Type and the properties of the Radio that are available only for a Radio that is associated to a sector Parameter Description Radio Type The BTS type or Radio not Associated to sector Frequency Band The frequency band supported by the installed BTS Type in MHz Maximum Tx Power The maximum Tx power available for the installed BTS Type in dBm Port Configuration The Port Configuration of the installed BTS Type 2x2 In addition the following Radio general properties are displayed below the Required and Installed sections Parameter Description Serial Number Read only The serial number of the BTS External Cavity Filter Existence Check to indicate the existence of an external cavity filter The default is no unc
56. The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for QPSK 3 4 8 to Required C N Level for QPSK 3 4 7 see QPSK 3 4 parameter above The default is 19 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description 16 QAM 3 4 The C N in dB required for sending 16 QAM 3 4 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 16 QAM 1 2 16 to Required C N Level for 16 QAM 1 2 14 see 16 QAM 1 2 parameter above The default is 22 64 QAM 1 2 The C N in dB required for sending 64 QAM 1 2 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 16 QAM 3 4 16 to Required C N Level for 16 QAM 3 4 14 see 16 QAM 3 4 parameter above The default is 23 64 QAM 2 3 The C N in dB required for sending 64 QAM 2 3 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 64 QAM 1 2 8 to Required C N Level for 64 QAM 1 2 7 see 64 QAM 1 2 parameter above The default is 25 64 QAM 3 4 The C N in dB required for sending 64 QAM 2 3 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 64 QAM 2 3 8 to Required
57. Type The type of device BTS Number The ID number of the device Site ID as configured in the device Software Version The running software version of the device NPU IP Address The IP address of the device State The operational state of the equipment Up Down Unreachable Unknown 9 1 3 Actions Tab Performance Collection General Entities Actions E collection export Default Folder C fAlvariSTAR Filesystem SitesFiles Performance O82 bel ker a ken Figure 9 3 Performance Collection Task Editor Actions Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Performance Collection Task The Actions tab enables setting how collected performance data is saved By default the performance data is saved in the management system s file system In addition the performance data xml files can be exported and saved in the client management system s file system To automatically export the collected data to the location indicated in the read only Default Folder text box select the Collection eXport check box 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Backup Configuration Task 9 2 Backup Configuration Task LOCAL CRAFT NOTE craft In the Local CRAFT Utility the Configuration Backup Task is applicable only to the managed device Craft The Backup Configuration task enables the retrieval of device
58. Value 2 2 3 81 Figure 6 9 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Consistency Rules Issues 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW D Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 The Offline Configuration Tool Using the Offline Configuration Tool New configuration files can be generated only if there are no consistency rules issues for all sites defined in the Excel file 6 4 5 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Summary D xX Offline Configuration Tool Generate OMine Configuration Files for Macro BTS wath SYV Version NPU 3 0 M The olur Olfine Configuration Fies vd be gener sted and saved in the Fie Manager E Ee Fie Name i Fie oeoo js 10 10 141 222 201101161325 mt Generated Offline Configuration Fie Les 10 10 141 194 201101161325 and ae Generated Offline Configuration Fike Total number of Offline Configuration Files 2 Figure 6 10 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Summary If there were no consistency rules issues all the required configuration files can be generated The Summary window displays the main details of the files that will be generated Click Finish to generate the files and save them in the File Manager as Offline Configuration Offline Cfg files 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual D d Managing a Single Device Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device x NOTE This Chapter describes the Device Manager for the BTS equipment Indo
59. a frame in slots one slot equals 3 symbols To avoid BS BS interference the ul dl allocation must be identical in all BSs ina geographical region The range is 4 7 or 10 for bandwidth of 5 or 10MHz 3 5 or 7 for bandwidth of 7MHz The default is 6 After each change in the Bandwidth parameter the value is changed to lt blank gt and must be configured to a proper value 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS 7 8 2 1 3 Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab The Air Frame Structure Zones tab enables configuration of the map zone parameters Basic 255 243 41 1 1 2 General Ar Frame Structure General Ar Frame Structure Zones Mobility First Zone Maina See Maximus Size Maium Map Sine Meo Major Groups Basie Map Repetition Frame Structure Mode Dt Diversity Mode Neighbor Deom Forming Sound Sh t Used RCID Usage Somnliek Data Zone Permutation Vase Bask Rate for Managerert Basie Rate for Dako Uptink Feedback Zone Permutation Base Uplink Data Zone Permutation Vase Bask Rate sl Cons Sub Burst Mode no ummation Le symbcls Maam sub Durst Mode No Unitation se symbols No Limitation La der o gi Hi Si w zl 1 Bech Ann Ess Figure 7 44 Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab The Air Frame Structure Zones tab includes the following parameters Parameter
60. add it to this fiter s Add X amom C hevert O faxi Communty O Wre Commrgz ahes avi save Figure 4 4 The Template Configuration Editor Tab with a Table The Template Configuration Editor screen comprises the following sections 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager Configuring Templates Section Description Navigation Pane Allowing selection of the configuration page for the selected group of parameters Title Bar Identifies the template s MO Managed Object and SW Version It also includes standard icons for minimizing maximizing or closing the Configuration Editor Validation Errors Display area for possible configuration errors such as a value that is not valid or contradiction between configured values of two or more parameters Configurations with Validation Errors cannot be saved Page and Tab Identification Identification of the current Page and Tab Tab Selection Allow selection of the configuration tab for the selected sub group of parameters Mode Applicable only for some tabs with tables In a tab with scalar values only the Update mode is applicable Enables selection of the configuration mode Create Update Delete for the relevant table s entries For more details refer to Managing Tables and Template Modes below Filters Applicable
61. assigned to the classification rule The range is 0 255 The default is 0 TOS Range From and TOS Applicable only if Type is L3 and Enable IP TOS is enabled The range of values Range To From To of the IP TOS field from the lowest value to the highest value Values range is from 0 to 63 The default is From 0 To 0 TOS Mask Applicable only if Type is L3 and Enable IP TOS is enabled The mask for IP TOS value This bit mask is applied to the TOS field received in the IP header to be matched within the configured TOS range The range is from 0 to 63 The default is 0 Enable IP TOS Applicable only if Type is L3 Indicates whether the use of TOS based classification is enabled The default is no disable PHS Rule Name Applicable only if Type is L3 The Packet Header Suppression PHS rule name associated with the classification rule Specify the PHS Rule Name if you want to perform PHS for this flow Must be a PHS Rule Name that already exists in the target managed objects The default is null none which is not a valid value Type Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing rule The rule s type L2 or L3 The default is L2 the default in the device is L3 A Classification Rule includes additional parameters that can be managed using the other tabs of the SFA page 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template
62. automatically for each new SNMP Trap Manager see SNMP Managers Tab on page 168 External Log TFTP Server see Logging Tab on page 174 or SW Upgrade TFTP Server see Software Upgrade Task on page 303 These entries will be updated deleted upon modification deletion of the relevant Server The configuration of these entries is E Destination Server s IP address E Mask 255 255 255 255 E Next Hop External Management Next Hop IP address see External Management Interface on page 154 These entries will be changed automatically following any change in the External Management Next Hop IP address In addition the default Any Destination entry with Destination 0 0 0 0 and Mask 0 0 0 0 may be created The Next Hop IP address of this route must be in the same subnet with one of the NPU IP interfaces according to specific network topology and needs SNMP Managers Tab The SNMP Managers tab enables managing the lists of Authorized SNMP Managers and SNMP Trap Managers 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity H Management Management Interface QoS Marking Rules ACL IP Rotna SNMP Managers Performance Loggng Al SNMP Managers Manager Number Read Gomm Wrke Community i vin private 3 SNMP Trap Managers BTS IP Address Port Number Community Enable Ste Traps 10 16 1993 162 pik Enable 1
63. c ccccessccceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeesaeeeeeeneeeeeseeeeeaeees 327 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual zl i E Enabling Discovery Chapter 1 Enabling Discovery For general details on discovering devices refer to the relevant sections in the Management System Manual The SNMP agent in the devices supports SNMP v2c To allow remote management of the site and to enable discovery by the management system some basic parameters must be configured locally using CLI via the MON port of the equipment Refer to the equipment System Manual for information on how to access the CLI either via the MON port or via Telnet and how to use it The following configuration steps describe the minimum mandatory configuration actions required 1 Clear Previous Configuration Clear existing site configuration must be executed for used NPUs Restore to factory default and reboot using the following command npu restore factory default Connectivity Mode The connectivity mode determines how traffic is to be routed between the NPU and the BSs AAA server and external Management System servers The default connectivity mode is In Band IB via the Data port Alternatively the NPU can be managed Out Of Band OOB via the dedicated Management port In Unified mode the bearer IP domain and external management IP domain via the Data port are unified To view the current and configu
64. comprises two sections The Antennas List and the Antennas Parameter Editor section 77 EMS_after_offline on 10 10 144 35 Configuring Equipment e e 3 Antenna Antennas Antenna Number Antenna Product Type Antenna Parameters EE Antenna Product Type defaultiport 2 pn323111 b pn323112 Default 1 port 1 6 o Description Specification Electrical Down Tilt o deg Installation Mechanical Down Tilt H deg Heading D deg Cable Loss DS d Location Longitude ooo U coo Ue v deg Latitude oo U og Un x deo Tower Height a m B v aoo Figure 7 30 Antenna Page The Antennas List includes the following read only parameters for each defined antenna 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description Antenna Number The index number of the antenna Antenna Product Type The type of antenna Product ID Select an entry to open the Antenna Parameters Editor allowing you to view modify the selected antenna parameters The following buttons are available below the Antennas List Button Description Add Adds a new entry to the Antennas List The Antenna Parameters Editor will open with default values enabling to define the parameters for the new antenna After completing the definition
65. d Name id Ku ng O Pafe Ratus x tae n bene Mode The Service Profile Config table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Name The name alias of the Service Profile The Service Profile Config Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Name The name alias of the Service Profile A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be Service Profile cannot be updated Profile Status associating a service flow the status can be updated to enabled 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW a Device Driver User Manual ASN GW Template unique in the device Mandatory for Create Mode The name of an existing Indicates whether the profile is enabled or disabled The default is Disable when adding a new service profile the status can t be enabled only after Chapter 4 The Template Manager 4 4 5 2 ASN GW Template Service Flow Tab Service Protite Config Servae Flow URelererce Class kation Rude CL Reference Classi nation Rade Mode Create OUpdate Qoekee Revert d Row ID DE d Servier Profile Config Name LI Convergence Sublayer Type DI LI Medis Fiw Type O Uplink Date Debvery Type D O Uplink max Sustained Traffic Rate bos lt O Upin Traffic Priory lt LI Downlink Data
66. devices running SW version 3 0 for reuse 1 with Map Major Groups 2 and 3 selected using a bandwidth of 1OMHz Beam Forming diversity optimization of coverage for Fixed deployment of Data amp VoIP traffic Default templates cannot be edited or deleted To create a different template based on an existing default template select the required source template and use the Copy option 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Editor 4 2 The Template Editor Template Name GE NE Type Iv Software Version Ki v MO Type Owner admin Creation Date 16 06 2010 18 29 25 Figure 4 2 The Template Editor The Template Editor comprises the following fields Parameter Description Name The name of the template A string of 1 to 128 characters Description An optional free text field providing a general description of the task A string of 0 to 250 characters NE Type The type of Network Element for which the template is prepared Can be configured only for a new template MO Type The type of Managed Object ASN GW BS or Management for which the template is applicable Can be configured only for a new template SW Version The SW Version used for preparing the template Can be configured only for a new template Owner Read only The user that created the template Creation D
67. for default templates Deletes the selected template s from the database The application prompts you for confirmation Import Imports a template XML file from the client file system Click to open the Import window browse to the location on the client file system where the file is stored select the file and click Import The Template Editor will open allowing you to modify the Name and Description of the imported file NOTE The Import option is available when right clicking anywhere in the work area without the need to select any existing entry Export Not available if two or more templates are selected Exports the selected template XML file to the client file system Click to open the Export window browse to the desired location on the client file system if necessary change the name to be assigned to the template file in the client file system and click Export to export the template 4 1 2 Default BS Templates The system is supplied with several default BS templates for some typical deployment scenarios The template s name provide the main properties of the relevant deployment scenario as illustrated by the following examples 3 0 Reuse3_10M_MIMO Capacity_Fix_Data amp Voip A template for devices running SW version 3 0 reuse 3 a bandwidth of 1OMHz MIMO diversity optimization of capacity for Fixed deployment Data amp VolP traffic 3 0 Reusel_Bit23_10M_BF_Coverage_ Fix Data amp Voip A template for
68. from the list right click and select the Edit option or double click on the selected task If the task is Active the Runtime result screen is displayed displaying the status of the running task If the task is Inactive the Restore Task Editor for the selected task is displayed OR In the File Manager for Equipment files select the required backup configuration file right click and select the Restore option or double click on the selected file The Restore Task Editor for a new task with the details of the selected file Type is Site Configuration is displayed 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Restore Configuration Task OR In the File Manager for Duplicate Site files select the required file right click and select the Restore option or double click on the selected file The Restore Task Editor for a new task with the details of the selected file is displayed Task Name File Selection Type Site Configuration Name 200908222056 xml gz Creation Date wu Aug 27 13 02 32 IDT 2009 Source Equipment Region BTS Number BTS Name IP Address 10 10 144 35 Auto Reset Destination Equipment Sisner Ern re aai 4M Macro BTS 10 10 144 35 Remove Giele e El Eed D Figure 9 5 Restore Task Editor The Restore Task editor comprises the following fields 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapt
69. is set to enable 4 4 3 QoS Marking Page va Mode crete Giodte Delete hadd Xe e Gh Revert Vo Marra Rule Nome Wl spe E E Rude Applad on interface ze C Service Flow Data Delivery Type C Service Flow Traffic Priority D L Serven Plow Madis Flew Type C Outer DSP Marking O o p Prionty Marking Rue Ratus we Sal ere Figure 4 9 The ASN GW Template QoS Marking Page Create Mode The QoS Marking table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Marking Rule Name The name alias of the Marking Rule The QoS Marking Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Marking Rule Name The name alias of the Marking Rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Mandatory for Create Mode The name of an existing QoS Marking Rule cannot be updated 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Parameter Description Rule Applied on Interface Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing rule The type of interface for which the bearer plane QoS rule is defined Internal R4 R6 tunnel External R1 or ANY The default is Internal the default in the device is ANY Service Flow Data Delivery Type Not app
70. lowest frequency of the ODU s radio band f2 is the highest frequency of the ODU s band and BW is the configured bandwidth Note that ODU 2305 2360 000N 36 1x1 Y 0 includes two bands 2305 2320 2345 2360 MHz Cell ID The Cell ID IDCell used for preamble selection The range is from 0 to 31 Preamble Group The preamble group 1 or 2 A value of 2 is applicable only for the following combinations of Segment Number and Cell ID values Segment Number 0 Cell ID 0 3 6 9 12 15 Segment Number 1 Cell ID 1 4 7 10 13 16 Segment Number 2 Cell ID 2 5 8 11 14 17 Segment Number The segment BS number in a three sector BS 0 2 This number influences the values available for Preamble Group selection see above preamble selection and the configuration of Map see below Frame Number Offset Controls the offset applied between the internal frame count and the reported frame number The range is from 0 to 15 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard Parameter Description Map A bit map 6 bits indicating the allocated to the BS for maps transmission If BW 5 MHz bits 1 3 and 5 are not relevant grayed out Bits 0 2 and 4 must be set checked Configure 111111 If BW 7 10 MHz with reuse 1 all bits 0 to 5 must be set checked Configure 111111 For BW 7 10 MHz with Reuse
71. only for some tabs with tables using Update or Delete Mode Displays the selected filtering criteria parameter and value for each selected filter For more details on using filters refer to Managing Tables and Template Modes below Configuration Area The work area allowing you to manage the relevant parameters Control Button Save Implements the modifications to the template Exiting the Configuration Template Editor or switching to another page without applying discards the changes Refresh Updates the displayed information according to current values acquired from the database Status Bar Indicates the status of the current operation and displays a progress bar when applicable 4 3 2 Managing Tables and Template Modes The principles of managing template tables depend on the template Mode E Managing Tables in Create Mode E Managing Tables in Update Mode E Managing Tables in Delete Mode 4 3 2 1 Managing Tables in Create Mode Each row in the table includes one or more parameters that provides a unique identification of the entry In Create Mode The row identifier s are mandatory and are displayed for each saved entry 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager Configuring Templates 4 3 2 2 To add a row to the table click on the Add button above the table A row will be added to the table and a row configu
72. oul Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 The Offline Configuration Tool Excel File 6 3 Excel File An Excel file that includes specific configuration details for each of the new sites should be pre prepared Site 1 Site 2 Configuration Configuration c Site Site 2 General siteld 3536 Site siteName if 45 Third Street siteAddress sadasdasdsadasds Parameters siteRackLocation bsPreambleGroup BS 1 bsFrameNumberOffset bsDIDataZonePermBase Parameters bsF eedbackZonePermBase bsUIDataPermBase bsCellld bsPreambleGroup bsFrameNumberOffset BS 2 bsDIDataZonePermBase Param eters bsFeedbackZonePermBase bsUIDataPermBase bsBearerlp bsPagingGroupld Figure 6 1 Excel File Example Configuration with 2 BSs 2 New Sites For each site the file contains general site parameters and BS parameters for each BS The BS parameter section may be repeated as needed according to the number of BSs x NOTE In the current release configurations with up to 3 BSs are supported by the Offline Configuration Tool The site configuration will use the order of BSs as they appear in the excel file as the order of BSs in the sector association table The same number of BSs must be configured for all sites in the file Specific configuration parameters should be defined according to the following rules 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User M
73. property name you can add k to this fiter L 7 Uplink Median Noise dem 2 O Ges Effort M0 ATR a lt O rw O usi O ERIR Figure 4 34 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Management Tab The Management parameters are Parameter Description Uplink Median Noise The uplink median noise level represents the median value of the noise floor histogram If the uplink median noise level exceeds this value an excessive uplink median noise alarm will be generated The range is from 135 to 100 dBm In the device the default value of 124 is set to 3 dB above the default value of the Target NI parameter In the template manager the default is 135 Best Effort The threshold for excessive DL dropped packets ratio in promils of DL packets in all Best Effort services which when exceeded triggers a Best Effort service alarm The range is from 1 to 1000 promil The default is 1 in the device the default is 1000 RT VR The threshold for excessive DL dropped packets ratio in promils of DL packets in all RT VR services which when exceeded triggers an RT VR service alarm The range is from 1 to 1000 promil The default is 1 in the device the default is 1000 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template Parameter Description NRT VR The threshold for excessive DL dropped packets ratio in prom
74. purposes The default is 0 Heading deg The the azimuth angle in degrees between the center of the horizontal antenna beamwidth and the true north counting clockwise The range is from 0 to 359 Used only for information inventory purposes The default is 0 Cable Loss dB The attenuation in dB of the cable between the ODU port and antenna port The range is from 0 to 20 in 0 1 dB steps Used only for information inventory purposes The default is 0 5 Location Longitude deg The longitude of the antenna The format is Wl mmm a Ill is longitude in degrees between 000 to 179 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is E east or W west Used only for information inventory purposes The default is 000 000E Latitude deg The latitude of the antenna The format is Il mmm a His longitude in degrees between 00 to 89 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is S South or N north Used only for information inventory purposes The default is 00 000N Tower Height m The height of the antenna above the ground in meters The range is from 0 to 500 Used only for information inventory purposes The default is 0 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW cag ASN GW The ASN GW node applicable for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and for Mini Centralized A
75. s configuration backup file s from selected device s The backup files include copies of all the applicable configuration data and databases in the managed device You can also retrieve Logging files from selected device s Logging files can later be exported to and used by an external application as part of a debugging procedure The device maintains up to the last three created configuration backup files Configuration backup files are created periodically by the NPU or upon a specific request to backup the current configuration When requesting a backup file you can either create and retrieve the current configuration or retrieve one of the previous backup configuration files available in the NPU gt To open the Backup Task Editor To open the Backup Task Editor do one of the following E In the Equipment Manager select one or several entries right click on the selected entries and select the Backup Configuration option The State of all selected devices must be Up The Backup Task Editor for a new task is displayed with the selected devices automatically included in the Source Equipment table E In the Task Manager window do one of the following To open a new task use the Task Wizard To open an existing task select a Configuration Backup task from the list of existing tasks right click and select the Edit option or double click on the selected task s entry If the task is Active the Runtime result screen is o
76. selected property name you can add k to this fikert LI Server iP Enable logaing to server C Enable logging to fie x Lea vs Dore LH Figure 4 44 The Management Template Logging Page NPU Logging Tab The NPU Logging tab includes the following parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW a Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager Management Template Parameter Description Server IP The server IP address of the server on which logs are to be maintained If logging to server is enabled the Server IP cannot be changed To change the Server IP you need three steps 1 Disable logging to server in the managed objects 2 Update the Server IP in the managed objects 3 Enable logging to server in the managed objects The default is 0 0 0 0 which is not a valid value the default in the device is 192 168 0 1 Enable logging to server Indicates whether or not logging to the server is enabled The default is disable Enable logging to file Indicates whether or not logging to file is enabled The default is disable the default in the device is enable 4 6 3 2 Log Severity Tab Mode in Update p Piters By clicking on a selected property nome you can add k to this fier LI Performance go ae Fak SW vernon OOE Connectivity D amaw A8 A8 A AR A8 AN i LI Internal Ai Manager Sal Save ore Figure 4 45 The Manag
77. sent toward those Managers for which this parameter is configured A string of up to 10 printable characters case sensitive The default is public Enable Site Traps Indicates whether the sending of traps to the management station is enabled or disabled The default is Enable The SNMP Trap Managers section also includes the following buttons Button Description Add Manager Adds a new entry to the SNMP Trap Managers table Delete Deletes one or several selected entries from the SNMP Trap Managers table E NOTE For each SNMP Trap Manager a route is automatically created in the IP Routing Table see IP Routing Tab on page 166 Following any change in the table Add Delete Modify the IP Routing Table is updated according to the change 7 5 2 6 Performance Tab The Performance tab allows enabling disabling collection and storage of performance data For details on collection and storage of counters supported counters groups and the counters in each group refer to the Performance Management document 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW ol Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity H Management Management Interface QoS Mahing Rules ACL IP Routing SNMP Managers Performance Loggng A Perl urmance Colection Interval v Mn Performance Groups Activation E hpu Connectevny x interface Trafic E Re interface Total traffic E Re interfa
78. site Typically should not be configured as it is received from the GPS receiver The format is Il mmm a Ill is longitude in degrees between 000 and 179 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is E east or W west Altitude The altitude in meters of the site Typically should not be configured as it is received from the GPS receiver The Altitude is in meters from 300 0 to 9000 0 5 2 4 3 Connectivity Parameter Description Bearer IP Address The IP address of the Bearer Interface Must be unique in the network The default is 172 16 0 1 Not applicable if ASN Topology is Centralized ASN GW External Management IP Address The IP address of the External Management Interface Must be unique in the network The default is 192 168 1 1 Not applicable same as Bearer if NMS Connectivity Mode is Unified 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard 5 2 4 4 IP Routing Parameter Description Destination The destination host or network IP address for the route Mask The net mask for the route Next Hop The next hop IP address for the route A single empty entry is presented allowing to define one static route it is recommended to define the default route in order not to lose connectivity with the device after restoring the file on the device To add more routes click on the Add button
79. the command npu config snmp mgr ReadCommunity public ReadWriteCommunity private For proper operation of the manager you should configure also the Trap Manager parameters and enable sending traps to the defined Trap Manager a npu config trap mgr ip source x x x x port 162 TrapCommunity public x x x x is the IP address of the EMS server b npu config trap mgr enable ip source x x x x Note that if the management system is behind a NAT router the NAT Outside IP address the IP of the router s interface connected in the direction of the managed device LAN must be defined in the device as a Trap Manager with traps sending enabled In the NAT router Port Forwarding NAT Traversal must be configured for UDP and TCP ports 161 and 162 from Outside IP connected to the managed device s LAN to Inside IP connected to the management system s LAN 8 Site ID Definition To define the site ID BTS Number npu config site identifier x x is the unique site identifier a number in the range from 1 to 999999 9 Save and Apply To save the configuration run the command npu write otherwise after the next time reset you will lose the configuration changes To apply the new configuration run the command npu reset 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual nl d Using the Equipment Manager Chapter 2 Using the Equipment Manager For general details on using the Equipment Mana
80. to return to the main Network Maintenance Management window Export List to CSV Click to open the Select Export Destination File allowing you to export the All MSs Data to a CSV file in a selectable location De Register All MSs Click to force de registration of all MSs served by the selected device Retrieve Selected MS Full Data Select an entry in the MS Data table and click to retrieve from the ASN GW full details for the selected MS See below the displayed details The displayed full details for the selected MS include Parameter Description Target ASN GW IP Address The IP address of the target device Bearer interface IP address ASN GW BTS Number The BTS Number Site ID of the target device MS Outer NAI The Outer NAI string of the selected MS MS Data MS ID MAC Address the MS ID MAC address Serving BS ID The full ID of the serving BS Serving BS BTS Number The BTS Number Site ID of the serving device Associated Service Flows per flow assigned to the MS SF ID The Service Flow ID Mapped GRE Key The GRE Key mapped to the Service Flow 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 3 The Network Maintenance Manager Retrieval of All MSs Data Parameter Description Direction The direction of the Service Flow Up or Down Assigned IP Address The as
81. unique identifier of the ASN GW NAS Sent in Access Request message only if configured Should be in FQDN format Up to 64 characters The default is GMT Time Zone Offset The time zone offset in seconds from GMT at the NAS The range is from 0 to 86400 seconds The default is 0 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description VLAN Classifier Bit Alignment Defines how to transfer VLAN ID between R3 and R6 E MSB Shift a When transferring classifier VID value from R3 side to R6 side the binary value of the 12 least significant bits in R3 TLV will be copied and pasted as most significant bits in R6 TLV b When transferring classifier VID value from R6 to R3 the binary value of the 12 most significant bits in R6 TLV will be copied and pasted as the 12 least significant bits in R3 TLV E LSB The whole 16 bit value of the relevant TLV will be transferred without any change when transferring classifier VID value from R3 side to R6 side and from R6 to R3 The default is MSB Shift RADIUS Shared Secret The shared secret between the AAA client and the AAA server s A string of 1 to 49 characters The default is default This is a write only parameter not displayed to the user Source IP Address The interface providing RADIUS client functionality The available options are Bearer and External Management T
82. user to notify an external device connected to the unit The Outputs Alarm table includes the following parameters Parameter Description Output Number The Output Alarm Number 1 3 Refer to the table below for details on the mapping of Output Alarm Numbers to pins in the ALRM OUT connector Name The name of the output alarm A descriptive string of up to 256 characters State Indicates the state of the output alarm On or Off Double click on an entry to open the drop down selection menu with the on and off options The default for all 3 Output Alarms is off The mapping of the ALRM OUT connector s pins to alarms is Pin Number Corresponding Alarm Number 1 FIX 2 N C 14 N O 11 FIX 12 N C 13 N O 2 23 FIX 24 N C 25 N O 3 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity 7 5 Connectivity The Connectivity node includes five pages E L1 L2 Connectivity Page E Management Page E ASN GW Bearer Interface Page E ASN GW Pools Page E Keep Alive Page 7 5 1 L1 L2 Connectivity Page The L1 L2 Connectivity page enables viewing modifying defining the various aspects of site connectivity such as the parameters of Ethernet ports VLAN IDs and External Ether Type This section includes E L1 L2 Connectivity Page for Macro BTS and Mini Centralized A
83. wireless network Typically the Operator ID copied from the source BS should not be changed The format is x y z where x y and z are in the range from 0 to 255 The default is the Operator ID of the source BS Bearer IP The IP address of the bearer interface of the BS Center Frequency The center of the frequency band in which the BS will transmit in MHz The available values in accordance with the bands supported by different ODUs are HM 2022 5 to 2217 5 in steps of 0 125 HM 2302 5 to 2397 5 in steps of 0 125 E 2487 5 to 2687 5 in steps of 0 125 HM 3302 5 to 3397 5 in steps of 0 125 E 3402 5 to 35797 5 in steps of 0 125 See also note below regarding dependency on configured Bandwidth Cell ID The Cell ID IDCell used for preamble selection The range is from 0 to 31 Preamble Group The preamble group 1 or 2 A value of 2 is applicable only for the following combinations of Segment Number and Cell ID values Segment Number 0 Cell ID 0 3 6 9 12 15 Segment Number 1 Cell ID 1 4 7 10 13 16 Segment Number 2 Cell ID 2 5 8 11 14 17 Segment Number The segment BS number in a three sector BS 0 2 This number influences the values available for Preamble Group selection see above preamble selection and the configuration of Map Major Groups see below used for the FDC transmission Frame Number Offset Controls the offset applied between the internal frame count and the reported frame number The range is from 0 t
84. 0 the default in the device is 500 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type UGS RTVR ERTVR Uplink Tolerated Jitter ms the maximum delay variation jitter in milliseconds for this uplink service flow The range is 0 4294967295 The default is 0 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type UGS ERTVR Uplink Unsolicited Grant Interval ms The nominal interval in ms between successive data grant opportunities for this uplink service flow The range is 0 65535 The default is 0 the default in the device is 20 Must be lower than Uplink Max Latency Relevant only for uplink service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type UGS ERTVR Downlink Min Reserved Traffic Rate Kbps The minimum reserved traffic rate in Kops for downlink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 0 40000 The default is 0 the default in the device is 250 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate downlink data delivery type UGS NRTVR RTVR ERTVR For NRTVER RTVR and ERTVR cannot be higher than the Max Sustained Traffic Rate Downlink Max Latency ms The maximum latency in ms allowed in the downlink service flow The range is 0 4294967295 The default is 0 the default in the device is 500 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate downlink data delivery type UGS RTVR ERTVR Downlink
85. 0 10 187 116 162 p t r Enable add Manon E Die 1 Sais o An Cone Figure 7 14 Management Page SNMP Managers Tab The SNMP Managers tab includes the following sections E SNMP Managers E SNMP Trap Managers 7 5 2 5 1 SNMP Managers An SNMP Manager comprises a pair of SNMP Communities Read Community and Write Community A management station is permitted to manage the BTS using SNMP only if it uses one of the configured SNMP Communities or a pair of SNMP Communities A maximum of five SNMP Managers can be configured If the maximum number is reached the Add Manager button becomes inactive The SNMP Managers table includes the following fields for each authorized SNMP Manager Parameter Description Manager Number The index number of the SNMP Manager Read Community The SNMP Read Community string allowing execution of SNMP Get operations A string of 1 to 10 printable characters case sensitive The default is public 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Write Community The SNMP Write Community string allowing execution of SNMP Set and Get operations A string of up to 10 printable characters case sensitive The default is private The SNMP Managers section also includes the following buttons Button Description Add Manager Adds a new entry to the SNMP M
86. 0xN where N 1 30 or No Limitation The default is No Limitation Neighbor Beam Forming Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor units operating in MIMO Matrix A B mode The beam forming mechanism is based on symmetry in performance between uplink and down link To compensate for possible differences due to HW of the ODU a special low level calibration signal is transmitted periodically in each link During the time this calibration signal is transmitted all other radio links of the same BS and all its neighbors should not transmit to reduce potential interference The Beam Forming mechanism ensures that all neighboring BSs operating in Beam Forming mode will enter into silent mode when necessary However since this results in slightly reduced throughput units operating in Matrix A B mode should enter into silent mode when necessary based on frame number information only if it has neighboring BSs operating in Beam Forming mode The Neighbor Beam Forming parameter Indicates whether any of the neighboring BSs operates in Beam Forming mode The default is Yes in the device the default is No 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Ce Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template Parameter Description RCID Usage Each transmitted MAP includes allocations for each MS it served using the MS s CID for identifying each MS The original CID includes 16 bits which is significantly
87. 2305 2320 2345 2360 MHz 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template 4 5 1 3 Base Band Tab Mode a Update oi Piters By clicking on a selected property name you can add amp to this feet LI Bache Mhe Figure 4 27 The BS Template Radio Basic Page Base Band Tab The Base Band parameter is Parameter Description Bandwidth The BS channel bandwidth 5 MHz 7 MHz 10MHz The default is 5 MHz 7 MHz is not applicable for units in 2 x GHz bands 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template 4 5 1 4 Air Frame Structure Tab General Det RF Base Band Ar Frame Structure Triggers Mode Cean Update t Fiters By checking an a selected peoperty name you can add E to this Fer LI caw C Preamble Group O Segret Number LI Frame Number Offset At At lt O Fetal Upliek Duration shes Downlink Date Zone Permutation Base O Uplink Feedback Zone Permkation Base LI Uplink Data Zone Permutation Base O Weem see symbole O Maimam Se syms LI Maximum Map Sie dots e FC ER R oj ie lo zl O Nebo beamforming A ormin re EI Elsen KH Figure 4 28 The BS Template Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Tab The Air Frame Structure parameters are Parameter
88. 3 E if Segment Number see Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure General Tab on page 250 is 0 then only bits 0 and 1 should be set checked Configure 000011 E if Segment Number is 1 then only bits 2 and 3 should be set checked Configure 001100 E if Segment Number is 2 then only bits 4 and 5 should be set checked Configure 110000 DL Data Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the downlink data zone The valid range is from 0 to 31 UL Feedback Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the uplink feedback zone The valid range is from 0 to 69 UK Data Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the uplink data zone The valid range is from 0 to 69 Default Authenticator IP Address The IP address of the default authenticator ASN GW Read only for Transparent connectivity mode Click Next to open the next screen of the wizard 5 2 6 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 4 This screen is not applicable for twin site creation of a Mini Centralized ASN GW 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard H gt System Managed Network Fault Management Configuration Management Service Provisioning Administration Security Management Help AM Equipment Manager x gai Network Maintenance x E Template Manager x Al Duplicate Site x
89. 4 4 4 SFA Page The SFA page comprises the following tabs E SFA Config Tab E PHS Rules Tab E Classification Config Tab HM Classification Rule Protocol Tab HM Classification Rule Source Address Tab E Classification Rule Destination Address Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template E Classification Rule Source Port Tab HM Classification Rule Destination Port Tab E Classification Rule Customer VLAN ID Tab 4 4 4 1 SFA Config Tab SFA Contig PHS Rues Classiication Cor ig Classification Rude Protocol L Classification Ruke Source Address Classtication Rude Destination Address Classification Beie Source Port 1 9 lt Mode Create Update Deker Fiters By chching an a selected property name you can add k to this fiter O Enable PHS Support x Save Dore Figure 4 10 The ASN GW Template SFA Page SFA Config Tab The SFA Config tab include the following parameter Parameter Description Enable PHS Support Indicates whether or not PHS is enabled or disabled This setting applies to all PHS rules in the managed object The default is no disable 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template 4 4 4 2 PHS Rules Tab SFA Contig PRS Rides 1 Classiication Coctig C
90. 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW oz Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Multiple Configuration Template Based Task Parameter Description SW Version The running SW version of the device IP Address The IP address of the device State The operational state of the device Click Add to open the Equipment Selector allowing you to add objects to the Equipment table If the MO Type of the selected template is ASN GW or Management the equipment selector includes all eligible BTSs If the MO Type is BS the selector enables selection of eligible BSs Click Remove to remove one or several selected objects from the table 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks 4Motion Mutual Neighboring Task 9 9 4Motion Mutual Neighboring Task In a properly configured system if BS1 is defined as a neighbor of BS2 then BS2 should be defined as a neighbor of BS1 The Mutual Neighboring Task enables checking consistency of neighboring BSs definition across the entire managed network This is a system task that cannot be deleted To open the Mutual Neighboring Task Editor select the task from the list of existing tasks right click and select the Edit option or double click on the entry Mutual Neighboring Reporting Options L Show only inconsistent neighbour associations Le OG D E ompletedwit L vo Figure 9 12 Mutual Neighboring T
91. 7 5 3 ASN GW Bearer Interface Page The ASN GW Bearer Interface page is applicable for Macro BTS operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and for Mini Centralized ASN GW The ASN GW Bearer Interface page enables managing the parameters of the Bearer IP Interface that enables connectivity between ASN GW and BSs AAA server and Home Agent Sax H ASN GW Bearer Interface Beveoe Interface Source IP Address 101012982 E Subnet Mask eessen O Defaut Gateway VLAN ID D Number of MS imitation sii Maam ASH GW Throughout E S reos Number of Active MS Average A EX b rate via Backhaud Ethernet port Se cp Sech v em Cone Figure 7 17 ASN GW Bearer Interface Page The ASN GW Bearer Interface page includes the following parameters Parameter Description Source IP Address The IP address of the interface The default is 172 16 0 1 A change in this parameter will affect all entries in the IP Routing table using the Bearer Interface Source IP Address as the Destination For details refer to Effects of Changes in IP Interface s Parameters on page 155 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Subnet MAsk The IP subnet mask of the interface The default is 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway The Default Gateway for the Bearer interface Note Any change of this para
92. 9 42 KR LL Add Add GE ch Strech w r Done t Figure 7 18 ASN GW Pools Page The ASN GW Pools page includes two tables for the ASN GW Primary and Secondary Pools Each Pool can contain up to 10 ASN GW IP Addresses Use the Add Delete buttons below each table to add delete entries to from the table IP addresses must be unique in the tables An IP address that exists in one of the tables cannot be added to either the same or the other table Note that you cannot populate the Secondary Pool if the Primary Pool is empty Keep Alive Page The Keep Alive page enables viewing modifying the parameters of the keep alive mechanism between the ASN GW and relevant BSs and between each BS and the relevant ASN GWs 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity H Keep Alive Al Entities Keep Aive Di Enable Keto alve Poling penod wo ei Manger of retransmissions 4 Retransmission Time Gut eos ms Keep Nor Ratus L oing pened Wunber oF Ratranemission Ratieneminen Tare OR GA w 4 wis BS 86 22 15 a 4 5015 BS 55 55 55 a 4 sos ao Betresh e nn Cone Figure 7 19 Keep Alive Page Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS In a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology the keep alive mechanism is applicable for the internal ASN GW and for each of the defined BSs In a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS operating in Centralized ASN GW
93. ASN Topology the keep alive mechanism is applicable for each of the defined BSs In a Mini Centralized ASN GW the keep alive mechanism is applicable for the ASN GW entity In a Micro Outdoor BTS the keep alive mechanism is applicable for the defined BS The Keep Alive page allows simultaneously configuring the following parameters with the same values for all relevant entities Parameter Description Enable Keep Alive Use the check box to enable disable the keep alive mechanism for all relevant entities of the managed device The default is Disable unchecked The following parameters are applicable only if Keep Alive is enabled checked 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Polling Period The period in seconds between polling sessions The range is from 10 to 1000 seconds The default is 60 seconds Polling Period x 1000 value in milliseconds cannot be lower than Retransmission Timeout x Number of Retransmissions 1 Number of Retransmissions Maximum number of retries if Retransmission Timeout has expired without getting a response The range is from 0 to 10 The default is 5 Retransmission Timeout Time in milliseconds to wait for a response before initiating another polling attempt or reaching a decision that the polled entity has failed if the maximum number of r
94. AU of NAU 7 SAU 1 Master AU of DAU 1 left side of DAU 1 Slave AU of DAU 1 right side of DAU 1 3 2 Master AU of DAU 2 left side of DAU 2 9 Slave AU of DAU 2 right side of DAU 2 8 AU Mandatory Parameters E Type AU 4x4 Modem AU Number AU slot 9 ly Figure 7 22 New AU Window 2 Configure the mandatory properties of the required AU in the New AU window 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description Type The required AU type In a Macro Indoor BTS only AU 4x4 Modem is applicable In a Macro Outdoor BTS the applicable options are AU 4x4 Modem for a 4 channels AU and AU 2x2 Modem for a 2 channels AU The default is AU 4x4 Modem AU Number Select the required slot number The available options include all currently empty slots AU entity does not exist The default is the first available empty slot The AU Number is read only if the New AU window was opened by double clicking on an empty module in the Equipment View page 7 6 1 3 2 3 Click Apply to complete the new AU creation The new AU will be added to the list of AU Slot available in the AU sub node To delete an AU To delete an AU right click the required AU Slot entry in the navigation tree and select Delete You will be request to confirm th
95. After each change in the Bandwidth parameter the value must be configured to a proper value Map The allocated to the BS for maps transmission as indicated by a 6 bits bits 0 5 string If BW 5 MHz bits 1 3 and 5 are not relevant Bits 0 2 4 must be set to 1 Configure 101010 If BW 7 10 MHz with reuse 1 all bits 0 to 5 must be set to 1 Configure 111111 For BW 7 10 MHz with Reuse 3 E if Segment Number is 0 then bits 0 and 1 should be set to 1 Configure 110000 E if Segment Number is 1 then bits 2 and 3 should be set to 1 Configure 001100 E if Segment Number is 2 then bits 4 and 5 should be set to 1 Configure 001111 The default is null in the device the default is 000000 all bits not set Basic Map Repetition The basic repetition used in the transmission of the maps using QPSK 1 2 The available options are 1 2 4 and 6 1 means no repetitions The default is 1 in the device the default is 6 Downlink Data MIMO Mode The downlink diversity mode used by the system Matrix A B or Beam Forming The Beam Forming option is not applicable for 2 channels AU Macro Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS The default is Matrix A B Downlink Data Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the downlink data zone The valid range is from 0 to 31 The default is 0 Uplink Feedback Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the uplink feedback zone The valid range is
96. CL 199 The destination IP address to which to allow deny traffic The address 0 0 0 0 means any address The default is 0 0 0 0 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Destination IP Mask Not applicable for ACL 199 The mask for the destination IP address allowing to define a range of source addresses subnet to which to allow deny traffic The default is 255 255 255 255 Minimum Destination Port Applicable only for an extended ACL Not applicable for ACL 199 The minimum destination port to which to allow deny traffic The range is 1 65535 The default is 0 Maximum Destination Port Applicable only for an extended ACL Not applicable for ACL 199 The maximum destination port to which to allow deny traffic The range is 1 65535 The default is 65535 Protocol Applicable only for an extended ACL The transport protocol for which traffic is allowed denied The range is 1 255 255 means any The default is 255 In ACL 199 the valid values are 6 TCP and 17 UDP Rule Action The rule action Allow or Drop The default is Allow Not applicable for ACL 199 where it is read only displaying QoS Mark Classifier ID Applicable only for ACL 199 The marking classifier ID to be used for associating an action ID that defines the DSCP and or Priority marking actions to be applied to traffic t
97. CRAFT NOTE In the Local CRAFT Utility the Multiple Configuration Task is applicable only to the managed device The Multiple Configuration task enables modifying the configuration of selected devices using a pre prepared template For details on templates and how they are used to modify configuration of target objects refer to The Template Manager on page 17 x NOTE In the current release the template based Multiple Configuration task supports multiple configuration of BTS devices It does not support multiple configuration of Mini Centralized ASN GW devices gt To open the Multiple Configuration Task Editor In the Task Manager window do one of the following E To open a new task from the Task Manager use the Task Wizard and select the Multiple Configuration Template Based option E To open a new task from the Template Manager select the template you want to use right click and select the Apply option E To open an existing task select an existing Multiple Configuration task from the list right click and select the Edit option or double click on the selected task If the task is Active the Runtime result screen is displayed displaying the status of the running task If the task is Inactive the Multiple Configuration Task Editor for the selected task is displayed To open a new task from the Equipment Manager select the target device s right click and select the Multiple Configuration option 4Motion BTS and Mini
98. Cannot be updated in an existing rule If enabled then Enable IP Protocol is set to enable Protocol can be either 6 TCP or 17 UDP TCP UDP Destination Port Relevant only if Enable TCP UDP Destination Port is enabled Configurable only when Enable TCP UDP Destination Port is enabled The range of values From To of the destination ports from the lowest value to the highest value Values range is from 1 to 65535 The default is From 1 To 65535 Cannot be updated in an existing rule 7 7 4 3 7 7 4 3 1 gt Service Profile The NPU allows for guaranteed end to end QoS for user traffic across the ASN The QoS approach is connection oriented whereby user traffic is classified into service flows A service flow is a unidirectional stream of packets either in the downlink or uplink direction associated with a certain set of QoS requirements such as maximum latency The QoS requirements for service flows are derived from service profiles defined by the operator A service profile is a set of attributes shared by a set of service flows For instance an operator might define a service profile called Internet Gold that will include QoS and other definitions to be applied to service flows associated with users subscribed to the operator s Internet Gold service package The factory default configuration includes an empty no defined Service Flows Service Profile with the name Default If enab
99. Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment 7 6 2 3 4 Warm Start Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS Parameter Description Almanac Usable Time The maximum period in hours for which the Almanac time is valid when the GPS is reset The range is from 0 to 4320 The default is 720 7 6 2 3 5 Hot Start Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS Parameter Description Ephemeris Usable Time The maximum period in hours for which the Ephemeris time is valid when the GPS is reset The range is from 0 to 168 The default is 4 7 6 2 3 6 Synchronization Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Maximum Number of Applicable only for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS When a GPS receiver is used Satellites for Sync Loss this is the minimum number of received satellites required for maintaining synchronization The range is from 0 to 11 Must be lower than Minimum Number of Satellites for Sync Return The default is 1 Minimum Number of Applicable only for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS When a GPS receiver is used Satellites for Sync Return this is the minimum number of received satellites required for the GPS to re synchronize so that the unit can terminate holdover state The range is from 1 to 12 Must be higher than Maximum Number of Satellites for Sync Loss The default is 2 Number of Satellites Read only The number of satellites currently acquir
100. Configurable only for Micro Outdoor BTS The range is 11 100 110 4094 The default is 11 Default Gateway Read only The status of connectivity with the default gateway Unknown Up Connectivity Status down The keep alive mechanism starts only after first registration at the ASN GW Until then this mechanism is disable and connectivity status is Unknown 7 8 3 1 2 ASN GW Load Balancing At the unit NPU level up to two pools with different priorities each with up to 10 ASN GWs can be defined see ASN GW Pools Page on page 177 Each BS defined in the unit will inherit these pools It should be noted the ASN GW defined in the BS as the Default Authenticator will be automatically added to the Primary Pool that is the higher priority pool if not included already At the BS level you can enable disable the use of each of the two pools The defaults are Enable for ASN GW Primary Pool and Disable for ASN GW Secondary Pool The Secondary Pool can be enabled only if the Primary Pool is enabled and the Primary Pool includes at least one entry Note that if both pools are disabled or if the enabled pool s are empty the ASN GW load balancing feature is disabled and only the Default Authenticator will be used Each Pool table displays the following read only parameters for each defined ASN GW Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the ASN GW Connectivity Status Read only The status of connectivity w
101. Connectivity Mode is In Band o IMPORTANT t A change in Connectivity Mode will take effect after next reset 7 5 2 1 1 2 External Management Interface The External Management Interface section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Source IP Address The IP address of the interface The default is 192 168 1 1 In a Macro BTS operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and Mini Centralized ASN GW if the Connectivity Mode is set to Unified the Source IP Address is not configurable and is set to the value configured for the ASN GW Bearer Interface Source IP Address see ASN GW Bearer Interface Page on page 176 A change in this parameter will affect the relevant rules for ACL 199 and all entries in the IP Routing table using the External Management Source IP Address as the Destination For details refer to Section 7 5 2 1 1 4 below 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Subnet MAsk The IP subnet mask of the interface The default is 255 255 255 0 In a Macro BTS operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and Mini Centralized ASN GW if the Connectivity Mode is set to Unified the Subnet Mask is not configurable and is set to the value configured for the ASN GW Bearer Interface Subnet Mask see ASN GW Bearer Interface Page on page 176 Next Hop Gateway
102. Connectivity Page on page 147 Management Page on page 152 ASN GW Bearer Interface Page on page 176 ASN GW Pools Page on page 177 Keep Alive Page on page 178 E Equipment Shelf Power Supply Page on page 181 NPU Page on page 183 AU on page 186 with an AU lt Type and Slot gt Page for each created AU External ODU on page 192 Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS with an ODU lt gt Page for each created ODU or Radio on page 197 Micro Outdoor BTS with Radio 1 and Radio 2 pages ODU lt gt Page GPS Page on page 200 Power Feeder Page on page 205 Antenna Page on page 207 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Introduction to Device Management E ASN GW AAA Page on page 211 Service Group Page on page 214 QoS Marking Page on page 225 SFA Page on page 228 Hot Lining Page on page 239 E BS node with the following per each BS sub node Radio Oo Radio Basic Page on page 248 Radio Advanced Page on page 264 RO R8 Bearer Interface Page HM Site Sector on page 278 Node with a Site Sector lt gt Page for each created sector 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 M
103. DHCP proxy assigns the MS the IP address that was received from AAA in the MS profile In HA mode the DHCP proxy assigns to the MS the IP address received in the MS profile or obtains the IP address from HA using the mobile IP The default is Proxy Lease Time Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Proxy mode The lease time in seconds of IP address allocated for MS from this Service Group In the Proxy mode this value is used only if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept The range is 24 4294967295 The default is 24 the default in the device is 86 400 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Parameter Description DHCP Own IP Address Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing service group Applicable only for IP Service Groups The DHCP Own IP Address of an existing Service Group cannot be updated The IP address of the DHCP relay proxy Must be different from other instances of DHCP Own IP Address in the device For a service group using a VLAN service interface should be in same subnet with the Default Gateway configured for the service interface associated with the service group Subnet mask is taken as the default subnet mask i e 255 255 255 0 The default is 0 0 0 0 must be changed to a valid value when creating a new IP Service Group MS MS Loopback Applica
104. Detogs ze x pl network marensnce x Network Maintenance Management Target aw adress O ASN GW BTS Number O FU Management IP Address a pm Zeg Network Markenance Server 10 10 107 187 User odan Figure 3 2 Network Maintenance Retrieval of All MSs Data You can select the serving entity by E ASN GW IP Address the Bearer interface IP address of the target device E ASN GW BTS Number the BTS Number of the target device E NPU Management IP Address the IP address of the interface used for managing the site NPU to which the ASN GW is assigned Select the option you want to use and enter the applicable value in the field next to the selected option Click Apply to retrieve the data for all MSs served by the specified ASN GW The displayed data for all MSs served by the specified entity includes 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 3 The Network Maintenance Manager Retrieval of All MSs Data Parameter Description Target ASN GW IP Address The IP address of the target device Bearer interface IP address ASN GW BTS Number The BTS Number Site ID of the target device MS Data per MS served by the target device MS ID the MS ID MAC address Serving BS ID The full ID of the serving BS The following buttons are now available Button Description Refresh Click to refresh the displayed data Home Click
105. I Wem EAP Rounds gt Refresh 1 vi Sue Deeg Figure 4 38 The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Authentication Tab The Authentication parameters are Parameter Description Default Authenticator IP The IP address of the default authenticator ASN GW In Distributed ASN GW Address Topology this is typically the IP address of the NPU s Bearer interface Suspended EAP Process Suspended EAP authentication process threshold It is used to set an alarm The range is 0 10000 The default is 0 the default in the device is 10000 Note The relevant alarm is not supported in current release Active MSs The threshold for the number of MSs in active operation state not Idle served by the BS Exceeding this threshold sets the alarm Excessive MS number The range is 0 1024 When set to 0 the alarm is disabled The default is 0 the default in the device is 1024 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template Parameter Description Maximum EAP Rounds The threshold for the number of EAP rounds in one direction in the same EAP session When this threshold is exceeded alarm is set This threshold may be used to protect the system from hazard EAP sessions with extreme number of messaging round trips The range is 0 100 When set to 0 the alarm is disabled The default is 0 the default in the device is 100 Note
106. LL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE UNITS OF PRODUCT INCLUDING ALL THE SOFTWARE DELIVERED TO PURCHASER HEREUNDER ARE NOT FAULT TOLERANT AND ARE NOT DESIGNED MANUFACTURED OR INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE IN APPLICATIONS WHERE THE FAILURE MALFUNCTION OR INACCURACY OF PRODUCTS CARRIES A RISK OF DEATH OR BODILY INJURY OR SEVERE 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Legal Rights PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES MAY INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO USE AS PART OF ON LINE CONTROL SYSTEMS IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING FAIL SAFE PERFORMANCE SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES WEAPONS SYSTEMS OR OTHER APPLICATIONS REPRESENTING A SIMILAR DEGREE OF POTENTIAL HAZARD ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES b PURCHASER S SOLE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES ABOVE SHALL BE REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE AS SPECIFIED ABOVE AT ALVARION S OPTION TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING BUT
107. MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 16 QAM 3 4 16 to Required C N Level for 16 QAM 3 4 14 see 16 QAM 3 4 parameter above The default is 0 the default in the device is 23 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW O Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template Parameter Description 64 QAM 2 3 The C N in dB required for sending 64 QAM 2 3 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 64 QAM 1 2 8 to Required C N Level for 64 QAM 1 2 7 see 64 QAM 1 2 parameter above The default is 0 the default in the device is 25 64 QAM 3 4 The C N in dB required for sending 64 QAM 2 3 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 64 QAM 2 3 8 to Required C N Level for 64 QAM 2 3 7 see 64 QAM 2 3 parameter above The default is 0 the default in the device is 26 64 QAM 5 6 The C N in dB required for transmitting 64 QAM 5 6 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 64 QAM 3 4 8 to Required C N Level for 64 QAM 3 4 7 see 64 QAM 3 4 parameter above The default is 0 the default in the device is 28 Allowed Interference Level Correction of maximum all
108. Managing a Single Device ASN GW W EMS_after_offline on 10 10 144 35 Configuring Equipment X 5 Service Group Service Interfaces Service Groups Service Interfaces Interface Number Service Interfa Type 1 si IP in IP 2 waw IP in IP Service Interface Name Gesetten Type IP in IP Service Interface Parameters x Tunnel Source IP 0 10 129 82 Tunnel Destination IP 0 0 0 0 Service VLAN ID 0 bi Default Gateway IP Address Subnet Mask Enable Checksum Service Interface IS e i E E i E o i i wi Apply Figure 7 32 Service Group Page Service Interfaces Tab The Service Interfaces table includes the following read only parameters for each of the configured service interfaces Parameter Description Interface Number The index number of the interface 1 10 Service Interface Name The name of the service interface Type The type of service interface IP in IP VLAN QnQ Select an entry in the table to open the Service Interface Editor for the selected service interface The following buttons are available below the Service Interfaces table Button Description Add Service Interface Adds a new entry to the table and opens the Service Interface Editor allowing configuration of parameters for the new service interface Up to 10 service interfaces can be defined Delete Deletes the selected entr
109. Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Site Page 7 4 Site Page The Site page enables defining general site properties such as the site location date and time and ASN Topology settings as well as the use of input and output alarms time synchronization and clock source settings The Site page comprises the following tabs E Site General Tab E Site Dry Contact Tab applicable only for Macro Indoor BTSs 7 4 1 Site General Tab The General tab enables viewing editing the general site properties For BTS equipment it also enables viewing editing the ASN Topology Site Genera Dry Contact Properties ASM Topalogy GTS Number zm Ostert BTS Name EMS dier fe BTS Location address Product Type Lortazed Location in Ste and Rack hehehe Outrbted ASN GW Corkact Person een Centralized ASN GW Location Latitude N imi deg S Longtude zw deo Aktude m elle 1 Sie n Dos Figure 7 5 Site Page General Tab BTS The General tab includes the following sections E Properties E ASN Topology not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Site Page E Location not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW 7 4 1 1 Properties The Properties section includes the following parameters Paramete
110. NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES TERMS OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SATISFACTORY QUALITY CORRESPONDENCE WITH DESCRIPTION NON INFRINGEMENT AND ACCURACY OF INFORMATION GENERATED ALL OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED ALVARION WARRANTIES HEREIN RUN ONLY TO PURCHASER AND ARE NOT EXTENDED TO ANY THIRD PARTIES ALVARION NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS Limitation of Liability a ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF USE INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHETHER ARISING UNDER BREACH OF CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER BASED ON THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES b TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES HEREUNDER OF ALVARION OR ITS EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT BY PURCHASER NOR SHALL THE AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES TO ALL PARTIES REGARDING ANY PRODUCT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THAT PRODUCT BY THAT PARTY EXCEPT IN THE CASE OF A BREACH OF A PARTY S CONFIDENTIALITY OBLIGATIONS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Imp
111. NPU External Management Interface Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW NPU Bearer Interface Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 7 5 2 6 2 ASN GW not applicable for Micro Outdoor BTS Main Counters Group Counters Included Applicable for R3 Interface Traffic R3 Interface Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW R6 Interface Total Traffic R6 Interface Total Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW R6 Interface Traffic Per BS R6 Interface BS Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW MS Resources Reports Management Initial NE Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Load Balancing Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS Provisioned QoS Management Provisioned QoS Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 7 5 2 6 3 BS Counter Main Counters Group Counters Included Applicable for BS Counters Traffic Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS Utilization Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS TxR1 Total Traffic Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS RxR1 Total Traffic Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS BS General Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS Integrity Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7
112. P request to accept the address sent by the NPU If the MS does not accept the address within this period the MS is deregistered The range is from 1 to 120 The default is 1 second the default in the device is 5 Server Host Name Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Proxy mode The server host name This parameter is sent in dhcp offer dncp ack messages and may be used by certain CPEs A string of up to 64 characters The default is null Service Time w o IP Address Time of waiting for DHCP request when initial Data Path is established If expires MS should be deregistered The range is 0 to 86 400 seconds A value of 0 means this timer is deactivated and MS is not deregistered The default is 0 Vendor Class Identifier Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Proxy mode The option 60 string Up to 30 characters An empty string null means that DHCP Option 60 is disabled The default is null the default in the device is dslforum org Note that an bull string is not supported by the template manager Vendor Specific Information Name Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Proxy mode Option 43 Name string Up to 64 characters The default is null the default in the device is InternetGatewayDevice ManagementServer URL Vendor Specific Information Value Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Proxy mode Option 43 Value string Up to 64 characters The default is null External DHCP Ser
113. R request gt dB at the Serving BS is above the Trigger threshold in dB Neighbor RSSI Own RSSI Handover Handover Request The RSSI at the Neighbor BS minus the RSSI request gt dBm at the Serving BS is above the Trigger threshold in dBm Distance Handover request m Handover Request The Serving BS distance from the MS calculated by measuring the round trip delay is above the Trigger threshold in meter Own CINR Handover request lt dB Handover Request The CINR at the Serving BS is below the Trigger threshold in dB Own RSSI Handover request lt dBm Handover Request The RSSI at the Serving BS is below the Trigger threshold in dBm 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 74 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager 4 5 2 4 5 2 1 Radio Advanced Page The Radio Advanced page comprises the following tabs E Ranging Tab E Feedback Allocations Tab E Power Control Tab E Beam Forming Tab applicable only for Macro BTS E Management Tab E QoS Tab Ranging Tab Rangng Feedback Alucations Power Corkral Beam Forming Manapeiers L Mode create Update Delta Fiters By chcking on a selected property name you can add E to this fiter LI Sart of Ranging Codes ze O emm Cet Radius km Di Figure 4 30 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Ranging Tab The Ranging parameters are BS Template 4Mo
114. Repetition Minimum Size symbols up to a MHz Scheme maximum of Y as defined below 7 10 Full Loading No Limitation or 8 2N No Limitation or 6 2N MNI AJ Oo No Limitation or 4 2N No Limitation or 4 2N Reuse 1 3 N A non trivial configuration 8 2N NIAJ O 6 2N 6 2N 5 MHz Full Loading N A non trivial configuration No Limitation or 8 2N MNI AJO No Limitation or 6 2N No Limitation or 4 2N Reuse 1 3 N A non trivial configuration N A non trivial configuration MNI AJ Oo N A non trivial configuration 1 N A non trivial configuration First Zone Scheme is being determined by the selected Map Major Groups E For 7 10 MHz Full Loading means all Major Groups 0 5 are selected E For 5MHz Full Loading means that all relevant Major Groups 0 2 4 are selected For First Zone Maximum Size the values are E If First Zone Minimum Size is set to No Limitations the value range for Maximum Size is the same as for Minimum Size E Else the value range is No Limitations or First Zone Minimum Size 2N up to a maximum of Y as defined below 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS The value of Y that sets the upper limit for the Minimum and Maximum Size parameters depends on the Maximum Cell Radius and Total Uplink Duration parameters using th
115. SN GW E L1 L2 Connectivity Page for Micro Outdoor BTS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity 15 1 1 L1 L2 Connectivity Page for Macro BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW LuL2 Connectivity Backhaul Poet Marosgrmere Pret Operational Sate Y Operational Rate Adrinetrative State i Administr akve State Negobebon Au Negrete Port Speed i Mps Port Speed i Mps Duplex Mode F tupiex Mode Besrer VLAN ID 1 Eternal VLAN ID Cascade Port Extena Ether ype wa Lei Operational State P AU Maintenance VLAN ID WA Anbr ius Sake Negotiation 3 Port speed x Mbps Duplex Mode Badhaul vlan Translation MAN ID E Chengedto EE Seel m Dom Figure 7 7 L1 L2 Connectivity Page Macro Indoor BTS The L1 L2 Connectivity tab includes the following sections E Backhaul Port M Cascade Port E Management Port E External Ether Type E AU Maintenance VLAN ID E Backhaul VLAN Translation 7 5 1 1 1 Backhaul Port The Backhaul Port section includes the following parameters of the backhaul DATA Ethernet port excluding Bearer VLAN ID all port s configurable parameters can be configured only via CLI 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Operational State Read only The
116. SN GW The ASN GW enables defining various parameters pertaining to the Access Service Network ASN Gateway functionality of the managed device The ASN GW node includes the following pages E AAA Page E Service Group Page E QoS Marking Page E SFA Page E Hot Lining Page 7 7 1 AAA Page The AAA page enables the configuration of general RADIUS parameters and the AAA client The RADIUS client encapsulates the messages destined for the AAA server in RADIUS messages or decapsulates messages sent by the AAA server for the MS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW o Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW AAA AAA Client Generic Parameters ASN GW NAS ID GMT Time Zone Offset VLAN Classifier Bit Alignment AAA Client Parameters Current Server Primary AAA Name Primary Server IP Address NPU Radius Shared Secret H 9 Source Ip Interface lt gt MSB Shift EI Accounting UDP Port Authentication UDP Port Enable Redundancy Secondary Server IP Address Switch Over Ee 66 3 3 3 1 81 1 lt gt lt gt No Action EI Done Figure 7 31 AAA Page e SEET The AAA page comprises two sections the AAA Client Generic Parameters and the AAA Client parameters The AAA Client Generic Parameters are Parameter Description ASN GW NAS ID null The
117. Service Flow Traffic Priority The priority of Service Flow traffic 0 7 or ANY The default is 0 the default in the device is ANY Service Flow Media Flow Type The Service Flow Media Flow Type as defined in ASN GW or AAA server Enable Service Flow Media Indicates whether the condition for Service Flow Media Flow Type is enabled or Flow Type disabled If enabled the Service Flow Media Flow Type will be considered when looking for a match The default is true the default in the device is false Outer DSCP Marking The DSCP value to be used for marking the outer IP header IP GRE The range is 0 63 The default is 0 802 1p Priority Marking The 802 1p priority to be used for marking traffic The range is 0 7 The default is 0 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager Management Template 4 6 Management Template The Management Template comprises the following pages E SNMP Managers Page E Performance Page E Logging Page not applicable for Micro BTS 4 6 1 SNMP Managers Page The SNMP Managers page comprises the following tabs E SNMP Managers Tab E SNMP Trap Managers Tab 4 6 1 1 SNMP Managers Tab SHMP Managers SNMP Trap Managers Mode Create Update Oelte Pad X C Revert Mi Read Community td Reed Commrity BS d Wite Communty vi save Core Figure 4 41 The
118. Site Restore tasks the Target Equipment table includes only the read only details of the target equipment For a Site Configuration Restore task the target equipment is identical to the source equipment The details are available only if the State of the target site is Up For a Vendor Configuration Restore task click Add to open the equipment Selector allowing you to add devices to the Target Equipment table Click Remove to remove one or several selected devices from the table 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 202 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Software Upgrade Task 9 4 9 4 1 Software Upgrade Task LOCAL CRAFT NOTE In the Local CRAFT Utility the Software Upgrade Task is applicable only to the managed device This section includes E The Software Upgrade Task Editor E NPU Software Upgrade E AU Software Upgrade applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS The Software Upgrade Task Editor The Software Upgrade task enables loading a software file to selected devices and or managing the software files in the devices The Software Upgrade task enables loading a software file to selected devices and or managing the software files in the devices When working under Windows the files to be loaded should be available in the management system firmware folder filesystem firmware wm The wm folder may need to be manually created When working under UNIX refer to the instructions in opt
119. The Next Hop Default Gateway for the External Management interface Note Any change of this parameter will affect all entries in the IP Routing table using the External Management Next Hop Gateway as the Next Hop address For details refer to Section 7 5 2 1 1 4 below VLAN ID The VLAN ID of external management traffic The range is 11 100 110 4094 The default is 12 In a Macro BTS operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and Mini Centralized ASN GW if the Connectivity Mode is set to Unified the VLAN ID is not configurable and is set to the value configured for the ASN GW Bearer Interface VLAN ID see ASN GW Bearer Interface Page on page 176 When operating in In Band Connectivity Mode if the value is other than the default 12 it will be indicated in the Backhaul VLAN Translation table see Backhaul VLAN Translation on page 151 7 5 2 1 1 3 Local Management Interface The Local Management Interface section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Source IP Address The IP address of the interface The default is 172 31 0 1 A change in this parameter will affect the relevant rules for ACL 199 see ACL Tab on page 159 and IP Routing see IP Routing Tab on page 166 Subnet MAsk The IP subnet mask of the interface The default is 255 255 255 0 The VLAN ID of the Local Management IP interface is set to 9 and cannot be modified 7 5 2 1 1 4 Eff
120. The name of the BS An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 32 printable characters Recommended to be unique across the managed network bsCellld BS Cell ID The Cell ID IDCell used for preamble selection The range is from 0 to 31 Value should be set according to Radio Network Plan bsPreambleGroup BS Preamble Group The preamble group 1 or 2 Value should be set according to Radio Network Plan bsFrameNumberOffset BS Frame Number Offset Controls the offset applied between the internal frame count and the reported frame number In devices running SW version 2 5 the range is from 0 to 15 In devices running SW version 3 0 and higher the available options are 0 Zero and 1 Random If Random is selected the AU will choose a random number between 0 to 15 Value should be set according to Radio Network Plan bsDIDataZonePermBase Downlink Data Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the downlink data zone The range is from 0 to 31 Value should be set according to Radio Network Plan bsFeedbackZonePermBase Uplink Feedback Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the uplink feedback zone The range is from 0 to 69 Value should be set according to Radio Network Plan 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 The Offline Configuration Tool Using the Offline Configuration Tool Parameter Name in File Description
121. The relevant alarm is not supported in current release 4 5 3 4 Control Traffic QoS Rules Eare JL ASNGW bock Authentication Contrai Trl Qo5 Rides L Bearer Trallic QuS nudes Mode in Update Fitters By clicking on a selected property nome you can add E to this Peer LI INTRA ASN Diffserv Code Point O maach D Ip Pronty LI Interna Management Dfzex Code Puit LI Internal Management 812 1p Pricey zi Figure 4 39 The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Control Traffic QoS Rules Tab The Control Traffic QoS Rules parameters are Parameter Description Intra ASN Diffserv Code Point DSCP priority value to be used for marking of intra ASN R8 R6 traffic The range is 0 63 The default is 0 Intra ASN 802 1p Priority 802 1p priority value to be used for marking of intra ASN R8 R6 traffic The range is 0 7 The default is 0 Code Point Internal Management Diffserv DSCP priority value to be used for marking of intra ASN R8 R6 traffic The range is 0 63 The default is 0 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template Parameter Description Internal Management 802 1p Priority 802 1p priority value to be used for marking of intra ASN R8 R6 traffic The range is 0 7 The default is 0 4 5 3 5 Bearer Traffic QoS Rules Tab Bearer ASNG
122. Tolerated Jitter ms the maximum delay variation jitter in milliseconds for this downlink service flow The range is 0 4294967295 The default is 0 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate downlink data delivery type UGS ERTVR 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template 4 4 5 3 UL DL Reference Classification Rule Tabs Service Profile Config L Service Flow UL Reference Classi katon Ride Ot Reference Classdicaticn Rude O Delete Add Xe Revert d Rude Name Id Rule Name Service Profle Config Name seen eB VY Service Profle Contig Name d Service Flow Fow ID 1 ates eee Figure 4 21 The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page UL Reference Classification Rule Tab Create Mode The UL DL Reference Classification Rule tables include the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Rule Name The name of the associated Classification Rule Service Profile Contig Name The name alias of the Service Profile Service Flow Flow ID The Flow ID of the Service Flow Existing UL DL Reference Classification Rules cannot be updated The UL DL Reference Classification Rule Row Editors include the following parameters that are mandatory when creating a new rule Pa
123. Traffic Priority The traffic priority provided as an input parameter for the bearer plane QoS rule 0 7 or ANY The default is ANY The Service Flow Traffic Priority of an existing rule cannot be modified Service Flow Media Flow Type The media type provided as an input parameter for the bearer plane QoS rule A value of ANY indicates that this parameter will be ignored A string of 1 to 30 characters or ANY The default is ANY The Service Flow Media Flow Type of an existing rule cannot be modified Action Outer DSCP Marking The Differentiated Service Code Point DSCP value to be used for marking the packets if the packet complies with the marking rule s conditions The range is from 0 to 63 The default is 0 802 1p Priority Marking The 802 1p priority to be used for marking traffic that complies with the marking rule s conditions The range is from 0 to 7 The default is 0 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW 7 7 4 SFA Page The Service Flow Authorization SFA functionality handles creation maintenance of pre provisioned service flows for MS It maps the AAA parameters service profile name received from the AAA server to pre configured WiMAX specific QoS parameters in the NPU The SFA page enables configuring and maintaining service flows including configuring Packet Header Suppression PHS rules multi
124. U s If the file already exists in the NPU the first stage is skipped If it exists in the AU the process will be skipped Note that the NPU can store a maximum of 3 AU SW files If a new SW file should be loaded the oldest file that is not mapped as the operational file of any AU will be deleted If all 3 files are mapped to AUs a situation that is not expected under regular conditions you must first modify the mapping using CLI see Upgrading the AU section in the System Manual to enable deletion of at least one SW file Switch over The AU s reset and boot from the shadow file If successful the files are switched automatically and the new SW version is set as the Operational mapped file Delete AU version from NPU If selected deletes the selected software file from the selected equipment Note that you can remove only one file at a time Only a file that is not used as the Operational mapped version can be removed File Name Applicable only if the selected option s include either Download to Shadow or Delete AU Version from NPU The name of the file to be loaded or deleted If the selected action is Download to Shadow the drop down menu enables selecting one of the relevant files available in the default firmware folder If another TFTP server is selected see below the file s should be available in the root of this server Otherwise you should manually specify the full path and file name If the selecte
125. VLAN type of R3 service interface An IP service group can be configured to support time based or volume and time based accounting In addition an IP service group can be configured to support direct communication between MSs belonging to the service group VPWS Transparent This type of service group is used only for VLAN CS flows Once service group is configured as VPWS Transparent type IP allocation configuration is not required This type of service group is not associated with any R3 service interface as vlan tagged MS traffic is transferred transparently on the on the R3 interface A VPWS Transparent service group can be configured to support time based accounting VPWS QinQ This type of service group is used only for VLAN CS flows Once service group is configured as type VPWS QinQ type IP allocation configuration is not required This type of service group is not associated with any R3 service interface as double tagged MS traffic is transferred transparently on the on the R3 interface The QinQ VLAN used by the MS should be received from the AAA server in Access Accept messages A VPWS QinQ service group can be configured to support time based accounting 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW oz Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW E VPWS Mapped This type of service interface is intended for special needs were VLAN CS service flows from multiple MSs use the same VLAN ID Once service gr
126. W Pook Authentication Contrat Tatti Qus Rules Bearer Traffic mer Mode Create Update ap Add X CO dekte d Marking Rude Mone Revert id Marking Rule Name a E Rue Status LI Servies Flow Data Delivery Type GD Service Flow Traffic Pnonty Service Flow Media Flow Type Enable Service Flow Media Flor Type E Citer DSCP Marking l ok O ip Pronty Marking 1 Refresh vi Swe Kc Figure 4 40 The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Traffic QoS Rules Tab Create Mode The Bearer Traffic QoS Rules table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Marking Rule Name The name alias of the Marking Rule The Bearer Traffic QoS Rules Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Marking Rule Name The name alias of the Marking Rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Rule Status The status of the rule Enable or Disable The default is Disable the default in the device is Enable 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template Parameter Description Service Flow Data Delivery Type The Service Flow Type for data delivery services uGS BE eRTVR or ANY The default is uGS the default in the device is ANY
127. ab SNMP Managers Tab Performance Tab Logging Tab Management Interface Tab The Management Interface tabs enables viewing modifying the connectivity mode and parameters of management IP interface s This section includes Management Interface Tab for Macro BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Management Interface Tab for Micro Outdoor BTS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity 7 5 2 1 1 Management Interface Tab for Macro BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Management Wanagenert Inkerface QoS Marking Res ACL IP Routna Stew Managers Performance Logang Connecthity Mode ened O ot of ued ufed Esterna Management Inter ace Local Manayement Interface Soss IP address 10 10 144 95 Sasco P adkbess 33 33 33 33 Subnet Mask 2S5 255 255 0 rat Mack EE vian ID 12 3 Next Hop Gateway 10 10 144 254 E Jos e igaren apei Dom Figure 7 9 Management Page Management Interface Tab Macro BTS The Management Interface tab for Macro BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW includes the following sections 7 5 2 1 1 1 C Connectivity Mode External Management Interface Local Management Interface Effects of Changes in IP Interface s Parameters onnectivity Mode The Connectivity Mode section enables separation of the bearer IP and NMS IP domains through definition of the
128. ab Create e E EE 32 Figure 4 8 The ASN GW Template Service Group Page Service Groups Tab EH E 34 Figure 4 9 The ASN GW Template QoS Marking Page Create Mode 40 Figure 4 10 The ASN GW Template SFA Page SFA Config Tab 42 Figure 4 11 The ASN GW Template SFA Page PHS Rules Tab Create Model 43 Figure 4 12 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Config Tab Create Mode 44 Figure 4 13 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Protocol Tab CPS AS le PAE 46 Figure 4 14 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Source Address BR Ar ete E E 47 Figure 4 15 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Destination Address RE Stee E 48 Figure 4 16 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Source Port Tab Create AS cen Sa ace cit nace sete rey cee wtmes acaiea Neaoth tana deacanede erect ecarndeacgenecsas tegeh erates 50 Figure 4 17 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Destination Port Tab Create le E E 51 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Figures Figure 4 18 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Customer VLAN ID Tab Create Mode EE 52 Figure 4 19 The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page Service Profile Config Tab Greate IMDS searsecnathcnriatissancreridineens aawiasausatensauaed a E EAA 54 Figure 4 20 The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page Service Flow Tab L E o S P 55 Figu
129. abled The default is Enable 4 4 6 2 Hot Lining Profiles Tab Asn Hot ini f Hot Uring Prok ies Hot Lig Access Lat Mode Creato Updete ekte H Revert d Profi Nama id Profile Name S Sal SS LH Figure 4 23 The ASN GW Template Hot Lining Page Hot Lining Profiles Tab Create Mode The Hot Lining Profiles table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Profile Name The name alias of the Hot Lining Profile The Hot Lining Profiles Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Profile Name The name alias of the Hot Lining Profile A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Mandatory when creating a new profile 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Parameter Description HTTP Redirect URL The HTTP redirect URL to be used by filter rules with HTTP Redirect action This is the Redirection location to be used in Http Redirection message Must be configured URL in ASCII string format if in any of the filter rules associated with the profile the configured action is HTTP Redirect the string should be start with http or https Enable Profile Enables Disables the hot lining profile The defau
130. abled for the Port classification rule The default is no If enabled then Enable IP Protocol for the same Classification Rule should be set to enable automatically enabled in the device Protocol should be set to either 6 TCP or 17 UDP 4 4 4 8 Classification Rule Destination Port Tab PHS Rules Design Contig Classilicaton Ruts Protocol Classdiation Rude Source Address Classt katun Rule Destnabon Ae Cassian Rue Source Part f Classdicatun Rud lt gt Made Create O Oebtn wp add X H Revert d Classification Config Name id Clasefication Config Name a d From SOL d To E O Enable TOPAOP Destnabon Port 17 Refresh vi Save Figure 4 17 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Destination Port Tab Create Mode The Classification Rule Destination Port tab is applicable only for L3 rules The Destination Port parameters of an existing rule cannot be modified The Classification Rule Destination Port table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name The Classification Rule Destination Port Row Editor includes the following parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Parameter Descript
131. age The Site Sector lt gt page enables defining site sector general properties and associations H as gt Site Sector 1 Site Sector Definition Name Heading deg width 0 deg Site Sector Association ee B5 IDLSB AU Slot Number AU Port Number ODU Number ODU Port Number Antenna Number Antenna Port Number 88 22 11 2 1 1 KL Daas Done Figure 7 55 Site Sector lt gt Page Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS The Site Sector page includes the following sections HM Site Sector Definition E Site Sector Association in a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS HM Site Sector Association in a Micro Outdoor BTS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW el Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Site Sector 7 9 2 1 Site Sector Definition The Site Sector Definition section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Name The sector name An optional descriptive string of up to 32 printable characters Heading The sector heading the center angle of the sector in degrees The range is from 0 to 359 The heading of an associated Sector cannot be changed The default is 0 Width The planned sector coverage in degrees The range is from 0 to 359 The default is 0 7 9 2 2 Site Sector Association in a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS The Site Sector Association table includes the following parameters for each site
132. allowing you to define the properties of the AU required for the slot Refer to Creating Deleting an AU on page 186 for more details 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment View Page E Click on an installed AU port to view relevant associations if applicable A blue background will be added to the selected AU Port as well as to the ODU and Site Sector associated with it 7 3 1 2 Components View Macro Outdoor BTS SAU DU Gier ii Oa Oe Si Oa Pia On Oa ia Sa Pi a ia i Pi Ci ca Sa i CH ia a E fe ce Betsch yi Core Figure 7 3 Site View Page Macro Outdoor BTS with a 4 channels AU The components view is a graphical display of the BTS showing the installed components and their status Each of the installed modules NPU AUs is marked in a color according to the highest severity open alarm Green indicates that there are no alarms on the component The following information and actions are available HM Double click on the NPU module to open the NPU page refer to NPU Page on page 183 E In an installed AU the background color of its number indicates its highest severity open alarm Green indicates that there are no alarms on the component If the module is defined as Required refer to Card Properties on page 184 but is not installed the background color is orange If an AU
133. ame you can add E to this Det E Target n dm fe g axia caw S LJ cma d5 2 g xia O PaE bk jean 1 2 ei E e oan ay d8 3 O Qam 3 2 ev S O itom a z E er QAM 3 4 dB c D sonn sie d S O Abee Interference Level e Lea vs Dee Figure 4 32 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab The Power Control parameters are Parameter Description Target NI The target noise and interference level for the PUSC zone in dBm The range is from 130 to 110 in steps of 1 dBm The default is 130 the default in the device is 127 ACK The C N in dB required for sending ACK reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB The default is 0 the default in the device is 7 CO The C N in dB required for sending CQI reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for ACK 8 to Required C N Level for ACK 7 see ACK parameter above The default is 0 the default in the device is 12 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Ga Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template Parameter Description CDMA The C N in dB required for transmitting CDMA reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for CQI 8 to Req
134. ameter Description Size Value Bytes The size of the header to be suppressed 1 20 Mandatory when creating a new rule The default is 1 x 4 4 4 3 NOTE An existing PHS Rule cannot be updated A PHS Rule that is associated to a Classification Rule cannot be deleted Classification Config Tab SFA Contig PHS Rules Classi katon Corfiy Classication Ride Protocol Classification Rule Source Address Classtication Ride Destination Address ClassBication Rule Source Port Cl lt Mode Create Updete Oelte d Name O Pratz LI TOS Range From Z D paren to lt O Tos mask S Ente P tos H LI PHS Rude Name D we w i d Le Ss Dora m Figure 4 12 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Config Tab Create Mode The Classification Config table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Name The name alias of the Rule The Classification Config Row Editor includes the following parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Parameter Description Name The name alias of the Rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Mandatory for Create Mode The name of an existing Rule cannot be updated Priority The priority level
135. ameter Parameter Description Deployment The type of deployment in the area served by the BS Fix or Mobile To support proper handover should be set to Fix only if mobile MSs are not expected The default is Fix 7 8 2 1 4 2 Triggers The Triggers table includes the following parameters for each entry Parameter Description Type The type of trigger Value The threshold value for the Trigger Action The action to be triggered when the relevant values goes above below the threshold The available options depend on the selected Type Neighbor Applicable only for triggers with Handover Action The neighbor s for whom the rule defined by the previous parameters is applicable General for all neighbors or a specific neighbor from the Neighbor List The Triggers table also includes the following buttons Button Description Add Trigger Adds a new entry to the Triggers table Delete Trigger Deletes one or several selected entries from the Triggers table The Type Action and Neighbor of an existing Trigger entry cannot be modified In existing Triggers entries only the Value can be modified The following table provides description possible Actions and value range for each Trigger Type 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS Trigger Type Possible Actions Trigger Condition Possible Values Own CINR lt Scan Request The CINR at the
136. an 0 the default if Idle Mode is enabled Must be unique in the network different Paging Group ID for each BS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS x NOTE The available values for Center Frequencies indicated above are for a Bandwidth of 5 MHz Fora different bandwidth the actually valid values are from f1 1 2BW to f2 1 2BW where f1 is the lowest frequency of the ODU s radio band f2 is the highest frequency of the ODU s band and BW is the configured bandwidth Note that ODU 2305 2360 000N 36 1x1 Y 0 includes two bands 2305 2320 2345 2360 MHz After clicking Apply you may be prompted to properly configure some additional parameters in the Airframe Structure General tab and or the Air Frame Structure Zones tab After configuring the requested parameters click Apply again In addition following any change in the Bandwidth delete the current Distance triggers see Radio Basic Page Mobility Tab on page 259 and redefine them 7 8 2 1 2 Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure General Tab The Air Frame Structure General tab defines the general airframe parameters j Basic 0 0 2 55 55 55 I a General Ar Frame Structure General Ar frame Structure Zones Mobity Cam Ta Ta Preamble Group D Di Seomert Number o Ji Preamble Index Frasse Number Offset O Total Leick Ouraton 5 m sets E ao P Betresn wt m Dore l J
137. anager ASN GW Template Parameter Description Enable IP Protocol Indicates whether the packet is classified based on the value of the IP protocol yes or no The default is no 4 4 4 5 Classification Rule Source Address Tab SFA Contig PHS Rules jf Classitication Coctig Classtication Rule Protocol Classification Rule Source Address Classfication Rude Destination Address Classification Rue Source Port Clin lt Made Create in ekte d Classfiration Config Nome O P Sore Adress O PSaren Mask D Enable IP Source Clasafer z Luz Refresh ll Sne Kc Figure 4 14 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Source Address Tab Create Mode The Classification Rule Source Address tab is applicable only for L3 rules The Source Address parameters of an existing rule cannot be modified The Classification Rule Source Address table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name The Classification Rule Source Address Row Editor includes the following parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW O Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Parameter Description Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name Mandatory for Create M
138. anagers table Delete Deletes one or several selected entries from the SNMP Managers table x 7 5 2 5 2 NOTE The Read and Write Communities are mandatory and both must be defined other than null Duplication of Communities pairs is not allowed each pair must be unique IMPORTANT If you delete all SNMP Managers you will loose the ability to manage the site using SNMP SNMP Trap Managers A maximum of five SNMP Trap Managers can be configured If the maximum number is reached the Add Manager button becomes inactive IMPORTANT For proper management of the site such as getting notifications on configuration change events the network management server must be defined as a Trap Manager The SNMP Trap Managers table includes the following fields for each authorized SNMP Trap Manager Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the Trap Manager Must be unique in the network the same IP address cannot be assigned to more than one Trap Manager The default is 192 168 0 1 Port Number The port number on which the Trap Manager will listen for messages from the Agent The range is from 1 to 65535 The port on which the management system listens for traps is 162 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Community The name of the SNMP Read Community used by the Trap Manager Traps are
139. anaging a Single Device Equipment View Page rec Equipment View Page The Equipment View page is applicable for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Equipment View Page for Macro BTS Equipment Equipment View Page for Mini Centralized ASN GW 7 3 1 Equipment View Page for Macro BTS Equipment The Equipment View page provides a graphical view of the current status of the Macro BTS s components The display is refreshed every 15 seconds Site 247 S Ss SampleData Figure 7 2 Equipment View Page Macro Indoor BTS The Equipment View for Macro BTS page includes the following components E Chassis View Macro Indoor BTS or Components View Macro Outdoor BTS according to the type of the managed device H Outdoor Units View 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment View Page 7 3 1 1 M Sectors View E External Devices View Chassis View Macro Indoor BTS The Chassis view is a graphical display of the BTS showing the installed components and their status Each of the installed modules NPU AUs PIUs PSUs and the 10 fans of the AVU module is marked in a color according to the highest severity open alarm Green indicates that there are no alarms on the component The following inform
140. anual Chapter 6 The Offline Configuration Tool Excel File Parameter Name in File Description General Site Parameters siteld Site ID BTS Number The ID number of the device that is used by the management system as identifier of the device Must be unique in the managed network The range is from 1 to 999999 siteName Site Name BTS Name The name of the device An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 32 characters Recommended to be unique across the managed network siteAddress Site Address BTS Address The location of the device An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 70 characters siteRackLocation Site Rack Location Location in Site and Rack An optional description of the physical location of the device in the site rack A string of up to 32 characters npulplflp The Source IP Address of the External Management Interface Must be unique in the managed network Should be in the same subnet as npulplflp External Management IP Address in the backup file External Management Default Gateway and Subnet Mask are copied from the backup file BS Parameters per BS bsldLsb BS ID LSB The unique identifier of the BS in decimal format Must be unique in the radio access network A number in the range from 1 to 16 777 215 a 24 bit value that in the management system is represented as A B C where A B C are from 0 to 255 bsName BS Name
141. applied to the downlink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 0 7 The default is 0 Not applicable for UGS data delivery type Reference Service Group The Name of the Service Group to be used by the service flow Mandatory when creating a new Service Flow Must be the name of a Service Group that already exists in the target managed objects VPWS Service Groups are applicable only for VLAN CS Service Flows of the Default Service Profile Reference Service Interface The Name of the QinQ service interface Must be the name of a Service Interface that already exists in the target managed objects Applicable only for the Default Service Profile and Convergence Sublayer Type vlancs if the assigned Service Group is of type VPWS QinQ Uplink Min Reserved Traffic Rate Kbps The minimum reserved traffic rate in Kops for uplink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 0 40000 The default is 0 the default in the device is 250 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type UGS NRTVR RTVR ERTVR For NRTVER RTVR and ERTVR cannot be higher than the Max Sustained Traffic Rate 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Parameter Description Uplink Max Latency ms The maximum latency in ms allowed in the uplink service flow The range is 0 4294967295 The default is
142. apter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Log to File Enable logging to file Indicates whether or not logging to file is enabled The default is Enable checked NOTE E A route for the Log File Server is automatically created in the IP Routing Table see IP Routing Tab on page 166 Following any change in the Log File Server Enable Disable Modify Server IP the IP Routing Table is updated according to the change In addition in the Logging Severity section you can disable logging to file or set the minimum severity level that generates a log entry for each of the following types of events Parameter Description SW Version Software upgrade procedures Fault Fault management procedures Performance Performance management procedures Shelf Shelf management procedures Startup System startup procedures Connectivity Connectivity procedures ASN GW ASN GW procedures applicable only in Distributed ASN GW mode Internal AU Manager Internal processes used for managing the AUs not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The available minimum severity options are E Disable no logging E Emergency E Alert E Critical E Error E Warning 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity E Notice E Informational The default for all event types is Error
143. ask The neighboring BSs list includes all BSs that are defined as neighbors of other BSs or as having at least one neighbor The Selected BSs table includes the following details for each BS participating in the task Parameter Description BS Neighbor ID The BS ID LSB of the neighbor BS BTS Number The BTS Number Site ID of the neighbor BS BTS Name The BTS Name of the neighbor BS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Mass Neighboring Task Click Add to open the BS Selector allowing you to add BSs to the table The list of neighboring BSs available in the BS Selector includes all BSs that are defined as neighbors of other BSs or as having at least one neighbor and is updated through the Add Delete and Delete from Neighbors Neighboring tasks initiated from the BSs see Neighbor List on page 261 Click Remove to remove one or several selected BSs from the table The task includes Send Update to All Neighbors and Get Update Neighboring Tasks to from all BSs participating in the task If the task includes all neighboring BSs through enabling the Select All option then only the Send Update task to all relevant BSs is executed since this is sufficient for complete update 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Multiple Configuration Template Based Task 9 8 Multiple Configuration Template Based Task LOCAL
144. ask Editor The editor enables defining the report type for the next execution of the task Check to include in the report only inconsistent neighbor associations Do not check the default to get a full report 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks 4Motion Mutual Neighboring Task Equipment 10 10 141 156 Andrey Completed 1 3 29 mutual neighbour check on 1 3 33 of 10 10 141 156 Andrey Completed 1 3 33 mutual neighbour check on 1 3 29 of 10 10 141 156 Andrey penpan Equipment 10 10 141 157 Yehuda_Stability Completed with errors Failed 1 1 247 mutual neighbour check on 1 4 2 of 10 10 141 56 Omer_Trans_NAU_56 1 1 247 mutual neighbour check on 1 4 3 of 10 10 141 56 Omer_Trans_NAU_56 Failed 1 1 241 mutual neighbour check on 1 4 2 of DI Figure 9 13 Mutual Neighboring Report full The report includes Result for the entire task Completed or Completed with errors The result will be Completed only if there are no inconsistencies in definitions of neighbor associations in the entire managed network Result for each device Completed or Completed with errors The result will be Completed only if there are no inconsistencies in definitions of neighbor associations in the device Result for each neighbor association presented as lt BS ID 1 gt mutual neighbor c
145. assification Rule Section General Service Profile Parameters The General Service Profile parameters at the top of the page are Parameter Description Name The read only name of the service profile Profile Status Indicates whether the profile is enabled or disabled 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW 7 7 4 3 2 2 Service Flow Table Service flows are unidirectional stream of packets either in the downlink or uplink direction associated with a certain set of QoS requirements such as maximum latency and minimum rate Based on certain classification rules service flows are transported over the R1 air interface in 802 16e connections identified by connection IDs and identified by GRE keys over the R6 interface in GRE tunnels In addition the ASN GW can mark outgoing traffic in the R3 interface for further QoS processing within the CSN The system supports two types of service flows according to the convergence sublayer CS type IP CS and VLAN CS An IP CS service flow can be associated only with an IP service group A VLAN CS service flow can be associated only with a VPWS Transparent QinQ Mapped service group VLAN CS service flows can be configured only for the Default Service Profile Up to 12 Service Flows can be defined for each Service Profile The Service Flow table includes the following read only parameter
146. assification Rules tab includes the Classification Rules table and the Classification Rule Parameters Editor section The Classification Rules table includes the following read only parameters for each existing rule Parameter Description Classification Rule Number The index number of the Classification rule An auto sequential number starting from 1 up to a maximum of 100 rules Name The name of the rule Type The type of the rule L2 or L3 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Select an entry to open the Classification Rule Parameters Editor for the selected rule The following buttons are available below the table Button Description Add Classification Rule Adds a new entry to the Classification Rules table and opens the Classification Rule Parameters Editor allowing to configure parameters of the new rule Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the Classificaton Rules table The Classification Rule Parameters Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Classification Rule Identifiers Name The name of the classification rule A string of 1 30 characters The name of an existing rule cannot be modified PHS Rule Name The Packet Header Suppression PHS rule name associated with the classification rule or null for no PHS R
147. assified based on the value of the IP protocol The default is Disable Cannot be updated in an existing rule IP Protocol Relevant only if Enable IP Protocol is enabled Configurable only when Enable IP Protocol is enabled The enabled protocol number Value is in the range 1 255 using standard IANA protocol values The default is 1 Cannot be updated in an existing rule Enable IP Source Classifier Indicates whether the use of an associated IP source address is enabled for the classification rule The default is Disable Cannot be updated in an existing rule IP Source Address Relevant only if Enable IP Source Classifier is enabled Configurable only when Enable IP Source Classifier is enabled The IP source address enabled for the classification rule The default is 0 0 0 0 must be set to a valid value Cannot be updated in an existing rule IP Source Mask Relevant only if Enable IP Source Classifier is enabled Configurable only when Enable IP Source Classifier is enabled The net mask field that is used to specify a range of IP source addresses The default is 255 255 255 255 Cannot be updated in an existing rule Enable IP Destination Indicates whether the use of an associated destination address is enabled for Classifier the classification rule The default is Disable Cannot be updated in an existing rule IP Destination Address Relevant only if Enable IP Destination Classifier is enabled Configurable only when
148. ate Read only The date and time of template s creation 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager Configuring Templates 4 3 4 3 1 Configuring Templates This section includes E The Template Configuration Editor E Managing Tables and Template Modes E Updating Scalars The Template Configuration Editor The Template Configuration Editor enables managing the parameters included in the selected template There are two types of parameters Scalars a single instance in each managed object and tables that may contain multiple rows multiple instances of the relevant parameters in each managed object Each template tab can include either only scalars or a single table IMPORTANT The default values specified for different parameters are the default values in the device Certain default values used by the templates may differ from the specified default values 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager Configuring Templates Fiters By clicking on a slected property name you can add it to this filter O Save o 0 oO O C Enable agna to server C Enable logging to fie EI Caere onser pd Figure 4 3 The Template Configuration Editor Tab with Scalar Parameters Mode Crake ipdate Oelote Per By diding on a selected property name you can
149. ation and actions are available E PIUs PSUs If the module is installed the background color of its number indicates its highest severity open alarm Green indicates that there are no alarms on the component If the module is defined as Required refer to Power Supply Page on page 181 but is not installed the background color is yellow Double click on an installed or a required but not installed module to open the Power Supply configuration page refer to Power Supply Page on page 181 HM Double click on the NPU module to open the NPU page refer to NPU Page on page 183 E In an installed AU the background color of its number indicates its highest severity open alarm Green indicates that there are no alarms on the component If the module is defined as Required refer to Card Properties on page 184 but is not installed the background color is orange If a module is installed but not defined yet the background color is purple Double click on an installed or a required but not installed AU to open the configuration page for the selected AU refer to AU lt Type and Slot gt Page on page 188 E In an installed AU each of the ODU connectors channels are marked as follows Green The ODU port is Up no fault and the ODU port is set to No Shutdown Red The ODU port is Down fault or the ODU port is set to Shutdown HM Double click on an empty AU module to open the New AU dialog box
150. ation tree and select Delete You will be request to confirm the operation IMPORTANT An associated BS specified in a Site Sector Association cannot be deleted For more details refer to Site Sector lt gt Page on page 279 To delete a BS from its neighbors To delete a BS from its neighbors without deleting it entirely right click the BS entry in the navigation tree and select Delete from neighboring 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS 7 8 2 Radio The Radio node includes the following pages Radio Basic Page Radio Advanced Page 7 8 2 1 Radio Basic Page The Radio node s Basic page includes the following tabs Radio Basic Page General Tab Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure General Tab Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab Radio Basic Page Mobility Tab 7 8 2 1 1 Radio Basic Page General Tab The General Tab enables defining the basic radio parameters 4 Basic 0 0 2 55 55 55 General Aw Frame structure General Ar frame Structure Zones Mobility B5 Identification Radio Parameters Nome 85_after_offine Operates 10 0 0 2 65 IDLSE 55 55 55 Bandwidth E fje Lerter frequency eu me Ide Mode D insbe Pagng Group ID D E Si L ve Kess Figure 7 42 Radio Basic Page General Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW D
151. ave values that either exceed this range or are too small The value scale of each counter is displayed to the right of the counter s name the default is 1 0 To change the value scale of a counter double click on the relevant Scale entry and choose the desired scale from the scale drop down list that will be displayed You can use the current graph s value displayed in the Value column next to the Counter s name to identify the required value scale The values displayed for this counter on the graph are the actual counter values multiplied by the scale factor 8 4 The Graph and Graph Controls Section The graph and graph control section contains the graphs area used for displaying the selected counters values over time and several graph controls on the right side of the window By default the starting time of the graphs is the time at which the first counter was selected The resolution of the time axis will change dynamically to allow display of graphs from starting time to current time If the Show Legend option is selected the default the color and name of each selected counter is displayed below the graph area Deselect to hide the legends Select the Positive Only check box to set the boundaries of the values vertical axis between 0 and 100 Deselect the default to set the boundaries between 100 to 100 You can use the lt and gt buttons to shift the time axis to the left right Left click and move the mous
152. be applied for this class map 0 63 The default is 0 Priority Configurable only during creation of a new marking action entry The VLAN priority value to be applied for this class map 0 7 where 0 is the lowest and 7 is the highest The default is 0 The Marking Actions section also includes the following buttons Button Description Add Action Adds a new entry to the Marking Actions table Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the Marking Actions table An Action ID that is associated to a QoS Marking Classifier cannot be deleted 7 5 2 2 2 By default Action IDs 1 8 are pre configured For more details refer to ACL Tab on page 159 QoS Marking Classifiers QoS Marking Classifiers are used to associate Classifier IDs with Action IDs The QoS Marking Classifiers table includes the following parameters Parameter Description Classifier ID The auto sequential ID number of the QoS Marking Classifier 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Action ID The action ID number associated to the classifier Must be one of the Action IDs defined in the Marking Actions table An Action ID cannot be associated to more than one classifier The QoS Marking Classifiers section also includes t
153. belle 00 UTC Time and Date 1 f 201 Read GPS Time daily E Read GPS Time At oul o z2 Local Time and Date bit 2 9 th 16 Jah 17 f BS Clock External 1 PPS Clock Enable E Location Longitude 1 E ae deg L Almanac Usable Time 720 h Latitude 000 New deg ee WW R Hotstart Altitude m Ephemeris Usable Time 4 h Synchronization Maximum Number of Satellites for Sync Loss 1 3 Number of Satellites Minimum Number of Satellites for Sync Return 2 p GPS Status E E 7 Refresh vi Apply Done Figure 7 28 GPS Page Macro Indoor BTS The GPS page includes the following sections E Chain E BS Clock Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS E Location Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW E Warm Start Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS E Hot Start Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS E Synchronization Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW E GPS Status Applicable only for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Indoor BTS using a Trimble Lassen GPS receiver 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment E Software Versions Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW E SNTP Primary Secondary Server Applicable only for Mini Centralized ASN GW 7 6 2 3 1 Chain Parameter Description GPS Type The type of time synchronization source to be
154. bination of Antenna No and Antenna Port No cannot appear in more than one entry A specific Antenna can only be associated with a single Sector In the current release a specific BS can only be associated with a single AU and vice versa If in a certain entry BS 66053 is associated with AU 1 BS 66053 cannot be associated with another AU and AU 1 cannot be associated with another BS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW o Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Site Sector E Two ODUs associated with the same AU for Beam Forming support must be in the same frequency band This is applicable for 2x2 and 4x2 ODUs that support Beam Forming 7 9 2 3 Site Sector Association in a Micro Outdoor BTS Site Sector 1 She Sector Definition Nene SangieData Heong deg wah 1 deg Ske Sector Assocation BS IDLSB AU Slot Number AU Port Number Rado Number Rado Port Number Antenna Mate Aeterna Port Mate 88 88 63 1 1 1 1 1 t BABAS 1 t ao 1 Biel w np Cone Figure 7 56 Site Sector Page Micro Outdoor BTS The Site Sector Association table in a Micro Outdoor BTS is created automatically based on the relevant defined objects The table includes the following read only parameters for each of the two site sector associations Parameter Description BS ID LSB The unique ID of the BS The same for both entries AU Slot Number 1 for both entries AU Port Number
155. ble only for IP Service Groups Indicates whether MS MS loopback is enabled or disabled for the service interface The default is Enable Service VLAN Applicable only for IP Service Groups with an attached VLAN service interface Indicates the status of a VLAN service interface attached to the service group Not applicable when the attached Service Interface is IP in IP If a Service Group with Service VLAN enabled is attached to a Service Profile Service VLAN cannot be disabled The default is Enable the default in the device is Disable Accounting Mode Accounting mode for the service interface E None No accounting support E Time based The ASN GW send RADIUS Accounting Start Stop Requests The ASN GW shall also send Interim Accounting requests to AAA server using RADIUS Accounting Interim messages on a preconfigured or negotiated interval AAA server can send negotiated time interval in Access Accept message If the defined value see Interim Interval below is zero and there is no Acct Interim Interval in Access Accept interim updates should be deactivated E Volume and time based Applicable only for IP Service Groups Functionality is the same as for Time option above In addition this mode supports postpaid accounting by supporting IP Session Volume Based Accounting The ASN GW will report the cumulative volume counters for each MS IP Session The counters will be collected per MS Service Flow and will be cu
156. bles defining QoS management parameters for scheduling uncommitted traffic above the maximum reserved rate Scheduling uncommitted traffic can be done using one of the following options HM Equal Time ET scheduling mode in which air resources are being scheduled in a fair manner proportional to the users excess traffic maximum sustained rate maximum reserved rate SLAs E Equal Rate ER scheduling mode in which air resources are allocated to users aiming at ensuring data rate fairness between users proportional to their excess traffic SLAs Assuming a sector with diversity different channels conditions of active users ET scheme enables higher aggregate sector throughput at the expense of data rate fairness among users while ER scheduling scheme ensures maximum data rate fairness among users at the expense of lower aggregate sector throughput Using ER scheduling scheme exposes the system to excessive allocation of air resources to highly active users having relatively poorer channel conditions To ensure data rate fairness more resources will to be allocated to these users compared to users with relatively good channel conditions The effect of a small number of such users within the sector will be reflected by reduced aggregate sector throughput as well as degradation of achievable rates for all users To protect against abusing users an instantaneous rate threshold can be defined within the scheduling scheme in wh
157. bsUIDataPermBase Uplink Data Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the uplink data zone The range is from 0 to 69 Value should be set according to Radio Network Plan bsBearerlp BS Bearer IP Address The IP address of the bearer interface of the BS Must be unique in the network bsPagingGroupld The Paging Group ID of the BS The range is from 0 to 65535 For proper operation all Paging Groups IDs in the radio network should be set either to 0 Idle Mode disabled or to unique numbers different Paging Group ID for each BS z NOTE The content of BS ASN GW Load Balancing tables and Neighbor BSs List ID IP mapping will not be copied from the golden backup file to the offline created files 6 4 Using the Offline Configuration Tool 6 4 1 Starting the Offline Configuration Tool Wizard gt To start the Offline Configuration Tool Wizard 1 Select Configuration Management gt Offline Configuration Tool from the menu bar The Offline Configuration Tool wizard opens e BEEN Offline Configuration Tool Configure and start the Offline Configuration Tool LS Keser NE Type 4M Macro BTS SW Version 2 5 M2 Figure 6 2 Offline Configuration Tool Starting the Tool 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 The Offline Configuration Tool Using the Offline Configuration Tool 2 Enter the Wizard Required Parameters NE Type and
158. c077 company com The settings of the MS identification data depends on getting this data from the AAA server Click Apply to force de registration of the specified MS You can click Home to return to the main Network Maintenance Management window 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 3 The Network Maintenance Manager All MSs De Registration SEN All MSs De Registration The All MSs De Registration option is used to force de registration of all MSs served by a specific device SyRem Managed Network Tak Management Configuration Management Service Frovizoning Agent apen Seourty Management Help H lemer manager x pen em settings x Hironn x L rte neg x Al ebe ee x gal network mantenance x Network Maintenance Management Target An CW IP adress ASN GW BTS Number O NFU Management IP Address al Howe Aen Network Markensnce Server 10 10 107 117 User odan Figure 3 4 Network Maintenance All MSs De Registration You can select the serving entity by E ASN GW IP Address the Bearer interface IP address of the target device E ASN GW BTS Number the BTS Number of the target device E NPU Management IP Address the IP address of the interface used for managing the site NPU to which the ASN GW is assigned Select the option you want to use and enter the applicable value in the field next to the selected option Click Apply to force de registration
159. carried by the service flow The range is 0 40000 The default is 250 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink downlink data delivery type UGS NRTVR RTVR ERTVR For NRTVR RTVR and ERTVR cannot be higher than the Max Sustained Traffic Rate Max Latency ms The maximum latency in ms allowed in the uplink downlink service flow The range is 0 4294967295 The default is 500 If data delivery type is ERTVR or UGS the default value should be 90 ms Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink downlink data delivery type UGS RTVR ERTVR 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Tolerated Jitter ms the maximum delay variation jitter in milliseconds for this uplink downlink service flow The range is 0 4294967295 The default is 0 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink downlink data delivery type UGS ERTVR Unsolicited Grant Interval The nominal interval in ms between successive data grant opportunities for this ms uplink service flow The range is 0 65535 The default is 20 Must be lower than Uplink Max Latency Relevant only for uplink service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type UGS ERTVR 7 7 4 3 2 4 Reference Classification Rule Section The Reference Classification Rule section enables managing rules f
160. ce Traffik Per US E Mts resources reports Wl Provisioned Qos E 85 Counters E H5 Counters S Ee Betrest o m Dos Figure 7 15 Management Page Performance Tab The Performance tab includes the following components Parameter Description Performance Group A list of counters groups as detailed below with a check box next to each group s Activation name Select a check box to enable collection and storage of performance data for the counters group The default is enable collection checked for all groups Enabling disabling of a group shall take effect at the managed object starting at the beginning of the next aggregation period 15 minutes The data of parameters of disabled collection groups will not be included in the file generated at the end of the aggregation period during which collection was disabled The Performance page includes the following sections E Connectivity E ASN GW not applicable for Micro Outdoor BTS E BS Counter E MS Counters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity 7 5 2 6 1 Connectivity Main Counters Group Counters Included Applicable for NPU Connectivity NPU Backhaul Port Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW NPU Cascade Port Macro Indoor BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW NPU Internal Management Interface Macro Indoor BTS
161. connectivity mode The following NMS connectivity modes are available for selection 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description In Band When In Band mode is selected the VLAN is used to differentiate between the bearer and external NMS IP domains on the DATA port The bearer VLAN is used for the bearer IP domain and the external management VLAN is used for the external NMS IP domain The MGMT port and CSCD Cascade port are assigned to the local management VLAN in this connectivity mode The CSCD port is not applicable for Macro Outdoor BTS Out of Band When Out of Band mode is selected the bearer and external NMS IP domains are separated at the Ethernet interface The DATA port and bearer VLAN is used for the bearer IP domain and the MGMT port and external management VLAN is used for external NMS connectivity The CSCD port is assigned to the local management VLAN The CSCD port is not applicable for Macro Outdoor BTS Unified When Unified mode is selected the bearer IP domain and external NMS IP domain are unified on the DATA port meaning that the same IP address and VLAN are used to connect to the NMS server AAA server HA and BS The MGMT port and CSCD port are assigned to the local management VLAN in this connectivity mode The CSCD port is not applicable for Macro Outdoor BTS The default
162. ction to be performed on packets that match the rule Pass Drop HTTP Redirect The default is Pass HTTP Redirect is applicable only if Direction is Uplink If set to HTTP Redirect then HTTP Redirect Address must be defined Filter Protocol The IP protocol number 1 255 255 means any ignore this condition The default is 0 in the device the default is 255 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager 4 5 BS Template The BS Template comprises the following pages Radio Basic Page Radio Advanced Page R6 R8 Bearer Interface 4 5 1 Radio Basic Page The Radio Basic page comprises the following tabs General Def Tab RF Tab Base Band Tab Air Frame Structure Tab Triggers Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW BS Template Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template 4 5 1 1 General Def Tab ase ss I Figure 4 25 The BS Template Radio Basic Page General Def Tab The General Def parameters are 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW e Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template Parameter Description Basic Rate The uplink basic rate QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 16 QAM 1 2 16 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 1 2 64 QAM 2 3 64 QAM 3
163. ctivity ASN GW Counters and BS Counters tabs Conneclivky ASN GW Casier BS Counters Croat Update Piters By clicking on a selected property name you can acd i to this Fier By ciching Mo Performance Groups Activation Backhad Poet Group Activation Lea ze ore Figure 4 43 The Management Template Performance Page Connectivity ASN GW Counters Tab Only the Update Mode is applicable for the Counters tables The Counters tables includes the following parameter for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Performance Group The Counters Group to be activated deactivated according to selected group in Activation the Row Editor The Counters Row Editors includes the following parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager Management Template Parameter Description Performance Group The Counters Group to be activated deactivated Activation Group Activation Defines whether collection of performance counters for the group will be activated deactivated 4 6 3 Logging Page not applicable for Micro BTS The Logging page comprises the following tabs E NPU Logging Tab E Log Severity Tab 4 6 3 1 NPU Logging Tab NPU Logging Loy Sever Mode create Update De Fitters 8y king an a
164. d select the file and click Import NOTE The Import option is available when right clicking anywhere in the work area without the need to select any existing entry Export To Server Available only for configuration backup and performance files when selecting files of the same type Click to export the selected file s to the file system in the management system s server Performance files are stored in filesystem SitesFiles Performance Backup files are stored in filesystem SitesFiles FullConfiguration A backup file name will be appended with the BTS Number and IP Address 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 The File Manager Duplicate Site File Manager 10 3 Duplicate Site File Manager The Duplicate Site File Manager enables viewing details of configuration files that were prepared using the Duplicate Site Manager see The Duplicate Site Manager on page 97 and are available in the database of the management system It also enables initiating the Restore Configuration Task see Restore Configuration Task on page 300 exporting files to the client file system and importing files stored in the client file system Files are added to the database by either importing them see details below or when created using the Duplicate Site Manager A ANARE a System Managed Network Faut Haart Configuration Managemert Service Provisioring Administration
165. d action is Delete AU Version from NPU the drop down list includes all files in the NPUs of the managed BTSs TFTP IP Address The IP address of the TFTP server on which the file to be downloaded is stored This address is set by default to the management system s internal TFTP server IP address but can be changed to any external TFTP server IP address See also in previous section NPU Software Upgrade a note on proper process of modifying the TFTP Server IP Address You can select both the Download to Shadow and Switch Over options In this case the Switch Over action will take place only after successful completion of the Load to Shadow action The Select Equipment table displays the devices that will participate in the task The displayed functionality depend on the selected action s If the selected action is Delete AU Version from NPU the table displays all the NPuUs that will participate in the task and the AU software files stored in each of these NPUs Click on the Add button to open the BTS Selector allowing you to add NPU s to the task 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Software Upgrade Task If Download to Shadow and or Switch Over action is selected the table displays all the AUs that will participate in the task and the current SW versions in each AU Click on the Add button to open the equipment selector allowing you to add AU s to the
166. daily scheduled time for the automatic configuration backup is indicated in the Daily Backup Time text boxes in the Automatic Configuration Backup section The format is hh mm where hh 00 to 23 mm 00 to 59 The default is 00 00 7 6 1 3 AU Not applicable for a Mini Centralized ASN GW From the navigation tree of a managed Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS you can create new AU entities or delete an existing AU entity refer to Creating Deleting an AU The AU node includes an AU lt Type and Slot gt Page for each created AU Ina Micro Outdoor BTS there is always a single object Micro ODU Slot 1 representing the entire BTS 7 6 1 3 1 Creating Deleting an AU AU object creation deletion is applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS Ina Micro Outdoor BTS the AU object is created automatically and cannot be deleted 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment gt To create a new AU 1 Right click the AU sub node in the navigation tree and select Create to open the New AU window You can also double click on an empty module in the Equipment View Page see Chassis View Macro Indoor BTS on page 135 or Components View Macro Outdoor BTS on page 136 to open the New AU window for the selected slot See table below for mapping of Outdoor Macro BTS AUs to slot numbers Table 7 4 Mapping of Outdoor Macro BTS AUs to Slot AU Slot
167. dard up to 20 Mbps Enhanced up to 25 Mbps Trial up to 30 Mbps Maximum throughput for two MSs may be increased to up to 16Mbps per MS when set to Standard Enhanced or Trial The default is Basic 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template 4 5 1 2 RF Tab General Det FF Base Band Air Frame Stature Triggers Mode Create Update Fitters 8y clicking on a selected peoperty name you can add to this fiter LJ Conter frequency MHz Refresh 11 vi Save Figure 4 26 The BS Template Radio Basic Page RF Tab The RF parameter is Parameter Description Center frequency The center of the frequency band in which the BS will transmit in MHz The available values in accordance with the bands supported by different ODUs are HM 2022 5 to 2217 5 in steps of 0 125 HM 2302 5 to 2397 5 in steps of 0 125 E 2487 5 to 2687 5 in steps of 0 125 E 3302 5 to 3397 5 in steps of 0 125 E 3402 5 to 3797 5 in steps of 0 125 The available values for Center Frequencies indicated above are for a Bandwidth of 5 MHz For a different bandwidth the actually valid values are from f1 1 2BW to f2 1 2BW where f1 is the lowest frequency of the ODU s radio band f2 is the highest frequency of the ODU s band and BW is the configured bandwidth Note that ODU 2305 2360 000N 36 1x1 Y 0 includes two bands
168. dard ACLs ACL Number Rule Action Source IP Address Destination IP Address ACL 96 not Allow Any Internal Management IP address applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW ACL 97 Allow Any External Management IP address ACL 98 Allow Any Local Management IP address The default Extended ACL 186 attached to the NPU virtual interface includes the following Allow rules allowing certain traffic towards the Bearer interface 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Table 7 2 Rules of Default Extended ACL 186 Rule Action SourcelIP Source Destination IP Destination Protocol Address Port Address Port Allow Any Any Bearer IP address Any ICMP 1 Allow Any Any Bearer IP address 2231 used UDP 17 for WiMAX ASN Control Plane Protocol Allow Any Any Bearer IP address 1812 1813 UDP 17 used for RADIUS Authenticatio n and Accounting Allow Any Any Bearer IP address 69 used for UDP 17 TFTP Allow Any Any Bearer IP address 1022 1023 UDP 17 used for software download Additional Extended ACLs are created automatically for every Service Group that is associated with a VLAN Service Interface and an enabled VLAN Service Up to 10 ACLs numbered ACL 187 to ACL 196 can be created These automatically created deleted ACLs allow Ping and DHCP traffic on the DHCP Own IP Addr
169. dius The maximum cell radius in km The available values are 1 2 4 8 15 23 30 The default is 2 7 8 2 2 2 Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab The Power Control tab enables defining the target noise and interference levels MJ EMS_after_offline on 10 10 144 35 Configuring Equipment a TO Advanced 0 0 2 55 55 55 meupe s Target Ni 127 dm Ster Low attenuator Lee E B QPSK 3 EI elle ch Betray ye aeiy Cone J Figure 7 48 Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab The Power Control tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description Target Noise amp Interference Level Target NI The target noise and interference level for the PUSC zone in dBm The range is from 130 to 110 in steps of 1 dBm The default is 127 Allowed Interference Level Correction of maximum allowed UL MCS based on measured DL SCINR The options are Very High High Medium Low The default is High 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Beam Forming Calibration Attenuator Not applicable for 2 channels AU Macro Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS Applicable only for Beam Forming DL Diversity Mode The calibration attenuation used to help mitigate potential out of band interference to beam forming calibration caused by other base stations The options a
170. down menu select the required operation The available options are Retrieval of MS Data on page 10 Retrieval of All MSs Data on page 12 Single MS De Registration on page 15 All MSs De Registration on page 16 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW O Device Driver User Manual Chapter 3 The Network Maintenance Manager Retrieval of MS Data Ze Retrieval of MS Data The Retrieval of MS Data option is used to retrieve data related to a specific MS as maintained by the ASN GW that currently serves the MS H GR couemene manager x dl owcoverr settings x D aa mees x femms x Al Date ze x yl network marene x Network Maintenance Management creron Asa Isi Target ASN GW IP Address MS Outer NAT E ka G Amy E Network Martensnce Server 10 10 107 117 User odan Figure 3 1 Network Maintenance Retrieval of MS Data To retrieve data related to a specific MS enter the ASN GW IP Address of the ASN GW currently serving the MS Bearer IP address and the MS Outer NAI the complete NAI a string of up to 253 characters such as fam 1 4efd450727234884ad6bf3db0d68c077 company com The settings of the MS identification data depends on getting this data from the AAA server Click Apply to retrieve the data for the specified MS The displayed details include Parameter Description Target ASN GW IP Address The IP address of the target device
171. e of the Bearer Interface IP Address and cannot be modified Tunnel Destination IP Applicable only for IP in IP service interface The destination IP address that indicates the point of termination of the tunnel for the service interface Service VLAN ID Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces The Service Interface VLAN ID parameter The range is 1 9 11 to 4094 A Service Interface VLAN ID must not conflict with other instances of Service Interface VLAN ID and VLAN IDs of Bearer Local Management and External Management interfaces It must also not conflict with CVID of any transparent MS Default Gateway IP Address Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces The IP Address of the Default Gateway Must be unique among all the Host Interfaces IPs Bearer Local Management Internal Management External Management and existing instances of Service Interface s Tunnel Destination IP Address and Default Gateway IP Address Must be in the same subnet with the IP Address of the DHCP server proxy relay to be assigned to a service group using this service interface Subnet mask is taken as default subnet mask i e 255 255 255 0 Service Groups up to 10 Number An automatically generated number from 1 up to 10 Service Name The name alias of the service group A string of 1 to 15 characters Must be unique in the device Type The Service Group s type IP VPWS service groups are not
172. e Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template The Triggers Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Trigger Name Mandatory for all Modes The Trigger Name that includes the Trigger Type and Action For details refer to the table below Trigger Value The threshold value for the trigger For CINR triggers the range is 64 to 63 5 in steps of 0 5 dB For RSSI triggers the range is 103 75 to 40 in steps of 0 25 dBm For Distance triggers the range in meters is 0 3400 in steps of 50 if BS BW is 10 MHz 0 6800 in steps of 50 if BS BW is 5 MHz 0 4800 in steps of 50 if BS BW is 7 MHz Trigger Type Action Trigger Condition Own CINR Scan request lt dB Scan Request The CINR at the Serving BS is below the Trigger threshold in dB Own RSSI Scan request lt dBm Scan Request The RSSI at the Serving BS is below the Trigger threshold in dBm Distance Scan Request m Scan Request The Serving BS distance from the MS calculated by measuring the round trip delay is above the Trigger threshold in meter Neighbor CINR Handover request gt dB Handover Request The CINR at the Neighbor BS is above the Trigger threshold in dB Neighbor RSSI Handover Handover Request The RSSI at the Neighbor BS is above the request gt dBm Trigger threshold in dBm Neighbor CINR Own CINR Handover Handover Request The CINR at the Neighbor BS minus the CIN
173. e deregistered The range is 0 to 86 400 seconds A value of 0 means this timer is deactivated and MS is not deregistered The default is 0 Lease Time Applicable only for IP Service Groups Not applicable in DHCP Relay mode The lease time in seconds of IP address allocated for MS from this Service Group The range is 24 4294967295 The default is 86 400 In the Proxy mode this value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept DHCP Own IP Address Applicable only for IP Service Groups The IP address of the DHCP server relay proxy Must be different from other instances of DHCP Own IP Address in the device For a service group using a VLAN service interface should be in same subnet with the Default Gateway configured for the service interface associated with the service group Subnet mask is taken as the default subnet mask i e 255 255 255 0 In DHCP Server mode the DHCP server IP address must be in the same subnet but outside the range allocated for users address pool as provisioned in the DHCP Server Configurable only when creating a new Service Group The default is 0 0 0 0 must be changed to a valid value 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Enable Service VLAN Applicable only for IP Service Groups with an attached VLAN service interface Indicates the sta
174. e enables creation of a new BS based on the configuration of an existing BS To copy a BS right click the BS node in the navigation tree and select Copy BS to open the BS Selector window From the list of available BSs select the BS you want to copy and click Select The Copy BS window will open with the values of the source BS used for BS ID LSB and Operator ID parameters Copy BS BS ID LSB Operator ID Bearer IP Center Frequency Cell ID Preamble Group Segment Number Frame Number Offset Map Major Groups Default Authenticator IP ES Figure 7 41 Copy Existing BS Window 3 Configure the required parameters for the new BS all other parameters will be copied from the source BS and may be changed later Parameter Description BS ID LSB The unique identifier of the BS Replace the BS ID LSB of the source BS with a new value The management system will reject a BS ID LSB already assigned to another BS in the managed wireless network The format is x y z where x y and z are in the range from 0 to 255 The default is the BS ID of the source BS must be changed to a unique value 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Ga Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Operator ID The unique Identifier of the wireless network operator The same Operator ID must be used by all BSs in the managed
175. e file that will participate in the task Each File Name includes its creation date and time To remove one or several devices from the Source Equipment table select the device s to be removed and click on the Remove button 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Restore Configuration Task 9 3 Restore Configuration Task LOCAL CRAFT NOTE In the Local CRAFT Utility the Restore Configuration Task is applicable only to the managed device The Restore Configuration task enables loading a configuration file to a target device The configuration file can be one of the following E A backup configuration file previously retrieved from the target device E A Duplicate Site configuration file previously prepared for the target device based on the defined Site ID The task also enables loading a vendor configuration file to selected devices A vendor configuration file includes vendor parameters that cannot be configured by the configuration tools available to the customer If for any reason the vendor will decide that any of these parameters should be modified the applicable customers will be notified and a special file that includes the necessary modifications shall be sent to them gt To open the Restore Task Editor In the Task Manager window do one of the following E To open a new task use the Task Wizard E To open an existing task select an existing Restore Configuration task
176. e following formula Y A 3 Total Uplink Duration Extra TTG where A 46 for BW of 5 or 10 MHz and 32 for BW of 7 MHz Table 7 8 Calculating the Upper Limit Value Y for Minimum and Maximum Size Bandwidth MHz Maximum Cell Radius Total Uplink Duration slots Extra TTG symbols 5 10 1 2 4 8 4 6 0 1 2 4 8 15 23 5 7 1 15 23 30 4 6 2 30 5 7 3 7 1 2 4 8 15 23 4 0 1 2 4 8 15 23 30 3 5 1 30 4 2 7 8 2 1 4 Radio Basic Page Mobility Tab The Mobility tab enables defining the deployment mode and the handover negotiation parameters It also enables defining ID IP mapping of neighbor BSs d Basic 0 0 2 55 55 55 General Ar Frome Structure General Ar Frame Struchee Zones Mobility Deployment Deployment Fix riggers l Type Vake Action Neighbor Add Trigger Neighbee List BSNeWhbor ID UTS IP Address BIS Name BSN Action On Selected Neighbors 0 0 2 1 3 29 10 10 141 156 TOI 40 ny Network Lipdate Ta Neighbors ES ri el 1 Steel vi Anc Done Figure 7 45 Radio Basic Page Mobility Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS The Mobility tab includes the following sections E Deployment E Triggers E Neighbor List 7 8 2 1 4 1 Deployment The Deployment section includes the Deployment par
177. e group using this service interface The default is 0 0 0 0 must be changed to a valid value 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Subnet Mask Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces The subnet mask of the default gateway Should not overlap with an existing Interface subnet host interfaces other service interfaces The Subnet Mask of a service interface associated to a service group cannot be modified The default is 255 255 255 0 Enable Checksum Applicable only for IP in IP service interfaces Indicates whether or not the tunnel checksum feature is enabled yes or no The default is no unchecked 7 7 2 2 Service Groups Tab The Services Groups tab enables viewing modifying the parameters of existing service group It also enables adding new service groups up to a maximum of 10 and removing service groups A service group is a group of MSs that are served by the same service provider or service flows that belong to the same service class The following service group types are supported IP This type of service group is used only for IP CS flows Once service group is configured as type IP additional IP allocation configuration is also required such as DHCP mode IP pool IP Subnet etc This type of service group must be associated with either IP IP encapsulated IP packets or
178. e is 0 7 The default is 0 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Site Sector 7 9 dei Site Sector Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW From the navigation tree for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS you can create new ODU entities or delete an existing ODU entity see Creating Deleting a Site Sector below The Site Sector node includes a Site Sector lt gt Page for each configured site sector Up to 6 site sectors numbered 1 to 6 can be defined for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS In a Micro Outdoor BTS there is a single automatically configured Site Sector page Creating Deleting a Site Sector To add a site sector right click the Site Sector node in the navigation tree and select Create Site Sector Mandatory Parameters Site Sector Number SiteSector 2 ly Figure 7 54 New Site Sector Window In the New Site Sector window select the mandatory Site Sector Number the available options include only unassigned numbers and click OK You should 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Site Sector configure additional properties in the Site Sector page that is added to the navigation tree To delete a site sector right click the required Site Sector sub node in the navigation tree and select Delete 7 9 2 Site Sector lt gt P
179. e operation IMPORTANT An associated AU specified in a Site Sector Association cannot be deleted For more details refer to Site Sector lt gt Page on page 279 AU lt Type and Slot gt Page The AU node includes an AU lt Type and Slot gt page for each created AU Ina Micro Outdoor BTS there is always a single object Micro ODU Slot 1 representing the entire BTS For details on creation deletion of AU entities refer to Creating Deleting an AU on page 186 The AU lt Type and Slot gt page includes the following tabs E AU Card Properties Tab E AU Control Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 188 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment 7 6 1 3 2 1 AU Card Properties Tab The Card Properties tab displays configuration and status information for the AU module AU 4 Channels Slot 2 Card Properties Control Requred Installed Type EL ze Seria Manger HW Version Number HW Revision Mater Boot SW Version Number IF Version Number Operational SW Version Number JAU care IE card version ramban Shadow Sw verson Number Qurrerk Running SW Source Mairtenance Connecthity IP address 192 160 0 3 Mask 295 255 255 0 Nout Hop 0 0 0 0 VLAN ID elo 1 Betresh wi np KH Figure 7 23 AU lt Type and Slot gt Page Card Properties Tab Macro BTS The AU Card Properties tab includes the following sections E Requir
180. e to the right while holding the left button down to mark a selected time interval After releasing the mouse s left button the selected interval will be displayed using the entire width of the graph section zoom in You can repeat the process and or use the lt and gt to zoom in on a selected time interval To return to the default display after zoom in and or shifting the time axis left click and move the mouse to the left while holding the left button down Right click to open the copy save options menu enabling you to save the current graph as a PNG Image File or copy it to the Clipboard 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 288 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 The Performance Monitoring Viewer General Controls 8 5 8 5 1 8 5 2 8 5 3 General Controls The following graph controls are available Polling Interval To change the polling interval The available options for the Polling Interval are 5 10 20 and 60 seconds The default is 5 seconds Select the required polling interval and click on the Apply button next to it Stop Available only when at least one counter is selected Select to stop polling and deselect all counters Print To print or preview a graph Click on Print A pop up menu opens with three options E Print To open the Print dialog box for selecting a printer setting up the printing properties and printing the graph section E Print Preview Displays a prev
181. ector Association table also includes the following buttons 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Site Sector Button Description Add Adds a new entry to the table Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table An existing association cannot be modified to modify an association delete it and add the modified association To add an association click on the Add button A new line is added to the table Double click on each parameter s entry to open a drop down selection menu with the available options according to the status of the relevant components in the database Creation of a new Sector Association entry will succeed only if all the following conditions are met The specified BS object exists and is properly configured All mandatory parameters have been configured properly The configured frequency is within the valid range defined by the required ODU type in the specified ODU object and the bandwidth parameter The Operator ID is the same as Operator ID configured for previously associated BSs An ODU Port combination of ODU No and ODU Port No cannot appear in more than one entry All ODUs associated with the same AU must use the same frequency band An AU Port combination of AU Slot No and AU Port No cannot appear in more than one entry An Antenna Port com
182. ects of Changes in IP Interface s Parameters This section describes the actions that will be executed by the management station following any change the Source IP Address or the Next Hop Gateway of an IP interface HM Source IP Address 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity E Next Hop Gateway The actions described below are applicable also for the ASN GW Bearer Interface 1 Following a change in the Source IP Address of an IP interface the following actions will be executed automatically by the management system All relevant entries in the IP Routing table see IP Routing Tab on page 166 using the IP interface s Source IP Address as the route s Destination will be updated All relevant entries in ACL 199 see ACL Tab on page 159 using the IP interface s Source IP Address as the rule s Source IP Address will be updated 2 Following a change in the Next Hop Gateway of the External Management IP interface all relevant entries in the IP Routing table see IP Routing Tab on page 166 using the IP Next Hop Gateway as the route s Next Hop will be updated 7 5 2 1 2 Management Interface Tab for Micro Outdoor BTS BJ on 10 10 144 111 Configuring Equipment e d gt Management Wanegenert Inkerface SNMP Managers Performance External Managernerk Inter ace Source tp adress 10 10 144 111 Subnet
183. ed and Installed E General Properties E Maintenance Connectivity 7 6 1 3 2 1 1 Required and Installed The Required section enables viewing editing the required properties of the AU module that should be installed in the slot 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description Type The required AU type In a Macro Indoor BTS only AU 4x4 Modem is applicable In a Macro Outdoor BTS the applicable options are AU 4x4 Modem for a 4 channels AU and AU 2x2 Modem for a 2 channels AU In a Micro Outdoor BTS only Micro ODU is applicable The Installed section displays read only information about the actual Type of the Installed module or AU not detected 7 6 1 3 2 1 2 General Properties The following read only AU properties are displayed Parameter Description Serial Number The serial number of the AU HW Version Number The hardware version of the AU HW Revision Number The hardware revision number Boot SW Version Number The boot software version FPGA Version Number Applicable only for Micro Outdoor BTS The FPGA version number IF Version Number Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS The IF version number IF Revision Number Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS The IF revision number Operational SW Version Number The version
184. ed by the GPS Note In a Micro Outdoor BTS using a GPS receiver the Maximum Number of Satellites for Sync Loss and Minimum Number of Satellites for Sync Return parameters are not configurable and are hard coded to 1 and respectively 7 6 2 3 7 GPS Status Applicable only for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Indoor BTS using a Trimble Lassen GPS receiver 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 204 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description 1PPS The status of External 1PPS clock OK or Failed 4 Sat amp more Not applicable if a GPS receiver is not connected Indicating whether 4 the minimum required for initial synchronization or more satellites are received by the GPS receiver OK or Failed 2 Sat amp more Not applicable if a GPS receiver is not connected Indicating whether 2 the minimum number required for maintaining synchronization or more satellites are received by the GPS receiver OK or Failed GPS Com Failure Not applicable if a GPS receiver is not connected Indicating the status of communication with the GPS receiver OK or Failed Hold Over Entered Indicating whether the device has entered into Hold Over state None or Started Hold Over T O Passed Indicating whether Hold Over Timeout has passed None or Passed BS Stopped to Transmit Indicating whether the BSs are transmitting or not OK Stopped 7 6 2 3 8 So
185. ement Template Logging Page Log severity Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager Management Template The Log Severity tab enables setting the minimum severity level that generates a log entry for each of the following types of events Parameter Description Performance Performance management procedures Shelf Shelf management procedures Startup System startup procedures Fault Fault management procedures SW Version Software upgrade procedures Connectivity Connectivity procedures ASN GW ASN GW procedures Internal AU Manager Internal processes used for managing the AUs not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The available minimum severity options are E Disable no logging E Emergency E Alert E Critical E Error E Warning HM Notice E Informational The default for all event types is Disable the default in the device is Error 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual N E The Duplicate Site Manager Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager In This Chapter HM Twin Site Creation on page 99 E The Twin Site Creation Wizard on page 101 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager Twin Site Creation ES Twin Site Creation The Duplicate Site Manager provide the abil
186. ent Page IP Routing Tab The IP Routing table includes the following parameters for each static route entry Parameter Description Destination The destination host or network IP address for the route Mask The net mask for the route Next Hop The next hop IP address for the route Must be in the same subnet with one of the NPU IP interfaces The IP Routing page also includes the following buttons Button Description Add Adds a new entry to the IP Routing table allowing you to configure a new IP Route parameters Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the IP Routing table There are automatically created entries with the IP addresses of the directly connected Bearer External Management Local Management and Internal Management interfaces the IP address of the Internal Management interface is set to 10 0 0 254 This interface is not applicable for the Mini Centralized ASN GW 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity 7 5 2 5 The availability of certain interfaces depend on the connectivity mode For these entries the Mask is 255 255 255 0 and the Next Hop address is 0 0 0 0 any These entries cannot be modified or deleted by the user They will be updated automatically following any change in the relevant IP Source Address of the IP interface Routes will be created
187. er 9 Tasks Restore Configuration Task Parameter Description Task Name The name of the task A string of 1 to 128 characters The default name includes the task s type and the date and time at which the task was created Type The type of file to be used by the task E Site Configuration A backup Configuration file HM Duplicate Site A Duplicate Site configuration file E Vendor Configuration A vendor configuration file Name For a new Restore Task click on the Browser button to open the applicable Selector window according to the selected Type above and select the file to be used by the task Creation Date The read only creation date of the selected file Source Equipment Applicable only for Site Configuration Restore task The details of the source equipment of the selected backup configuration file Auto Reset Click to automatically reset the target equipment after successful completion of the Restore task The Target Equipment table includes the following details for each device participating in the task Parameter Description Region The location associated with the selected equipment in the database of the management system BTS Number The number of the device Site ID as configured in the device BTS Name The name of the device as configured in the device NE Type The device type IP Address The IP address of the device For Site Configuration and Duplicate
188. er Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Using the Device Manager 7 1 2 The Device Manager Components W EDI on 10 10 141 156 Configuring Equipment Title Bar e lo 7 Site _ Page Name oe B Connectivity i tee awa Sr Tab Selection es Input Alarm QI Ste Sector Input Number Name Send Alam Blocking 1 External Equipment Close no R External Equipment Close no 3 External Equipment Close no 4 External Equipment Close no 5 External Equipment Close no a 6 External Equipment Close no Navigation EE 2 Pane Output Alarm f Output Number Name T Sate 1 off 2 off B off Selected Page So lt Control Buttons _ L egl L coe lt status Progress Bar mo Figure 7 1 The Device Manager Components Indoor BTS The Device Manager window comprises the following components Component Description Title Bar Identifies the managed device s name It also includes standard icons for minimizing maximizing or closing the Device Manager Page Name The name of the current page Navigation Pane Displays all configuration information pages and enables opening a selected page by clicking on it Tab Selection Enables selection among tabs in pages with two or more tabs Selected Page The selected page Enables viewing managing the applicable parameters Status Bar Indicates the status of the current operation and displays a progr
189. er from 1 up to a maximum of 10 generated automatically during filter addition Profile Name The unique per BTS name of the profile HTTP Redirect URL The HTTP redirect URL to be used by filter rules with HTTP Redirect action or null Enable Profile The status of the hot lining profile Disable Enable The following buttons are available below the table Button Description Add Adds a new entry to the table allowing to configure the parameters of the new profile in the profile Editor section Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table Select an entry to open the Profile Editor and the Filter Rules table for the selected Profile 7 7 5 3 Profile Editor The Profile Editor includes the following parameters for the selected profile Parameter Description Profile Number The index number of the hot lining profile An auto sequential number from 1 up to a maximum of 10 generated automatically during filter addition Profile Name The unique per BTS name of the profile A string of 1 30 characters The name of an existing profile cannot be modified HTTP Redirect URL The HTTP redirect URL to be used by filter rules with HTTP Redirect action This is the Redirection location to be used in Http Redirection message Must be configured URL in ASCII string format if in any of the filter rules associated with the profile the configured action i
190. er is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Default Gateway IP Address Applicable only in Server mode IP address of Default Gateway to be provided by local DHCP Server with IP address In the Proxy mode this value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Click Next to open the next screen This is an empty screen with Cancel Back and Finish buttons Click Finish to finish the wizard The newly created Duplicate Site configuration file is now available in the File Manager The first screen of the wizard is displayed allowing creation of another Duplicate Site configuration file 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual chapter D The Offline Configuration Tool Chapter 6 The Offline Configuration Tool In This Chapter E Introduction on page 117 E Golden site Configuration Backup File on page 117 E Excel File on page 118 E Using the Offline Configuration Tool on page 120 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 The Offline Configuration Tool Introduction 6 1 x 6 2 Introduction NOTE The Offline Configuration Tool is a licensed feature Operators are faced with the need for quick and efficient deployment of a large number of new sites once the operation goes into its commercial phase As many of the installations in the same coverage area share m
191. er le 206 PENAL IF AG EE 207 AAA IPO Scoot ate eee eee eee 212 Service Group Page Service Interfaces Tab 215 Service Group Page Service Groups Tab 218 QoS E le Ne E 226 SFA Page PHS Rules Tab x gecccaas ceesoctadeus dacs acieenestiinenncascss acess eceunseneontadassecten taaundd 228 SFA Page Classification Rules Tab 230 New Service Profile WINDOW wicca sccteexenseavetetianaiedesoctstacnsndeionnd piseecedarorateareveenideulaer 234 Service Profile PAS E 235 Hot Lining Pag orca sate hos te raged accented eee teen gettin ad cc goa ees 240 Device Driver User Manual Figures Figure 7 40 Figure 7 41 Figure 7 42 Figure 7 43 Figure 7 44 Figure 7 45 Figure 7 46 Figure 7 47 Figure 7 48 Figure 7 49 Figure 7 50 Figure 7 51 Figure 7 52 Figure 7 53 Figure 7 54 Figure 7 55 Figure 7 56 Figure 8 1 Figure 9 1 Figure 9 2 Figure 9 3 Figure 9 4 Figure 9 5 Figure 9 6 Figure 9 7 Figure 9 8 Figure 9 9 Figure 9 10 Figure 9 11 Figure 9 12 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW NOW BS EE 244 Copy Existing BS Window EE 245 Radio Basic Page General Tab E 248 Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure General Tab 250 Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab 252 Radio Basic Page Mobility Tab cates aii 259 Neighboring Task Operation Add Neigbbort 263 Radio Advanced Page Feedback Tab cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesneneeneneeees 264 Radio Advanced Page Power Contro
192. eregistered The range is from 1 to 120 The default is 5 seconds Management Server Server Host Name The server host name This parameter is sent in dhcp offer dhcp ack messages and may be used by certain CPEs A string of up to 64 characters The default is null Client Boot File Name The client boot file name This parameter is sent in dhcp offer dhcp ack messages and may be used by certain CPEs A string of up to 128 characters The default is null Vendor Class Identifier The option 60 string Up to 30 characters An empty string null means that DHCP Option 60 is disabled The default is null Vendor Specific Information Name Option 43 Name string Up to 64 characters The default is InternetGatewayDevice ManagementServer URL Vendor Specific Information Value Option 43 Value string Up to 64 characters The default is null The DHCP Function Editor for Relay mode includes the following parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description External DHCP Server IP The IP address of the external DHCP server The default is 0 0 0 0 Must be Address configured to a valid IP address Enable Relay Agent Mark to enable Relay Agent Information Option 82 All following parameters are Information applicable only if Relay Agent Information is enabled The default is Disable
193. erface for modifying IP Interface parameters Added warning reset required after changing Bearer Interface IP Address August 2009 ACL Page Updated with details on automatically created ACLs August 2009 Management Page Performance Tab Collection of Counters Groups that are not fully supported by the device cannot be enabled Removed Performance Collection Interval August 2009 Management Page Logging Tab Updated description of Server IP August 2009 NPU Page Added Reset To Factory With Connectivity option August 2009 Power Supply Page Updated options for PIU HW Version 58Amp 35Amp Applicable only for Indoor BTS August 2009 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued New AU Window Creating a New AU Updated options for AU Type only AU 4x4 Modem is applicable Removed Ports and Bandwidth parameters August 2009 AL Slot Page Card Properties Tab Updated Required and Installed sections E Updated options for AU Type only AU 4x4 Modem is applicable BW Removed Ports and Bandwidth parameters Added Maintenance Connectivity parameters August 2009 New ODU window ODU number is 1 28 for Indoor BTS and 1 24 for Outdoor BTS August 2009 ODU Page Removed Heater Existence Removed Enable Tx August 2009 GPS Page
194. ernal devices connected to the BTS In the current release the applicable devices are GPS and if defined Power Feeder s Power Feeders are not applicable for a Macro Outdoor BTS The GPS indication includes the status of the signal received from the GPS equipment If GPS is not configured the GPS status indication is marked gray Double click on the GPS status indication to open the GPS configuration page refer to GPS Page on page 200 The status indication of a defined Power Feeder PF is always green Double click on the Power Feeder status indication to open the Power Feeder configuration page refer to Power Feeder Page on page 205 Equipment View Page for Mini Centralized ASN GW The Equipment View page provides a graphical view of the current status of the Mini Centralized ASN GW The display is refreshed every 15 seconds 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment View Page Site H if af H e 5 DATA been ze E ef Dore Figure 7 4 Equipment View Page Mini Centralized ASN GW The Mini Centralized ASN GW view shows the Mini Centralized ASN GW device The color marking on the left side is according to the highest severity open alarm Green indicates that there are no alarms on the device Double click on the device s drawing to open the NPU page refer to NPU Page on page 183 4
195. ers applicable to the counters group selected in the counters groups selection section Use the Expand Collapse check boxes to view hide all counters available in the group To the right of each counter the following details are available E The color of the graph for this counter available only for a selected counter E The current graph s value of the counter E The scale value for the graph see details below gt To view the graph of a counter Select the check box to the left of a counter to add its graph to the graph section and view its details The color to be used in the graph for the selected counters is displayed to the right of the counter gt To change the color of a counter s graph Click on the color display on the right side of the selected counter The Pick a Color window opens allowing you to change the color s properties Deselect the check box to terminate the on line display of the counter Select again to continue the display x NOTE You can also select deselect all the counters in a group using the check box next to the group s or device s name 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 287 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 The Performance Monitoring Viewer The Graph and Graph Controls Section gt To optimize the value vertical axis of a counter The values scale vertical axis is fixed between 100 to 100 or between O to 100 for a Positive Only graph Some counters may h
196. ess interface of the applicable VLAN service Table 7 3 Rules of Default VLAN Service Interfaces ACL 187 196 Rule Action SourceIP Source Destination IP Destination Protocol Address Port Address Port Allow Any Any DHCP Own IP Address Any ICMP 1 defined for the applicable Service Group Allow Any Any DHCP Own IP Address 67 68 used UDP 17 defined for the for DHCP applicable Service traffic Group 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device IMPORTANT modified Connectivity The default pre configured and automatically created ACLs cannot be deleted and should not be Management Management Interface QoS Marking Rides ACL IP Routing t Managers Performance Logging ACL Parameters Rule Number Rule Acton 1 Blow Rule Parameters Source IP Address 0 0 0 0 Source IP Mask 255 255 255 255 Mrami Source Peet Hamm Source Port Destination PAddess 00 0 0 Oeaiution IP Mask 255 255 255 255 breng Destination Port c Maximum Destination Port Protocol 3 Bude Action alow EI Classfier ID v E GE ch patent v m Dos Figure 7 12 Management Page ACL Tab The ACL tab includes the following sections E ACL Table E ACL Parameters Section 7 5 2 3 1 ACL Table The ACL table includes the following parameters for each ACL Parameter Descri
197. ess bar when applicable 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Using the Device Manager Pals Common Control Buttons The following buttons are common to most configuration information pages Button Description Z 0 Help Opens the Help Navigator and Help Topic Window for the page e Refresh from Device Updates the information displayed in the page according to current values acquired from the device Refresh Updates the information displayed in the page according to current values acquired from the database Apply Implements the modifications to the configuration of the device Exiting the Device Manager or switching to another page without applying discards the changes This button is not available in information pages that display read only details and do not include any configurable parameters 7 1 4 Working with Configuration Tables In some pages tables are used for displaying information and for configuring and managing multiple entities of the same type Grayed out cells are read only To modify the configuration of an existing entity Double click on the applicable cell In a text cell edit the content In some cells a drop down menu will open enabling selection of the required option Click on any other cell to apply the change to the selected cell At this stage the change is applied only to the display and t
198. etries set by Number of Retransmissions has been reached The range is from 5000 to 10000 milliseconds 0 1 to 10 second The default is 5000 In addition the Keep Alive Status table not applicable for Micro Outdoor BTS displays the current values of the Polling Period Number of Retransmissions and Retransmission Timeout for each of the relevant entities 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment 7 6 Equipment The Equipment node includes two sub nodes E Shelf E External 7 6 1 Shelf The Shelf sub node enables access to the following pages M Power Supply Page applicable only for Macro Indoor BTS E NPU Page not applicable for Micro Outdoor BTS E AU Node not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW with AU lt Type and Slot gt Page for each of the existing created AU entities 7 6 1 1 Power Supply Page The Power Supply page is applicable only for Macro Indoor BTS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment The Power Supply page enables viewing defining the properties of required PIU and PSU cards and viewing the properties of installed cards ont Power Supply PIU Card Properties eg Number Regard i Invstalied Operational Required HW Ver Inwalind HW Ver 1 Yes Not retaled Inactive Siam
199. evice Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS The General tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description Name The name of the BS An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 32 printable characters BS Identification Operator ID Read only The unique operator identifier The same Operator ID must be used by all BSs throughout the radio access network BS ID LSB Read only The unique ID of the BS This ID must be unique within the radio access network Radio Parameters Bandwidth The BS channel bandwidth 5 MHz 7 MHz 10MHz The default is 5 MHz A bandwidth of 7 MHz is not applicable for ODUs in the 2 x GHz band Center frequency The center of the frequency band in which the BS will transmit in MHz The available values in accordance with the bands supported by different ODUs are HM 2022 5 to 2217 5 in steps of 0 125 HM 2302 5 to 2397 5 in steps of 0 125 HM 2487 5 to 2687 5 in steps of 0 125 HM 3302 5 to 3397 5 in steps of 0 125 E 3402 5 to 3797 5 in steps of 0 125 See also note below regarding dependency on configured Bandwidth Idle Mode Enable Use the check box to enable disable the idle mode feature Note The same idle mode status must be applied for the entire network The default is Disable Paging Group ID The Paging Group ID of the BS Applicable only if Idle Mode is enabled The range is from 0 to 65535 Must be set to a value other th
200. excluding ACL 199 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity E Allow Indicates that traffic matching the filter criteria is allowed to reach the ASN GW and or AUs E Drop Indicates that traffic matching the filter criteria is dropped and not allowed to reach the ASN GW and or AUs You can configure multiple rules for each ACL the priority for these rules is applied with respect to the sequence in which these rules are configured By default in BTS equipment traffic towards the AUs is not restricted This is implemented through the pre configured ACL 1 which is available by default ACL 1 is attached to All AU with Rule Action Allow Source IP Address Any and Destination IP Address Any Several additional default ACLs are created automatically to allow some restricted traffic towards the NPU These ACL rules are applied automatically at the time of NPU startup or upon a change of IP address of various interfaces These ACLs cannot be deleted or modified The automatically created ACLs are Standard ACLs 96 97 98 and Extended ACL 186 IMPORTANT displayed by the management system Although they are always supported the automatically created ACLs 96 97 98 and 186 are not All the following automatically created standard default ACLs are attached to the NPU virtual interface and include a single Permit rule Table 7 1 Default Stan
201. f each port by disabling transmission receive only mode The available options for each of the available ports 1 4 in Macro Indoor BTS and a 4 Channels AU in Macro Outdoor BTS 1 2 in Micro Outdoor BTS and a 2 Channels AU in Macro Outdoor BTS are Shutdown Rx Only or No Shutdown normal operation The default is No Shutdown External The Equipment node includes the following pages E ODU Node applicable only for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS with ODU lt gt Page for each of the existing created ODU entities E Radio Node applicable only for a Micro Outdoor BTS with Radio page for the two radios of the BTS E GPS Page E Power Feeder Page Applicable only for Macro Indoor BTS E Antenna Page Applicable for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Indoor BTS ODU Applicable only for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS From the navigation tree for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS you can create new ODU entities or delete an existing ODU entity see Creating Deleting an ODU below 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment The ODU node includes an ODU lt gt Page for each created ODU 7 6 2 1 1 Creating Deleting an ODU ODU object creation deletion is applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS In a Micro Outdoor BTS two Radio objects are created automatically and cannot be deleted gt To create a new ODU
202. face All other parameters set to ANY B All other parameters including interface type are set to ANY Than Rule A will apply to all BE traffic transmitted on the internal R6 interface Rule B will apply to all other BE traffic meaning traffic transmitted on the external R3 interface 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW QoS Marking Boorer Pore QoS Aides Ride Number Rule Status Merhing Rule Enable i int detak Qos Rude Parameters Marking Rade Name Ho Cone Frable eat detmi e EE E x Corton Rase Appiied on Interface Ia bel Service Flow Date Celvery Type ANY v Service Flow Trattic Priority w Service Flow Madia Flow Type EE a Action SRS a 802 1p Printity Marking lo 1 Betren e dewy KH Figure 7 34 QoS Marking Page The QoS Marking page comprises two sections the Bearer Plane QoS Rules table and the QoS Rule Parameters Editor The Bearer Plane QoS Rules table includes the following read only parameters for each existing rule Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the rule An auto sequential number from 1 to a maximum of 20 Rule Status The status of the rule Enable or Disable Marking Rule Name The name of the QoS marking rule Select an entry to open the QoS Rule Parameters Editor for the selected rule The following butt
203. fault is Enable Condition Type Service Flow Data Delivery The Service Flow Type for data delivery services uGS rTVR nRTVR BE eRTVR or ANY The default is ANY Service Flow Traffic Priority The priority of Service Flow traffic 0 7 or ANY The default is ANY Flow Type Enable Service Flow Media Indicates whether the condition for Service Flow Media Flow Type is enabled or disabled If enabled the Service Flow Media Flow Type will be considered when looking for a match The default is Disable 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Service Flow Media Flow Type The Service Flow Media Flow Type as defined in ASN GW or AAA server Action Outer DSCP Marking The DSCP value to be used for marking the outer IP header IP GRE The range is 0 63 The default is 0 802 1p Priority Marking The 802 1p priority to be used for marking traffic The range is 0 7 The default is 0 7 8 3 3 2 Intra ASN Traffic QoS Rules The Intra ASN Traffic QoS Rules section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Diffserv Code Point DSCP priority value to be used for marking of intra ASN R8 R6 traffic The range is 0 63 The default is 0 802 1p Priority 802 1p priority value to be used for marking of intra ASN R8 R6 traffic The rang
204. fault is IPv4CS The Convergence Sublayer Type of an existing service flow cannot be changed Media Flow Type The type of media carried by the service flow An optional string of up to 3215 characters The default is null Reference Service Group The Name of an existing service group to be used by the service flow VPWS Service Groups are applicable only for VLAN CS Service Flows of the Default Service Profile Reference Service Interface The Name for an existing QinQ service interface Applicable only if the assigned Service Group is of type VPWS QinQ in a VLANCS Service Flow of the Default Service Profile Uplink Downlink Data Delivery Type The data delivery type for uplink downlink traffic carried by the service flow The available options are UGS RTVR NRTVR BE ERTVR and ANY The default is BE Max Sustained Traffic Rate Kbps The maximum sustained traffic rate in Kops for uplink downlink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 10 40000 The default is 250 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink downlink data delivery type NRTVR RTVR BE ERTVR ANY Traffic Priority The traffic priority to be applied to the uplink downlink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 0 7 Not applicable for UGS data delivery type The default is 0 Min Reserved Traffic Rate Kbps The minimum reserved traffic rate in Kops for uplink downlink traffic
205. from 0 to 69 The default is 0 Uplink Data Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the uplink data zone The valid range is from 0 to 69 The default is 0 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW GE Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template Parameter Description Minimum Size The initial size in symbols of the first zone When reuse 3 is used within first zone this parameter should be equal across all BSs within deployment The available options are 2 4 34 2xN where N 1 17 or No Limitation The default is No Limitation For more details refer to First Zone Minimum Size Recommended Value Range on page 258 In the current release this is the actual size of the first zone For reuse 1 the default no limitation can be used the actual size will be set dynamically according to the configuration For reuse 3 a specific value must be configured Maximum Size Maximum size in symbols for first zone Used mainly for performance control capability within frame The available options are 2 4 34 2xN where N 1 17 or No Limitation The default is No Limitation Maximum Size cannot be lower than Minimum Size In the current release the value of this parameter is ignored First Zone size is defined only by Minimum Size parameter Maximum Map Size Limits the maximum size of maps in slots The available options are 10 20 300 1
206. ftware Versions Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Navigation Processor SW Version Read only The software version of the navigation processor of the GPS receiver if used Signal Processor SW Version Read only The software version of the signal processor of the GPS receiver if used 7 6 2 3 9 SNTP Primary Secondary Server Applicable only for Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the Primary Secondary SNTP Server Operational Status Read only The operational status of the Primary Secondary SNTP Server Enable Disable according to the keep alive response 7 6 2 4 Power Feeder Page Applicable only for Macro Indoor BTS The high power PIU can support a maximum current of 58 A 40 5 VDC In certain installations with a relatively high number of ODUs this current may not be sufficient to power the shelf and all the ODUs In such installations the ODU Power Feeder is used as an additional power source providing power 48 VDC to 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment ODUs It transfers transparently all signals between the AU and the ODU while injecting DC power received from an external source Each ODU Power Feeder unit can serve up to four ODUs H gt Power Feeder Unit Number Port Number I AU S
207. fully updated This task complements the one time Neighboring tasks initiated from a single source BS see Neighbor List on page 261 gt To open the Mass Neighboring Task Editor In the Task Manager window do one of the following E To open a new task use the Task Wizard and select the Neighboring Task option E To open an existing task select an existing Mass Neighboring task from the list right click and select the Edit option or double click on the selected task If the task is Active the Runtime result screen is displayed displaying the status of the running task If the task is Inactive the Mass Neighboring Task Editor for the selected task is displayed 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Mass Neighboring Task Mass Neighboring Task Name Task Description Select All neighboring 1 LI Selected BSs BS Neighbor ID BTS Number BTS Name Remove JADE F kal D secon igure 9 10 Mass Neighboring Task Editor The Mass Monitoring Task editor comprises the following fields Parameter Description Task Name The name of the task A string of 1 to 128 characters Task Description An optional free text field providing a general description of the task A string of 0 to 128 characters Select All Select to include all BSs in the Neighboring BSs list in the t
208. ger refer to the relevant section in the Management System Manual that covers all details and features common to all product types This Chapter covers some features of the Equipment Manager for the specific product type that may not be applicable for all product types 1 When selecting the applicable device family in the View option the display includes for each BTS the BTS Number This is the BTS Number parameter configured in the device Applicable only for devices with Operational State of Enabled or devices that were reached previously For details on the BTS Number parameter refer to Site General Tab on page 140 Properties section 2 The available management options right click includes the following options that may not be available for other product types Option Description Performance Opens the Performance Monitoring Viewer for the selected device Not available if two or more devices are selected or if the Operational State of the selected device is other than Enabled For more details refer to The Performance Monitoring Viewer on page 283 Multiple Configuration Opens the template based Multiple Configuration Task allowing simultaneous configuration of several devices The selected devices are automatically included in the Equipment tab of the Multiple Config task Refer to Multiple Configuration Template Based Task on page 316 Backup Configuration Opens a Conf
209. gure 7 20 Figure 7 21 Figure 7 22 Figure 7 23 Figure 7 24 Figure 7 25 Figure 7 26 Figure 7 27 Figure 7 28 Figure 7 29 Figure 7 30 Figure 7 31 Figure 7 32 Figure 7 33 Figure 7 34 Figure 7 35 Figure 7 36 Figure 7 37 Figure 7 38 Figure 7 39 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Management Page Management Interface Tab Micro BI 156 Management Page QoS Marking Rules Tab 157 Management Page ACL Tab iii sincsccsiesienenvsanbeedaonthutedsacieiansaneinuea orenelexsaninnluraee 163 Management Page IP Routing Tab uvskekeEENEEkSENEEEREEEESEENEEREEENNEEKESNESESSEEEEEEK EENG 167 Management Page SNMP Managers Tab 169 Management Page Performance Tab ccccssseeeencceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneneesesneeeeees 172 Management Page Logging TaD sccciseccrsexcossticiecnctssannnenntreeneidactsadeeiexmmemetees 174 ASN GW Bearer Interface Page 176 ASN GW Pools PAGG ccadsy ccceccctt canasteneantasccedeass isesvaunncaankdsskecdeus ceeuiveadineageds teenies 178 Keep Alive Page Macro Indoor Outdoor BI 179 Power Supply Page sscccerssser Sauadaseca eassunanrscannueenie a a herein 182 EIS 184 WER Kee 187 AU lt Type and Slot gt Page Card Properties Tab Macro BIO 189 AU Slot Page Control Tab ee meee eerie ee eee ge eee ene ee ee eee reenen 191 E CHE WEE 193 SI eee lo E 194 PNP APS a cae dasha earan naien e iraia sain ececeusesnuddecstetedsunauwvaceuaaemtes 197 GPS Page Macro Indoor BI 200 Power Feed
210. hat meets the rule s parameters A classifier ID cannot be associated with more than one rule Refer to QoS Marking Rules Tab on page 157 for details on configuring marking classifiers and marking actions 7 5 2 4 For each Standard ACL a specific combination of all applicable parameters Source IP Address Source IP Mask Destination IP Address Destination IP Mask cannot be defined in more than one rule For each Extended ACL a specific combination of all applicable parameters Source IP Address Source IP Mask Destination IP Address Destination IP Mask Minimum Source Port maximum Source Port Minimum Destination Port Maximum Destination Port Protocol cannot be defined in more than one rule IP Routing Tab The IP Routing tab is not applicable for Micro Outdoor BTSs The IP Routing tab enables viewing modifying entries in the IP Routing table It also enables adding deleting static IP routes 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity i Management Management Interface QoS Marhng Rides ACL IP Routing SNMP Managers Performance Loggng Al P Raking Destination Mosk Net Hop 10002A 10 10 120 0 10 10 129 62 10 10 144 35 172 10 202 240 33 33 33 33 6 0 0 0 255 258 2550 0 0 00 299 295 295 0 10 10 129 254 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 10 144 254 Ce E SE 1 Bxtrash o An Cone Figure 7 13 Managem
211. he BS node enables the configuration of various properties related to radio transmissions connectivity and services of each BS The BS node includes the following subnode and page for each existing BS E Radio Radio Basic Page Radio Advanced Page E R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page IMPORTANT Many BS parameters are applied only after resting the AU This is indicated by a pop up message If applicable do not forget to reset the AU after completing all modifications refer to AU Control Tab on page 191 Some BS parameters should be advertised to all neighbors If a pop up message indicating the need for updating neighbors appeared during modification of parameters do not forget to update all neighbors after completing all modifications refer to Neighbor List on page 261 In addition from the navigation tree you can create new BS entities or delete an existing BS entity see Creating Copying Deleting a BS below Note that you can create and delete also the single BS of the Micro Outdoor BTS required for defining changing the BS ID Creating Copying Deleting a BS To create a new BS 1 Right click the BS node in the navigation tree and select Create to open the New BS window 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS BS Mandatory Parameters BS ID LSB Operator ID 255 243 41
212. he binary value of the 12 the most significant bits in R6 TLV will be copied and pasted as the 12 least significant bits in R3 TLV E LSB The whole 16 bit value of the relevant TLV will be transferred without any change when transferring classifier VID value from R3 side to R6 side and from R6 to R3 The default is MSB Shift 4 4 2 Service Group Page The Service Group page comprises the following tabs 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW amp Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template HM Service Interfaces Tab E Service Groups Tab 4 4 2 1 Service Interfaces Tab pad X H Revert d Servien interface Nama ia Service interface Name RB Deseietion tJ Tyre zi O ere Destination fr Enable Oe kaum H O Service WAND a LI Default Gateway IP Address O za ret mek Figure 4 7 The ASN GW Template Service Group Page Service Interfaces Tab Create Mode The Service Interfaces table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Service Interface Name The name alias of the service interface The Service Interfaces Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Service Interface Name The name alias of the service interface A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Mandatory f
213. he contents of the window will change according to the selected type The following sections describe the functionality of the following file managers according to the selected type E Equipment File Manager on page 324 E Duplicate Site File Manager on page 327 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 The File Manager 10 2 Equipment File Manager Equipment File Manager The Equipment File Manager enables viewing details of different files that were retrieved from managed devices and are available in the database of the management system It also enables initiating the Restore Configuration Task see Restore Configuration Task on page 300 exporting files to the client file system and importing files stored in the client file system Files are added to the database by either importing them see details below or by retrieving them from the managed devices using an applicable task Performance Collection or Backup Configuration EE eX System Managed Network Faulk Managemerk Configuration Managemerk Service Provisioning Administration Seuurky Management Helo d e Fee Dh i taune geen x D aisen x LA riemenscer x E temolste mansaer x er El me kl Drea LS Reyon DOE ETS Nave TE Type ES SW Versini Fie hae Fie Type San 233 44 Man BTS 10 10 144 35 2 5 2121 3 200908222055 x sH bg Crt Cfg 2009 08 27 13 02 Normal N E Results on pager 1 PayeSue 100
214. he default is Bearer Accounting UDP Port Read only The port used for accounting messages 1813 Authentication UDP Port Read only The port used for authentication messages 1813 The AAA Client parameters are Parameter Description Current Server A read only display of the current active server being used primary or Secondary Primary AAA Name The name of the AAA Server In the current release supporting a single client this is a read only parameter default Primary Server IP Address The IPv4 address of the primary AAA server Cannot be the same as the Secondary Server IP Address or any of the NPU IP interfaces The default is 172 16 0 10 Enable Redundancy Indicates whether AAA server redundancy is supported If enabled the ASN GW will try switching to the secondary server if the primary server does not respond and vide versa The default is Disable Note Redundancy cannot be disabled if the Current Server is the Secondary Server If Redundancy is enabled and the Current Server is the Secondary Server use the Switch Over option to switch to the Primary Server before disabling redundancy If Redundancy is enabled the IP Address of the Active server Primary or Secondary cannot be modified 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Secondary Ser
215. he default is Not Set For ASCII Agent Remote ID enter the ID string in the Binary ASCII Agent Remote ID text box up to 32 characters For Binary Free String enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces in the Binary ASCII Agent Remote ID text box Agent Subscriber ID and Binary ASCII Agent Subscriber ID Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information and Radius Attributes are enabled Sub option 6 of option 82 The available options are Not Set disable Default MS ID BS ID NAS ID NAS IP ASCII Agent Subscriber ID Binary Free String Full NAI Domain The default is Not Set For ASCII Agent Subscriber ID enter the ID string in the Binary ASCII Agent Subscriber ID text box up to 32 characters For Binary Free String enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces in the Binary ASCII Agent Subscriber ID text box Client Boot File Name Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Proxy mode The client boot file name This parameter is sent in dhcp offer dhcp ack messages and may be used by certain CPEs A string of up to 128 characters The default is null 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template x NOTE A Service Group cannot be deleted if it is assigned to a Service Flow A Service Group with an associated VLAN Service Interface cannot be deleted if the Service VLAN
216. he displayed parameters of the modified entry are colored blue The change is applied to the device only after clicking on the Apply button To add a new entity if applicable Click on the Add button A new row will be added Some parameters may be set to their default values allowing if applicable modification to other values Configure the required parameters At this stage the change is applied only to the display 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Using the Device Manager and the displayed parameters of the new entry are colored green The change is applied to the device only after clicking on the Apply button gt To delete one or several entities if applicable Select the entities you want to delete and click on the Delete button At this stage the change is applied only to the display and the displayed parameters of the entries to be deleted are colored red The change is applied to the device only after clicking on the Apply button 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW D Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Introduction to Device Management toe Introduction to Device Management The tree menu in the navigation pane of the Device Manager window enables selecting the following view and configuration pages E Equipment View Page on page 134 E Site Page on page 140 E Connectivity L1 L2
217. he following buttons Button Description Add Classifier Adds a new entry to the QoS Marking Classifiers table Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the QoS Marking Classifiers table A Classifier ID referenced in an ACL Rule see ACL Parameters Section on page 164 cannot be deleted By default Classifier IDs 1 8 are pre configured associated with Action IDs 1 8 respectively For more details on the default use of these classifiers refer to ACL Tab on page 159 Refer to Effects of Changes in IP Interface s Parameters on page 155 for details on the effect of changes in the DSCP and or 802 1P Priority of one of the NPU IP interfaces on the QoS marking rules 7 5 2 3 ACL Tab The ACL tab is not applicable for Micro Outdoor BTSs The ACL tab enables managing Access Control Lists ACLs ACLs are applied on traffic received from the DATA MGMT or CSCD ports and destined towards the NPU and not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW the AUs By default all traffic destined towards the AUs or ASN GW is denied You can configure ACLs for allowing or dropping traffic destined towards the ASN GW and or All AUs that meets certain criteria You can create the following types of ACLs E Standard ACL 1 99 Allows you to filter traffic based on the source and destination IP addresses E Extended ACL 100 198 Allows you to filter traffic based on the source and destination IP addresses source a
218. he user has to enter a new value have a yellow background E Non mandatory fields into which the user does not have to enter a new value have a white background The user may leave them as are with the default value which is an empty string in some of the cases After completing configuration of parameters in each step click Next to move to the next screen In case of consistency check failure the failed field s are marked with a red surrounding rectangle A consistency failure messages is presented on the upper side of the screen using scrolling if necessary in case of many such failures You may at any time use the Back button to go back to previous screens In the last screen click Finish to end the Duplicate Site configuration file creation You can view the available Duplicate Site configuration files in the File Manager see Duplicate Site File Manager on page 327 From the File Manager you can also initiate the operation of loading a Duplicate Site configuration file to its target site Starting the Twin Site Creation Wizard To start the Twin Site Creation Wizard 1 Select Configuration Management gt Duplicate Site from the Navigation Pane or menu bar The Duplicate Site Manager window opens 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard System Managed Network Fault Management Configuration Management Service Prov
219. heck on lt BS ID 2 gt of lt BTS IP gt lt BTS Name gt This means that BS ID2 in the device identified by BTS IP and BTS Name is defined as a neighbor of BS ID 1 If BS ID 1 is defined in the data base as a neighbor of BS ID 2 the result for this line will be Completed Otherwise there is inconsistency and the result will be Failed The partial report showing only inconsistent neighbor associations will include only device for which the result is Completed with errors if any and the Failed results in these devices For proper operation of the network there should not be any inconsistencies in definitions of neighbor associations 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual chapter D The File Manager Chapter 10 The File Manager In This Chapter E The File Manager on page 323 E Equipment File Manager on page 324 HM Duplicate Site File Manager on page 327 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW es Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 The File Manager The File Manager 10 1 The File Manager The File Manager enables viewing details and managing different types of files stored in the database of the management system gt To open the File Manager 1 Select Administration gt File Manager from the Navigation Pane or menu bar The File Manager window opens 2 In the View field use the drop down menu to select the type of file you want to manage T
220. hecked 7 6 2 2 2 Port The Port section includes parameters for the Radio module Parameter Description Tx Power dBm The required Tx power at the Radio Port in dBm The actually available range depends on BTS Type The upper limit which is the default is set by the Maximum Tx Power supported by the BTS The control range is 10dBm 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description HW version Read only The hardware version of the Radio card Applicable only for an installed and associated Radio HW revision Read only The hardware revision of the Radio card Applicable only for an installed and associated ODU HPA Card Read only Indicates whether the port is connected to an HPA card installed not installed HPA HW Version Read only The hardware version of the HPA Applicable only if an HPA card exists in an installed and associated Radio HC08 SW Version Read only The software version of the HCO8 controlling card Applicable only for an installed and associated Radio CPLD SW Version Read only The software version of the CPLD controlling card Applicable only for an installed and associated Radio Serial Number Read only The serial number of the Radio card Applicable only for an installed and associated Radio ODU Status Read only A decimal number representi
221. i Centralized ASN GW D Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 The Offline Configuration Tool Using the Offline Configuration Tool 6 4 4 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Merge File SES Offline Configuration Tool Generate One Configuration Files for Macro BT S wan SYV Version NPU 30M The folowing Sie wil be generated 1 Import Backup File 2 Import Unique Pararveters E Seite ze Ech 10 10 141 222 Re pp 10 10 141 194 Figure 6 8 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Merge File A table displaying the main identification parameters of the new sites Site ID Site Name and NE External Management IP Address will be displayed Click Next to generate the configuration files for the listed sites If there are any consistency problems a Consistency Rules Issues window will open indicating the detected problems Offline Configuration Tool Generate OMine Configuration Filas for Macro BTS with Si Version NPU 30M 1 Import Backup File 2 Import Unique Parareeters Fan 3 Meroe Files Site 3536 BS Connectivity Instance 261888 Bearer Default Dei avait Gateway end Be Bearer Subnet Mask Default Gatevay and Bearer Bearer IP Default Gatevay and Bearer sarar IP Addreee should be in the tamne sul Value 1 1 9 7 arer IP Address should be in the same suber Value 255 255 255 0 IP Address should be in the same subnet Value 10 10 129 12 IP Address should be in the tame tut
222. ia Flow Type The type of media carried by the service flow An optional string of up to 15 characters Uplink Data Delivery Type The data delivery type for uplink traffic carried by the service flow The available options are UGS RTVR NRTVR BE ERTVR and ANY The default is UGS the default in the device is BE Uplink Max Sustained Traffic Rate Kbps The maximum sustained traffic rate in Kbps for uplink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 10 40000 The default is 0 the default in the device is 250 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate uplink data delivery type NRTVR RTVR BE ERTVR ANY Uplink Traffic Priority The traffic priority to be applied to the uplink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 0 7 The default is 0 Not applicable for UGS data delivery type Downlink Data Delivery Type The data delivery type for downlink traffic carried by the service flow The available options are UGS RTVR NRTVR BE ERTVR and ANY The default is UGS the default in the device is BE Downlink Max Sustained Traffic Rate Kbps The maximum sustained traffic rate in Kops for downlink traffic carried by the service flow The range is 10 40000 The default is 0 the default in the device is 250 Relevant only for service flows with the appropriate downlink data delivery type NRTVR RTVR BE ERTVR ANY Downlink Traffic Priority The traffic priority to be
223. ibutes are enabled Indicates whether Vendor Specific attribute 26 is enabled or disabled The default is Enable the default in the device is Disable Session Timeout Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information and Radius Attributes are enabled Indicates whether Session Timeout attribute 27 is enabled or disabled The default is Enable the default in the device is Disable Agent Circuit ID and Binary ASCII Agent Circuit ID Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information and Radius Attributes are enabled Sub option 1 of option 82 The available options are Not Set disable Default MS ID BS ID NAS ID NAS IP ASCII Agent Circuit ID Binary Free String Full NAl Domain ASCII MS ID ASCII BS ID ASCII BS MAC The default is Not Set For ASCII Agent Circuit ID enter the ID string in the Binary ASCII Agent Circuit ID text box up to 32 characters For Binary Free String enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces in the Binary ASCII Agent Circuit ID text box Agent Remote ID and Binary ASCII Agent Remote ID Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information and Radius Attributes are enabled Sub option 2 of option 82 The available options are Not Set disable Default MS ID BS ID NAS ID NAS IP ASCII Agent Remote ID Binary Free String Full NAIl Domain ASCII MS ID ASCII BS ID ASCII BS MAC T
224. icates whether the external 1PPS clock is enabled or disabled If the External 1PPs clock is enabled synchronization of air frames for inter site and intra site sectors should be managed by the external 1PPS GPS clock If the External 1PPS clock is disabled it indicates that the internal 1PPS at the NPU is used to synchronize air frames for inter site and intra site sectors When using a GPS External 1PPS clock must be enabled for proper operation of the system The default is Enable 7 6 2 3 3 Location Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The Location parameters are configurable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS or Micro Outdoor BTS with GPS Type set to None Otherwise they are read only displaying the values calculated by the GPS receiver The Location section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Longitude The longitude of the site The format is Ill mmm a Ill is longitude in degrees between 000 to 179 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is E east or W west The default is 000 000 E Latitude The latitude of the site The format is Il mmm a ll is latitude in degrees between 00 to 89 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is N north or S south The default is 00 000 N Altitude The altitude in meters of the site The Altitude is in meters from 300 0 to 9000 0 The default is 0 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 203 Device Driver User Manual
225. ich the amount of air resources for 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS users with continuous instantaneous rate below the threshold is being limited The more the abusing users instantaneous rate is below the threshold the more resource allocations limitation is applied Three levels of dynamic protection are available E No protection E Low protection level Protection against users with very poor channel conditions Should be used where the abusing users instantaneous rates are far below the average instantaneous rate within the sector E Medium protection Protection against users with relatively poor or very poor channel conditions Should be used where the abusing users instantaneous rates are below or far below the average instantaneous rate within sector A dynamic protection mechanism is implemented in which the mechanism of limiting resource allocations is automatically and dynamically activated when needed _after_offiine on H Advanced 0 0 2 55 55 55 Feedback Power Control Management Ges Scheduler Schect der Made Ena sel Schedler 4 Abuse Protection tevel None bel Scheduler Ut Abuse Protection Level None EA a 1 Betresh w Ann Cone Figure 7 50 Radio Advanced Page QoS Tab The QoS tab includes the following parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter
226. iew of the graph section before printing E Page Setup To open the Page Setup dialog box 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual 9 Chapter Chapter 9 Tasks In This Chapter Performance Collection Task on page 292 not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility Backup Configuration Task on page 297 Restore Configuration Task on page 300 Software Upgrade Task on page 303 4Motion File Data Aging Task on page 309 CLI Task on page 310 Mass Neighboring Task on page 313 Multiple Configuration Template Based Task on page 316 4Motion Mutual Neighboring Task on page 319 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Performance Collection Task 9 1 Performance Collection Task LOCAL CRAFT NOTE The Performance Collection Task is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility The performance data collection and storage feature in the devices see also Performance Tab on page 171 enables collection and storage of selectable groups of counters at fixed intervals of 15 minutes The device stores the performance data files collected during the last 24 hours up to 96 xml files The Performance Collection task enables the collection of stored performance data files from specific equipment Only files that do not exist in the database will be retrieved gt To open the Performance Col
227. ig if vlan mapping 11 30 d Translate management VLAN 12 to the backhaul management VLAN 31 npu config if vlan mapping 12 31 e Exit the interface configuration mode npu config if exit f To view the VLAN mapping parameters run the command npu show interface gigabitethernet 0 10 vlan mapping 4 External Management Interface To configure the necessary parameters of the External Management interface used for connectivity with the EMS system and Local CRAFT Utility run the following commands a Enable the External Management interface configuration mode npu config interface external mgmt b Configure the IP address x x x x and subnet mask y y y y npu config if ip address x x x x y Yy Y Y c Exit the interface configuration mode npu config if exit 5 Apply Changes in Site Connectivity Configuration The system must be reset to apply the changes npu reset 6 Static Route Definition 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 1 Enabling Discovery Static Route must be configured whenever the EMS server and the NPU are on different subnets Run the following command npu config ip route A AAA Y Y Y Y Z Z Z Z x x x x y y y y is the network segment of the EMS server z z z z is the next hop IP address that should be in the segment of the external management interface 7 SNMP and Trap Managers Definition To define the communities to be used by the SNMP manager run
228. iguration Backup Task for the selected device s Available only if the Operational State of all selected devices is Enabled Refer to Backup Configuration Task on page 297 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW ES Device Driver User Manual N A B The Network Maintenance Manager Chapter 3 The Network Maintenance Manager In This Chapter The Network Maintenance Manager on page 9 Retrieval of MS Data on page 10 Retrieval of All MSs Data on page 12 Single MS De Registration on page 15 All MSs De Registration on page 16 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 3 The Network Maintenance Manager The Network Maintenance Manager 3l The Network Maintenance Manager The Network Maintenance Manager supports MS Level operations related to the display of the momentary values of a predefined set of parameters of a specific Mobile Subscriber MS These parameter values can to be evaluated during operator initiated troubleshooting In addition this feature enables forced de registration of one or multiple MSs from the network In the current release MS level operations supported by the management system are targeted towards the ASN GW gt To open the Network Maintenance Manager 1 Select Managed Network gt Network Maintenance from the Navigation Pane or menu bar The Network Maintenance Manager window opens 2 Inthe Operation drop
229. ils of DL packets in all NRT VR services which when exceeded triggers an NRT VR service alarm The range is from 1 to 1000 promil The default is 1 in the device the default is 1000 UGS The threshold for excessive DL dropped packets ratio in promils of DL packets in all UGS services which when exceeded triggers a UGS service alarm The range is from 1 to 1000 promil The default is 1 in the device the default is 1000 ERT VR The threshold for excessive DL dropped packets ratio in promils of DL packets in all ERT VR services which when exceeded triggers an ERT VR service alarm The range is from 1 to 1000 promil The default is 1 in the device the default is 1000 4 5 2 6 QoS Tab Ranging L Feedback Alocatia Pore Corkrol Beam Forming Manapesmect QoS Mode in Update Fiters By clicking on a selected property nama you can add to this fiker LI Scheier Mode Di O Scheduler Ot Abuse Protection Level x LU Siekier UL Abuse Protection Level v Figure 4 35 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page QoS Tab The QoS parameters are 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template Parameter Description Scheduler Mode The basis for allocating excess bandwidth among relevant users E Equal Rate Throughput Fairness E Equal Time Resource Fairness The selected mode
230. ing A logging file E performance A performance collection file Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility Date The date and time at which the file was added to the database of the management system using the real time clock of the client Status The status of the file Normal Orphan a backup file for a device that was removed from the database Imported for an imported file Select one or several entries and right click to view the following file management options 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 The File Manager Equipment File Manager Parameter Description Restore Applicable only if one configuration file current or older is selected Opens the Restore Task Editor for the selected configuration backup file enabling to restore the configuration See Restore Configuration Task on page 300 The Restore Task Editor can also be opened by double clicking on the selected configuration file s entry Delete Deletes the selected file s from the database Export Exports the selected file s to the client file system Click to open the Save window browse to the desired location on the client file system and click Save to export the file s Import Imports a configuration backup file from the client file system Click to open the Import Config Backup File window browse to the location on the client file system where the file is store
231. ing Page Hot Lining provides a WiMAX operator with the capability to efficiently address issues with users that would otherwise be unauthorized to access packet data services When Hot Lining is enabled the ASN GW implements UL DL traffic filters These traffic filters are dynamically applied and removed per MSID Triggers for filter application removal are relevant RADIUS messages from the AAA server Filter s action on traffic shall be one of the following pass drop or HTTP redirect the traffic The ASN GW shall apply the pre configured profile according to the Hotline Profile ID as delivered from the AAA server If filtering is applied uplink subscriber s packet that does not match any UL filter rule shall be dropped Downlink subscriber s packet that does not match any DL filter rule shall be dropped DHCP traffic in UL and DL direction is always passed Anti spoofing function filtering of UL traffic is performed before the Hot Lining filtering Hot Lining is not applied on an MS with VLAN or Ethernet Services If the ASN GW receives Access Accept message which includes any Hot Lining attributes and the subject MS is granted at least one flow with CS type of VLAN or Ethernet the ASN GW shall initiate De registration of the MS MSs with tunneled traffic are not supported by Hot Lining When Hot Lining is disabled in ASN GW it shall not include Hot Lining Capabilities attributes in any Access Request messages If AAA replies wi
232. int of termination of the tunnel for the service interface Must be unique among all the Host Interfaces IP s Bearer Local Management Internal Management External Management existing instances of Service Interface Tunnel Destination IP and Default Gateway IP and subnets of Local Management Internal Management and External Management The default is 0 0 0 0 must be changed to a valid value Service VLAN ID Applicable only for VLAN and QinQ service interfaces Configurable only when adding a new service interface The Service Interface VLAN ID parameter for VLAN service interface SVID for QinQ service interface The range is 1 9 11 to 4094 The default is 0 A Service Interface VLAN ID shall not conflict with other instances of Service Interface VLAN ID and VLAN IDs of Bearer Local Management and External Management interfaces Shall also not conflict with CVID of any transparent MS Default Gateway IP Address Applicable only for VLAN service interfaces Configurable only when adding a new service interface The IP Address of the Default Gateway Must be unique among all the Host Interfaces IP s Bearer Local Management Internal Management External Management existing instances of Service Interface s Tunnel Destination IP Address and Default Gateway IP Address and subnets of Default Gateway IP addresses Should be in the same subnet with the IP Address of the DHCP server proxy relay to be assigned to a servic
233. ion Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name Mandatory for Create Mode Must be a Classification Rule Name that already exists in the target managed objects From To Relevant only if Enable TCP UDP Destination Port is enabled The range of values From To of the Destination ports from the lowest value to the highest value Values range is from 1 to 65535 The default is From 1 To 1 The default in the device is From 1 To 65535 Enable TCP UDP Destination Indicates whether the use of a range of Destination ports is enabled for the Port classification rule The default is no If enabled then Enable IP Protocol for the same Classification Rule should be set to enable automatically enabled in the device Protocol should be set to either 6 TCP or 17 UDP 4 4 4 9 Classification Rule Customer VLAN ID Tab Classiication Rue Source Askies Classlication Rude Destination Address ClassBication Rude Source Pork Classification Ride Destination Port Classification Rule Customer VLAN ID gt Mode Croate in dekte ap add X P Revert d Classification Config Nama Gatemer naD 3 ates vi Save bere Figure 4 18 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Customer VLAN ID Tab Create Mode The Classification Rule VLAN ID tab is applicable only for L2 rules The VLAN ID parameter of an existing rule cannot be modified The Classification Rule Cu
234. ion Select one of the following E Backup Current Device Configuration Select to retrieve the current configuration of the source device s The file will be created by the device upon getting the request from the management system E Backup an older device configuration Select to retrieve one of the previously created configuration files available in the database of the source device s The Source Equipment table includes the following details for each device participating in the task Parameter Description Region The location associated with the selected equipment in the database of the management system BTS Number The device s number Site ID as configured in the device BTS Name The name of the device as configured in the device NE Type The device type IP Address The IP address of the device File Available only for Site Configuration backup task if the selected option is Backup an older device configuration The name of the file to be retrieved from the device Click on the Add button to open the equipment Selector allowing you to add devices to the Source Equipment table Select the device s to participate in the task right click and select the Select option or double click on a selected single device For Site Configuration backup task if the selected option is Backup an older device configuration a File Name drop down menu for each entry allows you to select th
235. is installed but not defined yet the background color is purple Double click on an installed or a required but not installed AU to open the configuration page for the selected AU refer to AU lt Type and Slot gt Page on page 188 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment View Page 7 3 1 3 7 3 1 4 E In an installed AU there are either four 4 channels AU or two 2 channels AU ODU connectors channels that are marked as follows Green The ODU port is Up no fault and the ODU port is set to No Shutdown Red The ODU port is Down fault or the ODU port is set to Shutdown HM Double click on an empty AU module to open the New AU dialog box allowing you to define the properties of the AU required for the slot Refer to Creating Deleting an AU on page 186 for more details E Click on an installed AU port to view relevant associations if applicable A blue background will be added to the selected AU Port as well as to the ODU and Site Sector associated with it Outdoor Units View The Outdoor Units view shows the ODU icons all the Outdoor Units up to 28 for Macro Indoor BTS up to 24 for Macro Outdoor BTS that can be defined An undefined ODU is marked in gray A defined ODU is marked in either green or red indicating its operational status Note that the operational status of an ODU can be OK Up only if there are no alar
236. is applicable for both uplink and downlink schedulers The default is Equal Rate Scheduler DL Abuse Protection Level Applicable only if the selected Scheduler Mode is Equal Rate None No Protection Low Limit the DL resources allocated to MSs with very low DL transmission Rate Medium Limit the DL resources allocated to MSs with low and very low DL transmission Rate The default is None Scheduler UL Abuse Protection Level Applicable only if the selected Scheduler Mode is Equal Rate None No Protection Low Limit the UL resources allocated to MSs with very low UL transmission Rate Medium Limit the UL resources allocated to MSs with low and very low UL transmission Rate The default is None 4 5 3 R6 R8 Bearer Interface The R6 R8 Bearer Interface page is not applicable for Add Rows to Tables templates The R6 R8 Bearer Interface page comprises the following tabs E Bearer Tab E ASNGW Pools Tab E Authentication Tab E Control Traffic QoS Rules E Bearer Traffic QoS Rules Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template 4 5 3 1 Bearer Tab Mode Cnain Update Celetr Piters By dd an a selected peoperty name you can add to this fiter LI Defa Gateway Figure 4 36 The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Tab The Bearer parameter is Parameter Description
237. is for duplication without any restriction Using Duplicate Site configuration files the actual creation of a new site requires the following steps 1 Preparing the required Duplicate Site configuration file for the new site including definition of its unique parameter such as Site ID 2 Physical installation of equipment 3 Local provisioning of minimal connectivity and management access configuration see Enabling Discovery on page 1 This step may be skipped in case the next steps are done locally on site 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager Twin Site Creation 4 Following discovery by the management system loading the pre prepared Duplicate Site configuration file to the new site using the Restore Configuration task see Restore Configuration Task on page 300 5 Site restart 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard asf s The Twin Site Creation Wizard This section includes E Introduction E Starting the Twin Site Creation Wizard E Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 1 E Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 2 E Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 3 E Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 3 E Twin Site Creation Wizard Step A Introduction Creation of a new twin site configuration done is perfor
238. isioning Administration Security Management Help t p 1 iB Equipment Manager x ggf Network Maintenance x Template Manager x Al Duplicate Ste x Duplicate Site Management Required Functionality Twin Site Creation lv duplicate Site Server 10 10 187 117 User admin Figure 5 1 Duplicate Site Manager 2 Inthe Required Functionality field select Twin Site Creation in the current release this is the only option Click Next to open the first screen of the twin site creation wizard 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard 5 2 3 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 1 1 GO Equipment Manager x ig Task Manager x 1 El Template Manager z 1 oi Dupicateske x Twin Site Creation Source File NE Type Macro BTS File Type Configuration File Name Browse BTS Number New Site o Next Duplicate Site Server 10 10 144 3 User admin Figure 5 2 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 1 The first screen of the wizard includes the following parameters Parameter Description Source File NE Type Select the required equipment type Macro BTS for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS or MC ASN GW Mini Centralized ASN GW File Type Select the type of the file to be used as a basis for the new Duplicate Site configuration file Backup file o
239. it which is the default is set by the Maximum Tx Power supported by the ODU The control range is 10dBm HW version Read only The hardware version of the ODU card connected to this port Applicable only for an installed and associated ODU HW revision Read only The hardware revision of the ODU card connected to this port Applicable only for an installed and associated ODU HPA Card Read only Indicates whether the port is connected to an HPA card installed not installed HPA HW Version Read only The hardware version of the HPA connected to this port Applicable only if an HPA card exists in an installed and associated ODU HC08 SW Version Read only The software version of the HCO8 controlling card connected to this port Applicable only for an installed and associated ODU CPLD SW Version Read only The software version of the CPLD controlling card connected to this port Applicable only for an installed and associated ODU Serial Number Read only The serial number of the ODU card connected to this port Applicable only for an installed and associated ODU ODU Status Read only A decimal number representing the value of a 32 bits mask indicating possible failures For details refer to Table 7 5 below Applicable only for an installed and associated ODU Tx Operational Status Read only The current operational status of the Tx port In Rx ports ports 2 and 4 in a 4x2 ODU always set to Disable
240. ith the ASN GW Unknown Up down The keep alive mechanism starts only after first registration at the ASN GW Until then this mechanism is disable and connectivity status is Unknown 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Ga Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS 7 8 3 2 R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Authentication Tab The Authentication tab enables defining the authentications thresholds for connectivity R6 R8 Bearer Interface 0 0 2 55 55 55 Besrer Aithenbcation Qos Marking Rules Deia Autherticater I Address 5 5 254 Authenbcation thresholds Suspended EAP Process 10000 Active MSs 1024 Maamum LAP Rounds 100 elle 1 Betrest o dent Cons Figure 7 52 R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Authentication Tab The Authentication tab includes the following parameters Parameter Description Address Default Authenticator IP The IP address of the default authenticator ASN GW In Distributed ASN GW Topology this is typically the IP address of the NPU s Bearer interface Authentication Thresholds Suspended EAP Process Suspended EAP authentication process threshold It is used to set an alarm The range is 0 10000 The default is 10000 Note The relevant alarm is not supported in current release Active MSs The threshold for the number of MSs in active operation state not Idle served by the BS Exceeding this threshold sets the alarm
241. ity to duplicate existing site configuration file in order to generate new site s file s x NOTE The Duplicate Site Manager can be used to duplicate a Macro BTS Indoor Outdoor or a Mini Centralized ASN GW configuration Currently it does not support duplication of a Micro BTS ODU Micro Outdoor BTS configuration The Twin Site Creation functionality is based on the following assumptions E The customer will use the on line configuration tool to create at least one site configuration file of each class E Each on line site configuration file may be used as the basis for the creation of additional sites which are almost identical twins regarding configuration Twin sites are sites for which All managed Objects including instances are the same e g same number and types of AUs BSs ODUs Sectors Services VLANs etc All corresponding parameters of each Managed Object instance have the same values except a limited number of parameters defined to be unique The management system user has to enter these unique parameters values upon creation of a new Duplicate Site configuration file using pre prepared network plan guidelines Whenever a need rises to create a new class of sites the user has to create the first of a kind site using on line configuration tool and then use the Duplicate Site Manager for duplicating it as needed Note that any site created by offline duplication may be used as a bas
242. ks CLI Task Parameter Description User The user name for the CLI script Must be a user that is defined in the target device s The default user is admin Password The password for the CLI script Must be the password associated with the defined user in the target device s The default password is admin123 The Equipment table includes the following details for each device participating in the task Parameter Description Name The name of the site as configured in the device IP Address The IP address of the device Location The Location associated with the device in the management system Click Add to open the equipment Selector allowing you to add devices to the Equipment table Click Remove to remove one or several selected devices from the table In the CLI Script text box enter the CLI script to be executed on the target device s You can use the Browse button to import a pre prepared script that may be edited after being imported to the task 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW D Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Mass Neighboring Task 9 Mass Neighboring Task LOCAL CRAFT NOTE In the Local CRAFT Utility the Mass Neighboring Task is applicable only to the BSs of the managed BTS The Mass Neighboring task enables executing Send Update to All Neighbors and Get Update tasks on multiple BSs to ensure that the required neighbor BS data in all target BSs is
243. l Pool2 SW Version 3 0 10 December 2010 Managing a Single Device Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab Template Manager The BS Template General Def Tab New parameter Maximum Sub Burst Mode SW Version 3 0 10 January 2011 The Performance Monitoring Viewer Updated to reflect modified functionality SW Version 3 0 10 January 2011 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Legal Rights Topic Description Date Issued Software Upgrade Task Improved description SW Version 3 0 10 January 2011 Tasks 4Motion Mutual Neighboring New task infrastructure 4 8 SW Version 3 0 10 January 2011 Offline Configuration Tool New feature SW Version 3 0 10 January 2011 Managing a Single Device Creating Copying Deleting a BS Managing a Single Device Radio Basic Page General Tab Template Manager The BS Template Radio Basic Page RF Tab Duplicate Site Manager Twin Site Creation Step 3 Updated value range for Center Frequency SW Version 3 0 10 January 2011 Managing a Single Device Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab DL Diversity Mode Beam Forming is a licensed feature password is required SW Version 3 0 10 January 2011 Legal Rights Copyright 2011 Alvarion Ltd All rights reserved The material contained herein is proprietary privileged and confidential No disc
244. l Tab 265 Radio Advanced Page Management Tab 268 Radio Advanced Page QoS Tab viccsissiasccusisccnidesontanervascecesnadbacentebconntenrvansucsdanaiade 270 R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Tab ccecceeceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeees 272 R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Authentication Tab 274 R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page QoS Marking Rules Tab 275 New Site Sector VA OW as sie Staats octet een 278 Site Sector lt gt Page Macro Indoor Outdoor BI 279 Site Sector Page Micro Outdoor BIS 282 The Performance Monitoring Viewer cccccseeeescceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeseneneeeeeees 286 Performance Collection Task Editor General Tab 293 Performance Collection Task Editor Entities Tab 294 Performance Collection Task Editor Actions Tab 295 oyster 40 RE e EE 298 eStore Task Ee 301 Software Upgrade Task Editor NPU Software Upgrade sssssssesseeereresserrresee 304 Software Upgrade Task Editor AU Software Uoorade 306 File Data Aging Task Editor ees ccteedintadecs dees eeediecemnedeie degehneiaes 309 RUT TAS ue 311 Mass Neighboring Task e 314 Multiple Configuration Task Editor sz cccsvescecestcssbsccened seuntcnmcesheapaadserecsevainetseeactacdeete 317 Mutual Neighboring Task BQO cies sews Serge Seene 319 Device Driver User Manual Figures Figure 9 13 Mutual Neighboring Report ul 320 Figure 10 1 Equipment File Manager 324 Figure 10 2 Duplicate Site File Managel
245. lasstication Rude Protocol Gaar alen Rule Source Address Classification Rude Destination Address Classdicalion Rude Source Port Cl lt Made Create te ekte BW add j 38 ei Rovert d time NI we A D ause CO d Mask Vale hits O Venty vaue d Sue Value Bytes DES Core Figure 4 11 The ASN GW Template SFA Page PHS Rules Tab Create Mode The PHS Rules table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Name The name alias of the PHS Rule The PHS Rule Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Name The name alias of the PHS Rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Mandatory when creating a new rule Field Value The PHSF value that is the header string to be suppressed Mandatory when creating a new rule The default is null Must be replaced by a valid string Mask Value bits The PHSM that contains the bit mask of the PHSF with the bits set that is to be suppressed Mandatory when creating a new rule The default is null Must be replaced by a valid value 1 40 Verify Value Indicates whether or not the PHS header is to be verified The default is no 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Par
246. le Manager MC ASN GW MC ASN GW ASN GW admin Di User Session Monitor MC Management MC ASN GW Management admin Micro BS 4M Micro BTS ODU BS admin v Results on page 38 Total 38 PageSize 10 t e page 1 of 1 bje a ig Template Manager 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Server 10 10 144 3 User admin Figure 4 1 The Template Manager Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Manager You can use the Filter Criteria Manager for viewing only templates that meet one or several selection criteria The read only details of displayed template are Parameter Description Name The name of the template NE Type The type of Network Element for which the template is prepared MO Type The type of Managed Object ASN GW BS Management for which the template is applicable SW Version The SW Version used for preparing the template Owner The user that created the template Select one or several entries and right click to view the following management options Button Description New Adds a new template object to the database Click to open the Template Editor opens allowing to enter general information on the template to be added For more details see The Template Editor on page 22 NOTE The New option is available when right clicking anywhere in the work area without the need to select any existing entry Edit Not available if two
247. lection Selection 20 30 40 E 60 e SS 100 16 37 00 16 38 00 16 39 00 Number of Total DL bursts transferred t Pre Counters are shown with actual values All other counters are calculated as delta between current and previous values divided by collection time Poling Interval sec 5 J Aol General Controls Ese E ates Done Figure 8 1 The Performance Monitoring Viewer E The Counters Group Selection Section on page 286 E The Counters Selection Section on page 287 E The Graph and Graph Controls Section on page 288 E General Controls on page 289 8 2 The Counters Group Selection Section The counters group selection section enables you to select a specific counters group The counters group selection section on the left side of the window displays all the counters groups applicable to the relevant device Use the Expand Collapse check boxes to view hide all counters groups available for each of the managed objects 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 The Performance Monitoring Viewer The Counters Selection Section 8 3 The Counters Selection Section The counters selection section enables you to select specific counters for real time monitoring to define the color of the graph for each selected counter and to define the graph s values scale for each selected counter The counters selection section displays all the count
248. lection Task Editor In the Task Manager window do one of the following E To open a new task use the Task Wizard E To open an existing task select a Performance Collection task from the list of existing tasks right click and select the Edit option or double click on the selected task s entry If the task is Active the Runtime result screen is displayed displaying the status of the running task E Ifthe task is Inactive the Performance Collection Task Editor for the existing task is displayed The Performance Collection Task Editor includes three tabs E General Tab Section 9 1 1 E Entities Tab Section 9 1 2 E Actions Tab Section 9 1 3 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 202 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Performance Collection Task 9 1 1 General Tab General Entities Actions Task Type Performance Collection Equipment Line 4Motion Task Name Motion Collection 20090818143050 Task Description leie k s ken Figure 9 1 Performance Collection Task Editor General Tab The General tab of the Performance Collection task includes the following parameters Parameter Description Task Type The type of data to be collected Performance Collection This field is read only Equipment Line The type of equipment from which to collect data Read only in the current version Task Name The name of the task A
249. lection of the corresponding check boxes If BW 5 MHz bits 1 3 and 5 are not relevant grayed out Bits 0 2 and 4 must be set checked If BW 7 10 MHz with reuse 1 all bits 0 to 5 must be set checked For BW 7 10 MHz with Reuse 3 E if Segment Number see Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure General Tab on page 250 is 0 then only bits 0 and 1 should be set checked E if Segment Number is 1 then only bits 2 and 3 should be set checked E if Segment Number is 2 then only bits 4 and 5 should be set checked The default is all bits unchecked Basic Map Repetition The basic repetition used in the transmission of the maps using QPSK 1 2 The available options are 1 2 4 and 6 1 means no repetitions The default is 6 Frame Structure Mode DL Diversity Mode The downlink diversity mode used by the system Matrix A B or Beam Forming The Beam Forming option is not applicable for 2 channels AU Macro Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS The default is Matrix A B Beam Forming is a licensed feature You will be prompted to enter the required password for activating Beam Forming mode 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Gi Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Neighbor Beam Forming Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor units operating in MIMO Matrix A B mode The beam forming mechanism is based on symmetry in
250. led it will be used if profile descriptor is missing in service provisioning or if received profile descriptor is disabled unauthenticated mode Up to 63 additional Service Profiles may be created The Service Profile node enables creating deleting service profiles refer to Creating Deleting a Service Profile below and opening the Service Profile page for one of the existing service profiles refer to Service Profile Page Creating Deleting a Service Profile To create a new service profile 1 Right click the Service Profile sub node in the navigation tree and select Create to open the New Service Profile window 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Service Profile Service Profile Name Service Profile Enable Disable Figure 7 37 New Service Profile Window 2 In the New Service Profile window define the Service Profile Name 1 30 characters and click Apply The new service profile will be added to the list of service profiles available under the Service Profile sub node with the default status of Disable 3 To configure the parameters of the new service profile click on the service profile name in the navigation tree to open the Service Profile page for this service profile Up to a maximum of 64 service profiles can be created gt To delete a Service Profile To delete a service profile right c
251. licable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing rule The type of service provided as an input parameter for the bearer plane QoS rule UGS RTVR NRTVR BE ERTVR or ANY The default is UGS the default in the device is ANY Service Flow Traffic Priority Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing rule The traffic priority provided as an input parameter for the bearer plane QoS rule 0 7 or ANY The default is 0 the default in the device is ANY Service Flow Media Flow Type Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing rule The media type provided as an input parameter for the bearer plane QoS rule A string of 1 to 30 characters A value of ANY indicates that this parameter will be ignored The default is null the default in the device is ANY Outer DSCP Marking The Differentiated Service Code Point DSCP value to be used for marking the packets if the packet complies with the marking rule s conditions The range is from 0 to 63 The default is 0 802 1p Priority Marking The 802 1p priority to be used for marking traffic that complies with the marking rule s conditions The range is from 0 to 7 The default is 0 Rule Status The status of the rule Enable or Disable The default is Disable the default in the device is Enable x NOTE The default QoS Marking Rules int_default and ext_default can be updated but cannot be deleted
252. lick the required service profile entry in the navigation tree and select Delete You will be request to confirm the operation Note that the Default pre configured service profile cannot be deleted 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 234 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device 7 7 4 3 2 7 7 4 3 2 1 Service Profile Page ASN GW The Service Profiles page enables viewing the Service Profiles in the device s database defining new Service Profiles and editing or deleting existing Service Profiles Nome Profile Satus Enable Service Profiles Parameters Service Fow Flow Number Flow 1D Service Flow Parameters E 2 Reference Gesin Rude Flow ID Ceewergenen Sublyyer Type Meds Plow Type Relererce Service Group Data Delivery Type Max Sustained Traffic Rate xhps 250 Mn hesneved Trathe Rata kbps Traffic Priorty Max Latency ms Tolerated Wter ms Urechoted Grant Interval ms ives IL Cowell dei IS o DCH D EI o o o U Reference Clascfication Ride Number Rude Name Eo Dos D Reference Classification Rule Number Figure 7 38 Service Profile Page Ride Name 1 Betresh we np KH The Service Profiles page includes the following sections M General Service Profile Parameters E Service Flow Table E Service Flow Parameters Editor M Reference Cl
253. losure thereof shall be made to third parties without the express written permission of Alvarion Ltd Alvarion Ltd reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warrant Trade Names Alvarion BreezeCOM WALKair WALKnet BreezeNET BreezeACCESS BreezeLINK BreezeMAX BreezeLITE BreezePHONE 4Motion and or other products and or services referenced here in are either registered trademarks trademarks or service marks of Alvarion Ltd All other names are or may be the trademarks of their respective owners WiMAX Forum is a registered trademark of the WiMAX Forum WiMAX the WiMAX Forum logo WiMAX Forum Certified and the WiMAX Forum Certified logo are trademarks of the WiMAX Forum 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Legal Rights Statement of Conditions The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Alvarion Ltd shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this manual or equipment supplied with it Warranties and Disclaimers All Alvarion Ltd Alvarion products purchased from Alvarion or th
254. lot Number l AU Port Number 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 4 1 4 ladd New Power Feeder Delete oP Refresh v Apply Figure 7 29 Power Feeder Page The Power Feeder table includes the following parameters Parameter Description Unit Number Read only The Power Feeder Unit Number 1 4 Port Number Read only The Power Feeder Port Number 1 4 AU Slot Number The Slot Number of the AU to which the Power Feeder Port is connected 1 4 7 9 or None The default is None AU Port Number The AU Port Number to which the Power Feeder Port is connected 1 4 or None The default is None In addition the page includes the following buttons 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment Button Description Add Power Feeder Adds a new Power Feeder to the table Up to 4 Power Feeders may be configured Each Power Feeder includes 4 entries for Port Number 1 to 4 Note that each combination of AU Slot Number and AU Port Number cannot appear in more than one entry excluding combinations with None value Delete Deletes the selected Power Feeder from the table You must select all 4 entries of a Power Feeder to delete it 7 6 2 5 Antenna Page The Antenna page is applicable for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS The Antenna page enables defining the properties of the site s antennas The Antenna page
255. lt NMS name gt firmware wm The system will automatically identify the files and use the correct file for each device type You may define a different station as the TFTP server to be used In this case the software file s to be used should be available in the root Otherwise you should specify the full path and file name NOTE The file name and format should not be changed 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Software Upgrade Task gt To open the Software Upgrade Task Editor In the Task Manager window do one of the following E To open a new task use the Task Wizard E To open an existing task select a Software Upgrade task from the list right click and select the Edit option or double click on the selected task entry If the task is Active the Runtime Results window is displayed displaying the status of the running task If the task is Inactive the Software Upgrade Task Editor for the task is displayed Task Name Software Download Activity NPU Software Upgrade Software Upgrade Settings L Download To Shadow Reboot From Shadow LJ Set As Operational version File Name TFTP IP Address 10 10 187 117 Select Equipment Region BTSName BTSNu NE Type SiteIP NPU Op NPU Sha NPU Cur ANM Mac 10 10 1 mpu_2_ npu_l_ Operati leie e E Figure 9 6 Software Upgrade Task Editor NPU Software Upgrade The
256. lt is Disable 4 4 6 3 Hot Lining Access List Tab vA Mode Create Add X Cupeate Asn Hut Lng Hiat Ling Prot hes f Hut Lewy Access Lat Dekte H Revert d Fiter Mides Name ER k Titer Rules Name Not Uning Profle c Yet Lines Profiles Profle Name O Fier Rules Direction O ter Rules IP Address O Per Rues Mask O Fier Source Port Start E Fier Source Port Stop O Pier Rules Destination Port Rart O Fier Rues Destination Port Rop LI Fier fades Drop Sot O Pheer Rules Deep Rep Per Action 2 L 1 Fier Protocol gh Refeesh v Save Keess Figure 4 24 The ASN GW Template Hot Lining Page Hot Lining Access List Tab Create Mode The Hot Lining Access List table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Filter Rules Name The name alias of the Filter Rule Name Hot Lining Profiles Profile The name alias of the Hot Lining Profile 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW The Hot Lining Access List Row Editor includes the following parameters Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Parameter Description Filter Rules Name The name alias of the Filter Rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Mandatory when creating a new rule Hot Lining Profile
257. m or CLI If you are using CLI run the command npu config site identifier lt site id lt 0 999999 gt gt and save the new configuration using the command npu write Restart the site NPU to apply the change This will clean the active alarms and the Performance Monitoring files with the old BTS Number ID from the database of the NPU Delete old site from the database of the management system In the Equipment Manager select the BTS and click Delete The management system will automatically close all open alarms remove the old BTS Number ID from all the tasks such as Performance Collection Backup Configuration and Keep Alive It will also stop processing new alarms form this old site The user should perform manual discovery of the new device with the old IP address which now doesn t exist in the database of the management system After discovery the management system will initiate full synchronization as for any new device The management system will add this new device to all network wide tasks such as keep alive Regarding user initiated tasks such as Performance Collection and Backup Configuration the user should manually modify and add this device to the existing tasks 7 4 1 2 ASN Topology The ASN Topology section includes the Current and Configured options of the ASN Topology parameter Distributed ASN GW In this mode the NPU implements ASN GW functionalities that is it implements R3 Refe
258. main ASCII MS ID ASCII BS ID ASCII BS MAC The default is Not Set For ASCII Agent Remote ID enter the ID string in the Binary ASCII Agent Remote ID text box up to 32 characters For Binary Free String enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces in the Binary ASCII Agent Remote ID text box 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Agent Subscriber ID Sub option 6 of option 82 The available options are Not Set disable Default MS ID BS ID NAS ID NAS IP ASCII Agent Subscriber ID Binary Free String Full NAI Domain The default is Not Set For ASCII Agent Subscriber ID enter the ID string in the Binary ASCII Agent Subscriber ID text box up to 32 characters For Binary Free String enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces in the Binary ASCII Agent Subscriber ID text box 7 733 QoS Marking Page The QoS Marking page enables managing QoS marking rules for the bearer plane based on parameters such as traffic priority and the type of service media and interface For each marking rule you can define the output parameters outer DSCP and VLAN priority values to be applied on service flows using best match logic For example if we have the following two marking rules for BE traffic Data Flow Delivery Type set to BE A Interface Type set to Internal R6 inter
259. mance Loggng Marking Actions Action ID Pai ose Priory 4 DSCP amp Priorty 7 7 2 SCP Priorty 7 7 3 DSP G Priety 7 7 4 DSCP amp Pricey o o 5 OSCP amp Prinety 9 D OSC G Priety Y D 7 DSCP amp Priorty H H a OSCP amp Prinety 0 D hd DOC G Priety 7 7 Acs con QoS Merking Classifiers Classifier 1D Acton 1D 4 1 3 3 4 4 6 6 2 v U 9 H E le 1 Retreats deny Cone Figure 7 11 Management Page QoS Marking Rules Tab The QoS Marking Rules tab includes the following sections E Marking Actions 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity 7 5 2 2 1 HM QoS Marking Classifiers Marking Actions The Marking Actions table lists the class maps that define the DSCP and or VLAN priority bits to be applied for signaling and management traffic originating from the NPU that match relevant criteria The Marking Actions table includes the following parameters Parameter Description Action ID Read only The system generated auto sequential ID number Flag Configurable only during creation of a new marking action entry Defines the type of QoS parameters to be applied appropriate QoS handling of the relevant flow The option are DSCP Priority and DSCP amp Priority The default is DSCP amp Priority DSCP Configurable only during creation of a new marking action entry The DSCP value to
260. med using a step by step wizard When the twin site creation process is based on a backup configuration file the file is not supposed to include the following E Parameters having action nature E Parameters having Read Only syntax E Tables in which all parameters are of the action nature or having Read Only syntax Some tables including their whole content are not relevant to any off line configuration related activity as a whole although included in the configuration file All writable parameters of these tables are set to their default values when creating an off line file All BSs table entries related to neighbors Neighbors List Neighbors Triggers ID IP Mapping are deleted The Exclude IP Address table is also deleted After loading the Duplicate Site configuration file to the new site the user should 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard J22 configure them using online configuration and perform the required network update actions In the different wizard screen only parameters that are needed for the creation of a new Duplicate Site configuration file are displayed E Read only values of the new site are presented on a light grey background E Read only reference values of the source site e g source site BS IDs are presented as grayed out on a light grey background E Mandatory fields into which t
261. meter will affect all entries in the IP Routing table using the Bearer Interface Default Gateway as the Next Hop address For details refer to Effects of Changes in IP Interface s Parameters on page 155 VLAN ID The VLAN ID of bearer traffic The range is 11 100 110 4094 The default is 11 If the value is other than the default 11 it will be indicated in the Backhaul VLAN Translation table see Backhaul VLAN Translation on page 151 Number of MS limitation The maximum number of active MSs that can be served by the device If this number is reached and a new MS attempts network entry it will be rejected and a suitable no resource alarm will be generated The range is from 1 to 3000 The default is 500 Maximum ASN GW The maximum throughput in Mbps that can be provided by the device If this Throughput number is reached and a new MS attempts network entry it will be rejected and a suitable no resource alarm will be generated The range is from 1 to 500 Mbps The default is 200 Mbps Number of Active MS Read only The current number of active MSs served by the device Average UL DL bit rate via Read only The current average throughput provided by the device Backhaul Ethernet port b Note Not supported in current release 7 5 4 IMPORTANT The Bearer interface IP address is used also in other interfaces such as the ASN and CSN interfaces If you change the Bearer interface Source IP address you must reb
262. more than practically needed since a maximum of 500 MSs can be served by each BS To reduce overhead a smaller number of bits can be used based on RCID Reduced CID defined in the standard This mechanism can be used only if all MSs served by the BS support RCID When enabled CIDs of either 7 or 11 bits will be dynamically used according to the current number of MS served at each given moment The RCID Usage defines whether RCID is enabled or disabled The default is Disable Downlink Data Zone Permutation Base The permutation base used in the downlink data zone The valid range is from 0 to 31 The default is 0 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Basic Rate for Management The downlink basic rate for unicast and broadcast management QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 16 QAM 1 2 16 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 1 2 64 QAM 2 3 64 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 5 6 The default is QPSK 1 2 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Basic Rate for Data The downlink basic rate for data QPSK 1 2 Repetition 6 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 4 QPSK 1 2 Repetition 2 QPSK 1 2 QPSK 3 4 16 QAM 1 2 16 QAM 3 4 64 QAM 1 2 64 QAM 2 3 64 QAM 3 4
263. more than practically needed since a maximum of 500 MSs can be served by each BS To reduce overhead a smaller number of bits can be used based on RCID Reduced CID defined in the standard This mechanism can be used only if all MSs served by the BS support RCID When enabled CIDs of either 7 or 11 bits will be dynamically used according to the current number of MS served at each given moment The RCID Usage defines whether RCID is enabled or disabled The default is Enable in the device the default is Disable 4 5 1 5 Triggers Tab Mode Create Update Add MW Remove 4 ed Get 1 RF Base Ban far Frame Stature Tryyers D Oelete d Trigger Name Own CNR Sean request LI Trigger Value Figure 4 29 The BS Template Radio Basic Page Triggers Tab Each row in the table includes a trigger name To add a row to the table click on the Add button above the table The row editor window will open enabling you to select a Trigger Name from the drop down list The Trigger Names must be selected taking into account the relevant existing Trigger Names in the target objects that will participate in the Multiple Configuration task using the template In Create Mode a Trigger Name that already exists in the managed object will be rejected In Update or Delete Mode a Trigger Name that does not exist in the managed object will be rejected 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW O Devic
264. ms If you create an ODU and do not associate it see Site Sector lt gt Page on page 279 it will be marked in green however it will not be operational If the ODU exists and is associated meaning that it is reachable its ports configuration 1x1 or 4x2 will be indicated on the left side Click on an associated ODU s icon to view relevant associations A blue background will be added to the selected ODU as well as to the AU ODU connectors AU channels and Site Sector associated with it Double click on any of the defined ODUs to open the specific ODU configuration page Sectors View The Sectors view shows text boxes for the defined Site Sectors The name ofa defined Sector is displayed in the relevant area Note that the name can also be an empty string null It is recommended to define a Sector Name for all defined sectors to provide clear distinction between site sectors 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment View Page 7 3 1 5 E Ge Click on a Sector s text box to view relevant associations A blue background will be added to the selected Sector as well as to the ODU s and AU channel s associated with it if applicable Double click on any of the Site Sectors to open the specific site sector configuration page External Devices View The External Devices View below the Chassis View displays information related to ext
265. mulated in order to get the MS IP Session counters The default is Time based 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Parameter Description Interim Interval Min Not applicable if Accounting Mode see above is set to None The default interval in seconds for Accounting Interim reports to be used if Acct Interim Interval is not received from the AAA server Value 0 means interim reports are deactivated unless Acct Interim Interval is sent by the AAA server in Access Accept messages The valid range is 0 none or 5 1600 minutes The default is 0 the default in the device is 5 Vid Map Start and Vid Map End Applicable only for VPWS Mapped Service Groups The start and end value of the range of VLAN IDs for mapping End value cannot be lower than Start value The range for both is from 1 to 4094 The default for Vid Map Start is 0 which is not a valid value The default for Vid Map End is 1 None of the value within the range shall overlap with any existing infrastructure host interfaces VLAN IDs None of the value within the range shall overlap with VID mapping ranges of other existing Service Groups Primary DNS Server Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Proxy mode IP Address of the first DNS Server to be provisioned to MS from this Group In the Proxy mode this value is used if appropriate parameter i
266. n Server mode this is the subnet mask to be provided by local DHCP Server with IP address In the Proxy mode this value is used only if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW B Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Parameter Description Default Gateway IP Address Applicable only in Server Proxy mode In Server mode this is the IP address of the Default Gateway to be provided by the local DHCP Server with the device IP address In the Proxy mode this value is used only if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Address Allocation Timeout Renewal Time The interval as a percentage of the Lease Time after which the MS can request renewal of a lease that has expired The range is from 1 to 100 The default is 50 The renewal Time must be lower than rebind Time This value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Rebind Time The rebind interval as a percentage of the Lease Time This is passed to the MS DHCP client The range is from 1 to 99 The default is 75 This value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Offer Reuse Time The interval in seconds within which the MS should send a DHCP request to accept the address sent by the NPU If the MS does not accept the address within this period the MS is d
267. ncludes the following buttons Button Description Add Adds a new entry to the table and opens the Rule Parameters Editor enabling configuration of parameters for the new rule Rules can be added only if the Active State of the ACL is Up Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table Rules can be deleted only if the Active State of the ACL is Down The ACL Parameters Editor displays the following parameters for the rule selected in the ACL Parameters table Parameter Description Source IP Address The source IP address to allow deny traffic from The address 0 0 0 0 means any address The default is 0 0 0 0 In ACL 199 rules must be the IP address of the Bearer or External Management or Internal Management interface Source IP Mask Not configurable for ACL 199 The mask for the source IP address allowing to define a range of source addresses subnet from which to allow deny traffic The default is 255 255 255 255 Minimum Source Port Applicable only for an extended ACL The minimum source port number of the application traffic from which to allow deny traffic The range is 1 65535 The default is 0 Maximum Source Port Applicable only for an extended ACL Not applicable for ACL 199 The maximum source port number of the application traffic from which to allow deny traffic The range is 1 65535 The default is 65535 Destination IP Address Not applicable for A
268. nd destination ports and protocol 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity E Extended ACL 199 is used only for QoS Marking rules for classifying traffic originating from the NPU and applying DSCP and or Priority values for proper QoS handling of traffic that meets certain criteria This ACL cannot be deleted By default ACL 199 includes 8 pre configured rules referencing pre configured classifiers that point to pre configured actions IP Interface Type of Protocol Source Classifier Action DSCP Priority Source IP Traffic Port ID ID Address Bearer RADIUS UDP 1812 1 1 7 7 Bearer Mobile IP UDP 434 2 2 7 7 Agent Bearer WiMAX ASN UDP 2231 3 3 7 7 Control Plane Protocol Internal OBSAI UDP 10009 4 4 0 0 Management message not applicable exchange for between NPU Mini Centralized and AU ASN GW Internal Trivial File UDP 69 5 5 0 0 Management Transfer not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW External Telnet TCP 23 6 6 0 0 Management External SSH Remote TCP 22 7 7 0 0 Management Login Protocol External SNMP UDP 161 8 8 0 0 Management An ACL can be attached to the ASN GW In BTS equipment it can also be attached to the AUs or both ASN GW and AUs Excluding ACL 199 that cannot be attached to any interface You can create the following types of rules for an ACL
269. net Mask associated with the configured IP Address The default is 255 255 255 255 IP Protocol The IP protocol number 1 255 255 means any ignore this condition The default is 255 Source Port Start The minimum value of source TCP UDP port range The default is 0 Source Port Stop The maximum value of source TCP UDP port range The default is 65535 Destination Port Start The minimum value of destination TCP UDP port range The default is 0 Destination Port Stop The maximum value of destination TCP UDP port range The default is 65535 DSCP Start The minimum value of DSCP range The default is 0 DSCP Stop The maximum value of DSCP range The default is 63 Filter Action Action to be performed on packets that match the rule Pass Drop HTTP Redirect The default is Pass HTTP Redirect is applicable only if Direction is Uplink If set to HTTP Redirect then HTTP Redirect Address see Profiles Table above must be defined The following buttons are available below the table Button Description Add Adds a new entry to the table allowing to configure new rule s parameter Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW OG Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS 7 8 et gt BS The BS node is not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW T
270. ng Interim messages on a preconfigured or negotiated interval AAA server can send negotiated time interval in Access Accept message If the defined value see Interim Interval below is zero and there is no Acct Interim Interval in Access Accept interim updates should be deactivated Volume and time based Applicable only for IP Service Groups Functionality is the same as for Time option above In addition this mode supports postpaid accounting by supporting IP Session Volume Based Accounting The ASN GW will report the cumulative volume counters for each MS IP Session The counters will be collected per MS Service Flow and will be cumulated in order to get the MS IP Session counters The default is Time based 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Interim Interval Not applicable if Accounting Mode see above is set to None The default interval in seconds for Accounting Interim reports to be used if Acct Interim Interval is not received from the AAA server Value 0 means interim reports are deactivated unless Acct Interim Interval is sent by the AAA server in Access Accept messages The valid range is 0 none or 5 1600 minutes The default is 5 The DHCP Function Editor for Server and Proxy modes includes the following parameters Parameter Description Address Configuration Prima
271. ng the value of a 32 bits mask indicating possible failures For details refer to Table 7 6 below Applicable only for an installed and associated Radio Tx Operational Status Read only The current operational status of the Tx port Table 7 6 ODU Status Mask Bit Mapping for Micro Outdoor ODU Bit Set to 1 Failure None No Failure 1 No signal or no TX RX from AU 2 Failed to read calibration file 3 The ODU temperature is high 4 HW not compatible with the selected Radio type 5 Not used 6 Power out of range 7 Current out of range 8 Synthesizer Lock Failure 9 RX gain out of range Rx signal is too high 10 32 Not used 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device 7 6 2 3 GPS Page Equipment In a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS the GPS page enables defining the GPS receiver configuration In a Mini Centralized ASN GW it enables defining the SNTP parameters It also enables defining other time synchronization CRJ ae lt gt GPS Chain GPS Type Trimble Lassen zl Daylight Saving Disable Stop TX After Hold Over Timeout Enable M start Date Stop Date Hold Over Passed Timeout t fe Advance Hour Factor D Time Zone Offset From UTC
272. nge for Center Frequency August 2009 Duplicate Site Manager Twin Site Creation wizard Step 5 Removed Altitude Electrical Azimuth Adjustment Antenna Heading is not mandatory August 2009 File Manager Updated to reflect all GUI changes of Management System Infrastructure Version 4 5 Added in Equipment File Manager SW Version Status In Duplicate Site File Manager Added NE updated descriptions of Site IP and Site ID August 2009 Tasks Updated to reflect all GUI changes of Management System Infrastructure Version 4 5 Updated to reflect the new Task Wizard Added CLI Task Added Neighboring Task Added Multiple Configuration Task August 2009 Template Manager New feature August 2009 Parameters Summary Updated to reflect all changes of release 2 5 2 including updated ranges defaults August 2009 Supported equipment Updated manual to reflect support for Mini Centralized ASN GW October 2009 Enabling Discover Updated sections on VLAN Translation External Management Interface and Static Route Definition October 2009 AAA Page Added VLAN Classifier Bit Alignment November 2009 Service Group Page Service Groups Tab Template Manager Added new options to Agent Circuit ID and Agent Remote ID Corrected Sub options numbers November 2009 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Document Histo
273. not be deleted 7 5 2 3 2 IMPORTANT The priority of checking for a match in active ACLs is applied with respect to the sequence in which these ACLs were attached to the relevant interface The first found match is applied To change the priorities of ACLs you need to de attach them from the relevant interface s and then re attach them in the required order ACL Parameters Section The ACL Parameters section includes the ACL Parameters table and the ACL Parameters Editor After you have created an ACL you can configure Allow Deny rules to be applied for traffic that meets certain criteria The ACL Parameters table displays the following read only parameters for each existing ACL rule Parameter Description Rule Number The ACL rule number An auto sequential number generated during creation of a new rule 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Rule Action The rule action Allow or Deny Allow indicates that traffic matching the filter criteria is allowed to reach the ASN GW and or AUs Deny indicates that traffic matching the filter criteria is dropped and not allowed to reach the ASN GW or AUS Select an entry to open the Rule Parameters Editor for the selected rule A rule can be edited only when the Active State of the ACL is Deactivated The ACL Parameters table also i
274. not be re activated from remote To re activate the system turn off the power to the PIU s and then turn it on again Reset The site will be restarted All changes in parameters that require reset will take effect after restart Reset To Factory The system will be restarted with factory default configuration IMPORTANT All configurations will be deleted This also means loosing the ability to manage the unit from remote Local configuration of specific mandatory parameters using CLI is required to enable remote management of the site using the management system Refer to the Enabling Discovery on page 1 for details 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment Option Description Reset To Factory With The system will be restarted with factory default configuration except to Connectivity parameters that are required to maintain management connectivity to the unit The parameters that are maintained without any change include BW Physical interfaces MGMT CSCD DATA configurations E IP interfaces local management external management bearer configurations HIP route configurations E SNMP Managers configurations E Trap Managers configurations E AU software mapping not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW E Site ID No Action The default option no reset or shutdown operation 7 6 1 2 3 Automatic Configuration Backup The
275. nterfaces The subnet mask of the default gateway Should not overlap with an existing Interface subnet host interfaces other service interfaces The default is 0 0 0 0 must be changed to a valid value when creating a new Service Interface the default in the device is 255 255 255 0 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Fd A Service Interface associated to a Service Group cannot be deleted A QinQ service interface associated to a service flow cannot be deleted 4 4 2 2 Service Groups Tab Lage vs zen Ess Figure 4 8 The ASN GW Template Service Group Page Service Groups Tab Create Mode The Service Groups table includes the following parameters for each row Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Service Group Name The name alias of the service Group DHCP Function Mode The DHCP Function Mode if applicable Fd Service Groups with DHCP Function Type Server are not supported by the template manager since IP address Pools should be unique in the network The Service Group Row Editor includes the following parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW a Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Parameter Description Service Group Name The name alias of the service Group A string of 1
276. o 15 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description Map Major Groups 6 bits representing the selection of Map Major Groups 0 to 5 where the left most bit MSB represents Major Group 5 If BW 5 MHz bits 1 3 and 5 are not relevant grayed out Bits 0 2 and 4 must be set checked Configure 111111 If BW 7 10 MHz with reuse 1 all bits 0 to 5 must be set checked Configure 111111 For BW 7 10 MHz with Reuse 3 E i Segment Number see Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure General Tab on page 250 is 0 then only bits 0 and 1 should be set checked Configure 000011 E if Segment Number is 1 then only bits 2 and 3 should be set checked Configure 001100 E if Segment Number is 2 then only bits 4 and 5 should be set checked Configure 110000 Default Authenticator IP The IP address of the default authenticator ASN GW x NOTE The available values for Center Frequencies indicated above are for a Bandwidth of 5 MHz For a different bandwidth the actually valid values are from f1 1 2BW to f2 1 2BW where f1 is the lowest frequency of the ODU s radio band f2 is the highest frequency of the ODU s band and BW is the configured bandwidth Note that ODU 2305 2360 000N 36 1x1 Y 0 includes two bands 2305 2320 2345 2360 MHz To delete a BS To delete a BS right click the required BS entry in the navig
277. o need to click Apply on Radio Advanced and Connectivity pages after completing configuration of mandatory parameters August 2009 Copy BS New feature August 2009 Radio Basic Page General Tab Added Idle Mode parameters Updated range for Center Frequency August 2009 Radio Basic Page Air Fame Structure General Tab Removed Enable Uplink Sub Channel Rotation August 2009 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW ul Device Driver User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Zones Tab Removed Map Size added new First Zone parameters Minimum Size Maximum Size Maximum Map Size Added Uplink Data Zone Basic Rate Added Downlink Data Zone Basic Rate for Management Downlink Data Zone Number of Sub Channels Uplink Feedback Zone Number of Sub Channels Uplink Data Zone Number of Sub Channels Uplink Data Zone Start Allocation were removed Removed Dynamic Permutation parameters moved to Radio Advanced Page Diversity Tab August 2009 Radio Basic Page Diversity Tab Moved to Radio Advanced Page August 2009 Radio Basic Page Mobility Tab New Tab name was Handover tab Added Neighbor column to Triggers table Updated parameters in Neighbor List table Updated button name Choose Neighbor changed to Add Entry Add details on Neighboring Task August 2009 Radio Advanced Page
278. ocation In Ste and Rack D lm Corewetivty bewer p aen ERR tterna nanaoenere assees WEIL Destination i Hack I Nmt Hop Ca j Server 10 10 107 117 User odan Figure 5 3 Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 2 The second screen of the wizard includes the following sections E Site Properties E Site Location E Connectivity E IP Routing E Sectors 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard 5 2 4 1 Site Properties Parameter Description BTS Name The name of the BTS An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 32 characters BTS Location The address of the BTS e g 21 Main Street 2nd Floor An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 70 characters Local In Site and Rack An optional description of the physical location of the BTS shelf in the site rack A string of up to 32 characters 5 2 4 2 Site Location Site Location parameters are not applicable for twin site creation of a Mini Centralized ASN GW Parameter Description Latitude The latitude of the site Typically should not be configured as it is received from the GPS receiver The format is Il mmm a Il is latitude in degrees between 00 and 89 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is N north or S south Longitude The longitude of the
279. ode Must be a Classification Rule Name that already exists in the target managed objects IP Source Address Relevant only if Enable IP Source Classifier is enabled The IP source address enabled for the classification rule The default is 0 0 0 0 Must be set to a valid value IP Source Mask Relevant only if Enable IP Source Classifier is enabled The net mask field that is used to specify a range of IP source addresses The default is 0 0 0 0 the default in the device is 255 255 255 255 If selected must be set to a valid value Enable IP Source Classifier Indicates whether the use of an associated IP source address is enabled for the classification rule The default is no 4 4 4 6 Classification Rule Destination Address Tab d Cssficationconfighame LU PP Oestination Address LI P Destination Mask O Enable IP Destination Classifier Luz Refresh Sa Kess Figure 4 15 The ASN GW Template SFA Page Classification Rule Destination Address Tab Create Mode The Classification Rule Destination Address tab is applicable only for L3 rules The Source Destination parameters of an existing rule cannot be modified The Classification Rule Destination Address table includes the following parameters for each row 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Parameter Description Id
280. of all MSs served by the specified device You can click Home to return to the main Network Maintenance Management window 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual 4a Chapter The Template Manager Chapter 4 The Template Manager In This Chapter The Template Manager on page 19 The Template Editor on page 22 Configuring Templates on page 23 ASN GW Template on page 29 BS Template on page 63 Management Template on page 90 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager 4 1 The Template Manager This section includes E Using the Template Manager E Default BS Templates 4 1 1 Using the Template Manager The Template Manager The Template Manager enables managing equipment configuration templates that can be used for modifying configuration of selected devices using the template based Multiple Configuration task see Multiple Configuration Template Based Task on page 316 To open the Template Manager Select Configuration Management gt Template Manager from the Navigation Pane or menu bar The Template Manager window opens x Wists Template Manager x D managed network ell Equipment Manager See Z Location Manager GA Discovery Settings Manager Name NE Type MO Type SW Version Owner
281. of the default software image used for rebooting the AU after system reset Shadow SW Version Number The version of the downloaded software image that can be used to boot up the AU Current Running SW source The software that is currently running on the card operational or shadow Refer to Software Upgrade Task on page 303 for details on loading a new SW version and managing the SW versions 7 6 1 3 2 1 3 Maintenance Connectivity The Maintenance Connectivity section enables viewing configuring the parameters of the service interface used by the AU for uploading maintenance information to an external server The Maintenance Connectivity section includes the following parameters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the service interface Must be unique in the network The default is 192 168 0 1 Mask The subnet mask of the service interface The default is 255 255 255 0 Next Hop The IP address of the service interface s default gateway In Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS the default is 0 0 0 0 none In Micro Outdoor BTS Next Hop is read only and is set to the IP address of bearer interface s Default Gateway see ASN GW Bearer Interface Page on page 176 VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the service interface In Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS is
282. older If another TFTP server is selected see below the drop down menu enables selecting one of the relevant files available in the root directory Otherwise you should manually specify the full path and file name TFTP IP Address The IP address of the TFTP server on which the file to be downloaded is stored This address is set by default to the management system s internal TFTP server IP address but can be changed to any external TFTP server IP address If you select two or three actions then each action will take place only after the successful completion of the previous action selecting only the Download to Shadow and Set as Operational Version options is not a valid combination The selected action s will be performed on the devices included in the Select Equipment section Click on the Add button to open equipment selector for adding devices to the table If Download to Shadow action was selected the equipment selector will include only relevant managed devices according to the type of the selected 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Software Upgrade Task 9 4 3 software file Macro BTSs and Mini Centralized ASN GW for an npu file Micro Outdoor BTSs for an AU Micro file The information displayed for each selected device includes details of the Shadow Operational and Current versions Click on the Remove button to delete selected entries from the
283. ons are available below the table Button Description Add QoS Rule Adds a new entry to the Bearer Plane QoS Rules table and opens the QoS Rule Parameters Editor allowing to configure the new rule s parameter 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 226 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Button Description Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table Note that the default rules Rule Number 1 and 2 int_default and ext_default respectively cannot be deleted The QoS Rule Parameters Editor displays the following parameters for the new selected rule Parameter Description Marking Rule Name The name of the QoS marking rule A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device The name of an existing rule cannot be modified Rule Status The status of the rule Enable or Disable The default is Enable Condition Rule Applied on Interface The type of interface for which the bearer plane QoS rule is defined Internal R4 R6 tunnel External R1 or ANY The default is ANY The Interface type of an existing rule cannot be modified Service Flow Data Delivery Type The type of service provided as an input parameter for the bearer plane QoS rule UGS RTVR NRTVR BE ERTVR or ANY The default is ANY The Service Flow Data Delivery Type of an existing rule cannot be modified Service Flow
284. oot the NPU to apply changed IP address on these interfaces ASN GW Pools Page The ASN GW Pools page is not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The ASN GW pools are part of the optional Load Balancing feature The Load Balancing feature provides a WiMAX operator with the capability to build resilient ASN infrastructure using ASN GW redundancy Every BS is provisioned with a list of redundant ASN GWs pool The BS applies round robin mechanism in order to pick an Authenticator for each MS that performs initial network entry This should eventually distribute the load between Anchor ASN GWs Geographical site backup can be achieved by using different priority of ASN GW pools 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW da Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity pee At the unit NPU level up to two pools with different priorities each with up to 10 ASN GWs can be defined Each BS defined in the unit will inherit these pools It should be noted the ASN GW defined in the BS as the Default Authenticator see R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Tab on page 272 will be automatically included in the list of ASN GWs in the Primary Pool although it will not be shown as one of the ASN GWs in the pool 7 Ep after offre on 10 10 144 35 Configuring Equipment ee ASN GW Pools ASN GW Primary Poot ASN GW Secondary Pool Aw IP Addr ASH GW IP Address 1 6 3 3 3 p 2 2 2 1 2 10 10 12
285. operational status of the Ethernet port Up or Down Administrative State Read only The administrative status of the port Up or Down Negotiation Read only The mode for negotiating the port speed and the duplex half or full status with the link partner The options are Auto and Manual Port Speed Read only The port speed to be used for the physical interface The available options are 10 100 and 1000 Mbps Duplex Mode Read only The duplex status for the interface Full Duplex or Half Duplex Bearer VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the bearer interface used for enabling bearer IP domain connectivity When the Unified connectivity mode is selected the NMS server is also connected using the bearer interface The available range is 11 100 110 4094 The default is 11 Configurable only ina Macro BTS operating in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology see Section 7 4 1 2 In a Mini Centralized ASN GW and a Macro BTS operating in Centralized ASN GW ASN Topology this parameter is configurable in the ASN GW Bearer Interface page see ASN GW Bearer Interface Page on page 176 If the value is other than the default 11 it will be indicated in the Backhaul VLAN Translation table 7 5 1 1 2 Cascade Port The Cascade Port section includes the following read only parameters of the Cascade Ethernet port all port s configurable parameters can be configured only via CLI Parameter Description O
286. or Create Mode The name of an existing Service Interface cannot be updated The default is an empty string which is not a valid value Description An optional brief description of the service interface A string of up to 70 characters The default is null 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Parameter Description Type Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing service interface The type of service interface IP in IP VLAN QinQ The default is IP in IP Tunnel Destination IP Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing service interface Applicable only for IP in IP service interface The destination IPv4 address that indicates the point of termination of the tunnel for the service interface Must be unique among all the Host Interfaces IPs Bearer Local Management Internal Management External Management and existing instances of Service Interface s Tunnel Destination IP Address and Default Gateway IP Address Shall not be in the subnet of any Mgmt interface i e Local External and Internal The default is 0 0 0 0 must be changed to a valid value when creating a new Service Interface Enable Checksum Applicable only for IP in IP service interfaces Indicates whether or not the tunnel checksum feature is enabled yes or no The default is no Service VLAN ID
287. or and Outdoor and for the Mini Centralized ASN GW Appropriate note will indicate pages or parameters that are applicable not applicable for all device types In This Chapter E Using the Device Manager on page 128 HM Introduction to Device Management on page 132 E Equipment View Page for Macro BTS Equipment on page 134 E Site Page on page 140 E Connectivity on page 147 E SNMP Managers Tab on page 168 E Equipment on page 181 E ASN GW on page 211 E BS on page 243 E Site Sector on page 278 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW er Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Using the Device Manager el Using the Device Manager Introduction to the Device Manager on page 128 The Device Manager Components on page 129 Common Control Buttons on page 130 Working with Configuration Tables on page 130 7 1 1 Introduction to the Device Manager The Device Manager enables managing a single device and its components if applicable gt To open the Device Manager for a selected device In the Equipment Manager double click on the selected entity or select it and click on the Configure button or right click on it and select the Configure option in the pop up window The Device Manager for the selected entity opens displaying the main page for the device 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver Us
288. or more templates are selected Opens the Template Editor for the selected template allowing to edit the Name and Description of the template All other general details of an existing template cannot be modified For more details see The Template Editor on page 22 Copy Not available if two or more templates are selected Opens the Template Editor for a new template that is identical to the selected source template with the default name of Copy of lt source template name gt You can edit only the Name and Description of the new template All other general details of the new template cannot be modified For more details see The Template Editor on page 22 Configure Not available if two or more templates are selected Opens the Template Editor Configure Template for the selected template For more details refer to The Template Editor on page 22 NOTE You can also open the Template Editor by double clicking on the selected template entry 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager The Template Manager Button Description Apply Not available if two or more templates are selected Opens the Multiple Configuration Task editor allowing to initiate a Multiple Configuration task using the selected template For more details refer to Multiple Configuration Template Based Task on page 316 Delete Not available
289. or the classification of uplink and downlink traffic The Reference Classification Rule section includes two tables one listing the UL Reference Classification Rules and the other listing the DL Reference Classification Rules Note that for VLANCS service flows the linked uplink and downlink classification rules should be the same This is because the VLANCS classification rules define the CVID Customer VLAN ID that should be the same for uplink and downlink flows These tables include the following parameters Parameter Description UL DL Reference The index number of the UL or DL Reference Classification rule An Classification Rule Number auto sequential number from 1 up to a maximum of 6 generated automatically during rule addition Rule Name The name of the associated Classification Rule The available options include all the existing Classification Rules see Classification Rules Tab on page 230 The Rule Name of an existing Reference Classification Rule cannot be modified 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW The Reference Classification Rule section also includes the following buttons beneath each of the tables Button Description Add UL Rule Add DL Rule Adds a new entry to the respective table Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the respective table 7 70 Hot Lin
290. ortant Notice Important Notice This User Manual is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions E This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd Such information is supplied solely for the purpose of assisting explicitly and properly authorized users of the respective Alvarion products E No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose disclosed to any person or firm or reproduced by any means electronic and mechanical without the express prior written permission of Alvarion Ltd E The text and graphics are for the purpose of illustration and reference only The specifications on which they are based are subject to change without notice E The software described in this document is furnished under a license The software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that license E Information in this document is subject to change without notice E Corporate and individual names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted E Alvarion Ltd reserves the right to alter the product specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty E The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature and does not constitute a binding offer for the sale of the
291. ost of the configuration parameters all the common configuration parameters can be copied from one site to all others However some configuration parameters must be configured per site The Offline Configuration Tool offers a simple process for creating multiple site configuration files The Offline Configuration Tool is based on the following pre prepared inputs A A Golden site configuration backup file B An Excel file with specific configuration details for new sites For each site whose specific configuration details are provided in the Excel file the Offline Configuration Tool will generate a validated and signed XML configuration file to be used during installation Golden Site Configuration Backup File For each site type a golden site to be used as the basis template for creating configuration files for other sites should be created Site type is defined by the main properties that will be shared by all sites created using it as a basis such as frequency number and configuration of sectors and ASN Topology NOTE In the current release only Centralized ASN GW ASN Topology is supported by the Offline Configuration Tool Golden site configuration should be valid and optimal since it will be copied to multiple sites A backup file of the golden site should be prepared The XML backup file will be used as an input for the Offline Configuration Tool 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW
292. oup is configured as VPWS Mapped type IP allocation configuration is not required This type of service group makes the mapping between a unique MS flow VLAN ID used on R3 interface and a CVID The CVID can be missing For this service group type a VLAN pool need to configured The ASN GW will uniquely allocate a VLAN from the configured pool to each MS flow to be used on R3 interface A VPWS Mapped service group can be configured to support time based accounting H Service Group Service Interfaces Service Groups Service Groups Seve Group Name ONC FUNDO Servie Group Parameters 1 ES server Wis Kam mamm Amen type CH EI Service Irkerlace Name emm Lei Service Tmo wjo P Address ail DHCP Funchon Mode Server e eme Ji Lease Tne Ra a DHCP ep IP Addes 0 0 0 0 TRUAS Cane ai Acccurerg Accounting Mode Tene based EN Interin Interval CHOP Furxtion Addensses Configuration Address Alocation Timeout Primary ONS Server 9 0 0 4 Renewal Time S of Lease Time Secondary ONS Server 0 0 0 0 Ratind Time 75 lt gt of Lease Time E ci Betrest o Asp l l Dos Figure 7 33 Service Group Page Service Groups Tab The Service Groups tab includes the Service Groups table and the Editors for Service Group Parameters and DHCP Function Select an entry in the table to open the Editors for the Service Group Parameters and the DHCP Function tor for the selected service group The Service Group
293. owed UL MCS based on measured DL CINR The options are Very High High Medium Low The default is Very High the default in the device is High 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 7 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template 4 5 2 4 Beam Forming Tab applicable only for Macro BTS Ranging L Feedback Arie Power Corkral Beam Forming Management CxS Modo Create Update e firs Sy deling on a elected property name you ca add k to this fiari 8 L 7 Cabration Attomsster Leg vs Deeg Figure 4 33 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Beam Forming Tab The Beam Forming parameter is Parameter Description Calibration Attenuator Not applicable for 2 channels AU Macro Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS Applicable only for Beam Forming DL Diversity Mode The calibration attenuation used to help mitigate potential out of band interference to beam forming calibration caused by other base stations The options are No Attenuation Used Low Attenuation High Attenuation The default is No Attenuation Used the default in the device is Low Attenuation 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template 4 5 2 5 Management Tab Rango Feedback Mie ds Pane Corkral Beam Forming Beamet L Made CCo Updatn OD Fiters By checking an a selected
294. pageldt A S de Manager Server 10 10 167 117 User admir Figure 10 1 Equipment File Manager You can use the Criteria Select Filters for viewing only files that meet one or several selection criteria The read only details of displayed files are Parameter Description Region The location associated with the selected equipment in the database of the management system BTS Number The BTS number Site ID as configured in the device 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Gi Device Driver User Manual Chapter 10 The File Manager Equipment File Manager Parameter Description BTS Name The name of the BTS as configured in the device NE Type The device type Site IP The IP address of the device SW Version The running SW version used by the device when the file was created File Name The name of the file The name includes the data and time at which the file was created by the source device using the real time clock of the device The format is E bkupCrtCfg file lt date amp time gt xml gz E bkupOlderCfg file lt date amp time gt xml gz E bkupLogging lt date amp time gt log gz E performance ptf_ lt date amp time gt xml gz Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility File Type The type of file E bkupCrtCfg A configuration backup file requested for current configuration E bkupOlderCfg A configuration backup file requested for an older configuration E bkupLogg
295. pe and the properties of the actual ODU Type These details are available only for an existing and connected ODU that is associated to a sector Parameter Description ODU Type The installed ODU type or ODU not Associated to sector Frequency Band The frequency band supported by the installed ODU Type in MHz Maximum Tx Power The maximum Tx power available for the installed ODU Type in dBm Port Configuration The Port Configuration of the installed ODU Type 1x1 2x2 or 4x2 In addition the following ODU general properties are displayed below the Required and Installed sections Parameter Description Serial Number Read only The serial number of the ODU enclosure External Cavity Filter Existence Check to indicate the existence of an external cavity filter The default is no unchecked 7 6 2 1 2 2 Ports The Ports section includes parameters for each of the ports supported by the ODU 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment The Ports table includes the following parameters for each ODU port Parameter Description Tx Power dBm The required Tx power at the specified ODU Port in dBm Applicable only for Tx Rx ports Port 1 ina 1x1 ODU Ports 1 and 2 in a 2x2 ODU Ports 1 and 3 in a 4x2 ODU The actually available range depends on ODU Type The upper lim
296. pened displaying the status of the running task If the task is Inactive the Backup Task Editor for the selected task is displayed 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 297 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Backup Configuration Task Backup Configuration Task Name backup_task_20090827130208 File Type Site Configuration Backup current device configuration Backup an older device configuration Source Equipment BTS Number BTS Name NE Type IP Address 233 4M Macro BTS 10 10 144 35 CEG Gi kel Eed Ta kes Figure 9 4 Backup Task Editor The Backup Task editor comprises the following fields Parameter Description Task Name The name of the task A string of 1 to 128 characters The default name includes the task s type and the date and time at which the task was created backup_task_ lt yyyymmddhhmmsss gt Note that when using the Task Wizard the default task name automatically replaces the name selected in the first Create New Task step File Type The type of backup file E Site Configuration The entire site configuration E Logging The NPU SW modules log files 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Backup Configuration Task Parameter Description Backup Current Older Available below the File Type selection field only if the selected File Type is Configuration Options Site Configurat
297. perational State Read only The operational status of the Ethernet port Up or Down Administrative State Read only The administrative status of the port Up or Down Negotiation Read only The mode for negotiating the port speed and the duplex half or full status with the link partner The options are Auto and Manual Port Speed Read only The port speed to be used for the physical interface The available options are 10 100 and 1000 Mbps Duplex Mode Read only The duplex status for the interface Full Duplex or Half Duplex 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity 7 5 1 1 3 Management Port The Management Port section includes the following read only parameters of the Management Ethernet port all port s configurable parameters can be configured only via CLI Parameter Description Operational State Read only The operational status of the Ethernet port Up or Down Administrative State Read only The administrative status of the port Up or Down Negotiation Read only The mode for negotiating the port speed and the duplex half or full status with the link partner The options are Auto and Manual Port Speed Read only The port speed to be used for the physical interface The default is 100 Mbps Duplex Mode Read only The duplex status for the interface Full Duple
298. performance between uplink and down link To compensate for possible differences due to HW of the ODU a special low level calibration signal is transmitted periodically in each link During the time this calibration signal is transmitted all other radio links of the same BS and all its neighbors should not transmit to reduce potential interference The Beam Forming mechanism ensures that all neighboring BSs operating in Beam Forming mode will enter into silent mode when necessary A unit operating in Matrix A B mode should enter into silent mode when necessary based on frame number information only if it has neighboring BSs operating in Beam Forming mode The Neighbor Beam Forming parameter Indicates whether any of the neighboring BSs operates in Beam Forming mode The default is No Sounding Shift Used Read only Applicable only for Beam forming DL diversity mode The sounding zone shift used by the Beam Forming mechanism 0 7 MSs are transmitting sounding frames in the uplink to enable the BS to decide the weights to be allocated for downlink transmissions Sounding is sequence of Golay sequence codes The Sounding Shift is the seed for this sequence and different Sounding Shifts are used providing reduced interference among neighboring BSs RCID Usage Each transmitted MAP includes allocations for each MS it served using the MS s CID for identifying each MS The original CID includes 16 bits which is significantly
299. ple service profiles with multiple service flows and classification rules The SFA page includes the following tabs E PHS Rules Tab E Classification Rules Tab In addition the Service Profile sub node of the SFA node enables creating new service profiles and viewing modifying service profiles 7 7 4 1 PHS Rules Tab The PHS Rules tab enables defining rules for Packet Header Suppression PHS PHS rules are provisioned on a per service profile name basis PHS Rules Classification Rules PHS Rules G Enable PHS Support PHS Rule Number Name Field Value Mask Value bits Verify Value I Size Value Bytes Add PHS Rule Delete E ge Figure 7 35 SFA Page PHS Rules Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW The PHS Rules tab includes the Enable PHS Support check box and the PHS Rules table Parameter Description Enable PHS Support Indicates whether or not PHS is enabled or disabled This setting applies to all PHS rules The default is Disable The PHS Rules table includes the following parameters Parameter Description PHS Rule Number The index number of the PHS rule An auto sequential number from 1 up to a maximum of 255 generated automatically during rule creation Name The name of the PHS rule 1 30 characters The default is null Must be
300. process and pressing Apply the new antenna will be added to the list Its number will be the first free number The list can include up to 28 antennas for a Macro Indoor BTS up to 24 antennas for a Macro Outdoor BTS and up to 2 antennas for Micro Outdoor BTS Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the Antennas List e IMPORTANT l An associated antenna specified in a Site Sector Association cannot be deleted For more details refer to Site Sector lt gt Page on page 279 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 208 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment The Antennas Parameters Editor section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Antenna Product Type The antenna type The available options includes a list of default and standard antennas The default is default1 portV The Antenna Product Type of an associated Antenna cannot be modified Information Read only string indicating the characteristics of the Antenna according to the Antenna Product Type The string structure is lt type gt N P A E G F lt EDT Supported gt lt EDT Min gt lt EDT Max gt lt EDT Step gt lt Frequency Min gt lt Frequency Max gt where type part number or one of the default antennas N Number of Ports P Polarization per port Available options are V Vertical H Horizontal 45 45 2 ports DS 45 45 45 45 4 ports DS
301. product described herein 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual About This Manual About This Manual This manual describes how to use AlvariSTAR and AlvariCRAFT Device Driver Version 3 1 for managing 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW equipment running SW Versions 3 0 10 NPU and AU using NMS Infrastructure Version 4 8 This manual is intended for personnel responsible for managing the equipment system using the AlvariSTAR Element Management System and or the AlvariCRAFT Local CRAFT Utility It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the operation and use of AlvariSTAR AlvariCRAFT and with the operation and administration of 4Motion BTS system components and or the Mini Centralized ASN GW For more information refer to the AlvariSTAR and AlvariCRAFT User Manual and to the relevant equipment System Manuals In this manual Network Management System refers to AlvariSTAR and Local CRAFT Utility refers to AlvariCRAFT Unless otherwise stated all features are applicable to both AlvariSTAR and AlvariCRAFT Limitations on AlvariCRAFT due to the single device restriction are noted in a Note specific to the application as follows LOCAL CRAFT NOTE This feature is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Contents Chapter 1 Enabling Dis Covel y cis wsiccinvinerwasdicrsaisvanidlpcasnatekatat iedtageersecsensmoes 1 Chapter 2 U
302. ption ACL Number The ACL number ACL 1 99 are Standard ACLs ACL 100 198 are Extended ACLs ACL 199 is the default extended ACL that is pre configured in the system and is not attached to any interface ACL 199 is reserved for QoS marking rules You cannot configure Allow Deny rules for ACL 199 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description ACL Name The name of the ACL The default name is the ACL Number ACL Active State The state of the ACL Activate or Deactivate The default is Deactivate A new ACL can be created only with Active State Deactivated Rule s parameters can be modified only if the state of the ACL is Deactivated If ACL Applicable Interface is None its state cannot be set to Activate excluding ACL 199 ACL Applicable Interface The interface s to which the ACL applies None ASN GW All AU ASN GW amp All AU In Mini Centralized ASN GW only the None and ASN GW options are applicable In a Macro BTS operating in Centralized ASN GW ASN Topology only the None and All AU options are applicable The default is ASN GW The ACL table section also includes the following buttons Button Description Add ACL Adds a new ACL entry to the table Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table An ACL with Active State UP can
303. r Description BTS Number The ID number of the device The BTS Number Site ID is used by the management system as identifier of the device and must be unique in the managed network The range is from 0 to 999999 The default value 0 is not a valid BTS Number it indicates that the BTS Number was not configured and a valid BTS Number must be configured A BTS with Site Number 0 will not be discovered by the management system Since the BTS Number is used by the management system to identify the device it is highly recommended not to modify it If necessary you must follow the BTS Number Change process described below BTS Name The name of the device An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 32 characters BTS Location The location of the device e g 21 Main Street 2nd Floor An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 70 characters Product Type A read only description of the product type Location in Site and Rack An optional description of the physical location of the device in the site rack A string of up to 32 characters Contact Person The name of the site contact person An optional descriptive parameter A string of up to 32 characters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Oo Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Site Page 1 IMPORTANT BTS Number Site ID Change Process Change the BTS Number Site ID using either the management syste
304. r Interface of the BS parameters US GH SH Sete ing EG R6 R8 Bearer Interface 0 0 2 55 55 55 Besrer Authenbcation QoS Marking Rules Bearer Interface 1P Address IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Defa Gateway Men Del sult Gateway Connectivity Ratus ASN GW Pech Beat Primary Poot ASN GW Prissary Pool ASN GW Secondary Pool address Connecthvty Stanis 1 See e Ann Cone Figure 7 51 R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Tab The Bearer tab includes the following sections E Bearer Interface E ASN GW Load Balancing 7 8 3 1 1 Bearer Interface Parameter Description IP Address The IP address of the bearer interface of the BS Must be unique in the network All BS bearer interfaces of the unit should be in the same subnet together with the NPU s bearer interface in Distributed ASN GW Topology IP Subnet Mask The IP subnet mask of the bearer interface of the BS Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway of the bearer interface of the BS Must be in the same subnet with the BS bearer IP Address 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Ga Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the bearer interface of the BS In a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS it is not configurable and is equal to the NPU Bearer VLAN ID see L1 L2 Connectivity Page on page 147
305. r also to Mass Neighboring Task on page 313 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS 7 8 2 2 Radio Advanced Page The Radio Advanced page includes the following tabs M Radio Advanced Page Feedback Tab E Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab M Radio Advanced Page Management Tab E Radio Advanced Page QoS Tab 7 8 2 2 1 Radio Advanced Page Feedback Tab The Feedback tab enables defining various ranging parameters Advanced 0 0 2 55 55 55 Feedback Power Control Management Q05 Ranging Start of Ranging Codes fo Iv IR COMA Allocations Period jz Frames di Maimun Col fadus em ra 1 Sarl 7 An Cons g Figure 7 47 Radio Advanced Page Feedback Tab The Feedback tab includes the following ranging parameters Parameter Description Start of Ranging Codes The starting number of the group of codes used for the uplink The available options are 0 64 128 192 The default is 0 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Gi Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description IR CDMA Allocation Period The period of IR CDMA allocations in frames The available options are 1 2 4 6 8 10 The default is 2 In the current release actual value is always 2 the configured value is ignored Maximum Cell Ra
306. r another Duplicate Site file Required SW Version Select the required SW version of the source equipment Configuration File Name Click on the Browser button to open either the Backup File Selector or Duplicate Site File Selector according to the selected File Type Only files from devices that match the specified NE Type that used the specified SW Version at the time of file creation will be available for selection BTS Number Read only The BTS Number Site ID of the source equipment for the selected source file New Site 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard Parameter Description BTS Number The BTS Number Site ID of the new site The Duplicate Site configuration file can be loaded only to a site with the specified BTS Number Site ID which must be unique in the network In case the user enters an existing BTS Number the system prompts him to correct the mistake or to confirm the entered number The later is applicable when preparing a file for an already discovered site 5 2 4 Click Next to open the next screen of the wizard Twin Site Creation Wizard Step 2 z gt Ol roseg manager x G Location Manager x d Dec Settings x D taskMannger x yi Duplicate sre x Twin Site Creation Ste Properties UTS Name 00 00 BTS Location ooo 1 Du L
307. rable only when creating a new Service Group The default is IP Service Interface Name Applicable only for IP Service Groups The pre defined service interface alias used as the data path for traffic towards the core network Configurable only when creating a new Service Group Note that a Service Interface can be associated only to a single Service Group 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description DHCP Function Mode Applicable only for IP Service Groups The DHCP function mode E Server The ASN GW function as a DHCP server that allocates an IP address to the MS from the local pool in the non HA mode E Relay The IP address is obtained using an external DHCP server in the non HA mode E Proxy Non HA mode In Non HA mode the DHCP proxy assigns the MS the IP address that was received from AAA in the MS profile In HA mode the DHCP proxy assigns to the MS the IP address received in the MS profile or obtains the IP address from HA using the mobile IP Configurable only when creating a new Service Group The default is Server Note that upon selection of the Relay option the other parameters available in the Editors change to reflect the unique functionality of this mode Service Time W O IP Address Time of waiting for DHCP request when initial Data Path is established If expires MS should b
308. rameter Description Rule Name The name of the associated Classification Rule Must be a name of a Classification Rule that already exists in the target managed objects 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Parameter Description Service Profile Config Name The name alias of the Service Profile Must be a Service Profile Name that exists in the target managed objects Service Flow Flow ID The Flow ID of the Service Flow Must be a Flow ID belonging to the specified Service Profile that already exists in the target managed objects 4 4 6 Hot Lining Page The Hot Lining page comprises the following tabs E ASN Hot Lining Tab E Hot Lining Profiles Tab E Hot Lining Access List Tab 4 4 6 1 ASN Hot Lining Tab Asn Hol Uni Hot Lining Proties Hot Leg Access Lat Mode Create Update br Fiters By cicking on a selected property name you can add k to this fiter LI Het Liring Enable D Le vs Dore Figure 4 22 The ASN GW Template Hot Lining Page ASN Hot Lining Tab The ASN Hot Lining tab include the following parameter 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Parameter Description Hot Lining Enable Indicates whether or not the Hot Lining feature is enabled or dis
309. range is from 1 to 1000 promil The default is 1000 NRT VR The threshold for excessive DL dropped packets ratio in promils of DL packets in all NRT VR services which when exceeded triggers an NRT VR service alarm The range is from 1 to 1000 promil The default is 1000 UGS The threshold for excessive DL dropped packets ratio in promils of DL packets in all UGS services which when exceeded triggers a UGS service alarm The range is from 1 to 1000 promil The default is 1000 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS Parameter Description ERT VR The threshold for excessive DL dropped packets ratio in promils of DL packets in all ERT VR services which when exceeded triggers an ERT VR service alarm The range is from 1 to 1000 promil The default is 1000 Alarm Thresholds for noise and interference level Uplink Median Noise The uplink median noise level represents the median value of the noise floor histogram If the uplink median noise level exceeds this value an excessive uplink median noise alarm will be generated The value is in dBm tone The default value of 124 is set to 3 dB above the default value of the Target NI parameter see Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab on page 265 The range is from 135 to 100 dBm 7 8 2 2 4 Radio Advanced Page QoS Tab The QoS tab ena
310. ration editor will open on the right side enabling you to configure row parameters Select the parameters to be configured by marking the check box to the left a parameter name and configure the required value for each selected parameter Parameters that were not selected will be configured with the default value The mandatory row identifier s are always selected and must be configured The row identifier s must be defined taking into account the relevant existing row identifier in the target objects that will participate in the Multiple Configuration task using the template A row with row identifier s that already exist in the managed object will be rejected If the table in a target device is full the create new entry operation will be rejected After completing configuration of the new row click on the Save button at the bottom of the page The new row s will be displayed with the configured identifier s As long as the row is colored green not saved yet you can remove it by clicking on the Revert button above the table Select a previously saved row colored black to edit its parameters To delete a previously saved row select it and click on the Remove button above the table The row will be colored red Actual deletion will take effect after clicking on the Save button Note that there are some dependencies among certain tables that should be taken into account when designing Create Mode templates For example if you wan
311. rd Properties E Control E Automatic Configuration Backup 7 6 1 2 1 Card Properties The Card Properties section includes the following read only parameters of the NPU card Parameter Description Slot Number The number of the slot allocated to the NPU card In current release the NPU can be installed only in slot 5 Installed The status of the NPU card installation Must be Yes Serial Number The serial number of the NPU card HW Version Number The hardware version of the NPU card HW Revision Number The hardware revision number 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description Operational SW Version Number The version of the default software image used for rebooting the NPU after system reset Shadow SW Version Number The version of the downloaded software image that can be used to boot up the NPU Current Running SW Source The software that is currently running on the system Operational or Shadow Refer to Software Upgrade Task on page 303 for details on loading a new SW version and managing the SW versions 7 6 1 2 2 Control The Control section enables defining the action to be taken for a Shutdown or Reset Operation Option Description Shutdown The shutdown operation will shut down the entire site IMPORTANT The system can
312. re 4 21 The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page UL Reference Classification Rule Tab Create E 58 Figure 4 22 The ASN GW Template Hot Lining Page ASN Hot Lining Tab 59 Figure 4 23 The ASN GW Template Hot Lining Page Hot Lining Profiles Tab E NOG CY E 60 Figure 4 24 The ASN GW Template Hot Lining Page Hot Lining Access List Tab Great ModE arene irsin Pee eee eee ee OE eR ae ee ene eee 61 Figure 4 25 The BS Template Radio Basic Page General Def Tab 64 Figure 4 26 The BS Template Radio Basic Page RF Tab 68 Figure 4 27 The BS Template Radio Basic Page Base Band Tab 69 Figure 4 28 The BS Template Radio Basic Page Air Frame Structure Tab 70 Figure 4 29 The BS Template Radio Basic Page Triggers Tab 73 Figure 4 30 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Ranging Tab 75 Figure 4 31 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Feedback Allocations Tab 76 Figure 4 32 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Power Control Tab 77 Figure 4 33 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Beam Forming Tab 80 Figure 4 34 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Management Tab 81 Figure 4 35 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page QOS Tab 82 Figure 4 36 The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Tab 84 Figure 4 37 The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page ASNGW Pools Tab 85 Figure 4 38 The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Authentication Tab
313. re No Attenuation Low Attenuation High Attenuation The default is Low Attenuation Required C N Levels Read Only ACK The C N in dB required for sending ACK reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB The default is 7 CO The C N in dB required for sending CAI reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for ACK 8 to Required C N Level for ACK 7 see ACK parameter above The default is 12 CDMA The C N in dB required for transmitting CDMA reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for CQI 8 to Required C N Level for CQI 7 see CQI parameter above The default is 9 QPSK 1 2 The C N in dB required for sending QPSK 1 2 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for CDMA 16 to Required C N Level for CDMA 14 see CDMA parameter above The default is 13 QPSK 3 4 The C N in dB required for sending QPSK 3 4 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for QPSK 1 2 16 to Required C N Level for QPSK 1 2 14 see QPSK 1 2 parameter above The default is 16 16 QAM 1 2 The C N in dB required for transmitting 16 QAM 1 2 reported to the MS for power control purposes
314. read only The same VLAN ID is used by all service interfaces and is configured in the L1 L2 Connectivity page seer AU Maintenance VLAN ID on page 150 In Micro Outdoor BTS the range is 1 9 11 100 110 4094 and 4096 for No VLAN The default is 14 7 6 1 3 2 2 AU Control Tab The Control tab lists the parameters that enable controlling operation of the AU H AU 4 Channels Slot 2 Card Properties Congal Lei Revet Reason Shutdorm Oper abun Shutdown Power AU to COU Porth Potz Port Porta Normal Operation v No haten lv No hitio lv No Stdn No Standown lv Retreat of Zen LH Figure 7 24 AU Slot Page Control Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment The Control tab includes the following options Parameter Description Last Reset Reason Read only The reason for the last reset of the AU Possible reasons include Unknown Health Monitoring Failed User Initiated Configuration Failure Internal Errors Shutdown Operation Not applicable for Micro Outdoor BTS The type of operation to be performed Normal Operation Shutdown disable power to card or Reset The default is Normal Operation 7 6 2 7 6 2 1 The Shutdown Power AU to ODU Radio section ODU in a Macro BTS Radio in a Micro Outdoor BTS enables control of the power from each port It also enables controlling the operation o
315. red connectivity mode use the command npu show connectivity mode To change the connectivity mode to Out Of Band use the command npu config connectivity mode outband VLANs Translation In Band Connectivity Mode The Data port operates in VLAN aware bridging mode tagged trunk mode The values configured for VLAN ID s used on this port are the VLAN IDs used internally These are the VLAN ID for the bearer IP interface the default is 11 and in In Band Connectivity mode the VLAN ID of the external management IP interface the default is 12 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW O Device Driver User Manual Chapter 1 Enabling Discovery When using In Band connectivity via the Data port if the value of the VLAN ID used for management in the backbone differs from the value configured for the external management interface the external management VLAN ID should be translated accordingly It is recommended to configure also VLAN translation for the bearer interface To enable VLAN translation and configure the required VLANs translation run the following commands the examples are for backhaul Data VLAN ID 30 and Management VLAN ID 31 assuming the default VLAN IDs for external management and bearer interfaces a Enable the Data port configuration mode npu config interface gigabitethernet 0 10 b Enable VLAN translation npu config if vlan mapping enable c Translate data VLAN 11 to the backhaul data VLAN 30 npu conf
316. rence Point RP towards the CSN R4 reference point toward other ASN GWs and R6 reference point toward AU BSs The R8 reference point traffic is transparently relayed between AU BSs intra or inter shelf Centralized ASN GW In this mode the NPU transparently relays R6 and R8 reference point traffic between AU BSs intra or inter shelf The ASN Topology parameter is not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW that operates always in Distributed ASN GW ASN Topology and for Micro Outdoor BTS that operated always in Centralized ASN GW ASN Topology IMPORTANT A change in ASN Topology will take effect after next reset 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW el Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Site Page 7 4 1 3 Location Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The Location section in the Site page includes the following read only parameters Parameter Description Longitude The longitude of the site The format is Ill mmm a Ill is longitude in degrees between 000 to 179 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is E east or W west Latitude The latitude of the site The format is Il mmm a ll is latitude in degrees between 00 to 89 mmm is in minutes between 000 and 999 a is N north or S south Altitude The altitude in meters of the site The Altitude is in meters from 300 0 to 9000 0 The Location parameters are configurable in the GPS page see
317. rom the Primary Server to Secondary Server or Vice Versa The default is Switch Over the default in the device is Disable Redundancy Indicates whether AAA server redundancy is supported If enabled the ASN GW will try switching to the secondary server if the primary server does not respond and vide versa The default is Enable the default in the device is Disable Redundancy cannot be disabled if the Current Server is the Secondary Server 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template 4 4 1 2 AAA Access Tab LAMA Grech AM Access Mode in Update Fitters By cheling on a selected property name you can add k to this fiker E GMT Time Zone Offset 5 O wan Classfier Ut Aligrenect x Refresh v Swe A Figure 4 6 The ASN GW Template AAA Page AAA Access Tab The AAA Access parameters are Parameter Description GMT Time Zone Offset The time zone offset in seconds from GMT at the NAS The range is from 0 the default to 86400 seconds VLAN Classifier Bit Alignment Defines how to transfer VLAN ID between R3 and R6 E MSB Shift a When transferring classifier VID value from R3 side to R6 side the binary value of the 12 least significant bits in R3 TLV will be copied and pasted as most significant bits in R6 TLV b When transferring classifier VID value from R6 to R3 t
318. rough any of Alvarion s authorized resellers are subject to the following warranty and product liability terms and conditions Exclusive Warranty With respect to the Software Alvarion warrants the correct functionality according to the attached documentation for a period of fourteen 14 month from invoice date the Warranty Period During the Warranty Period Alvarion may release to its Customers software updates which include additional performance improvements and or bug fixes upon availability the Warranty Bug fixes temporary patches and or workarounds may be supplied as Software updates Additional hardware if required to install or use Software updates must be purchased by the Customer Alvarion will be obligated to support solely the two 2 most recent Software major releases ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY PURCHASER S OR ANY THIRD PERSON S MISUSE NEGLIGENCE IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR IMPROPER TESTING UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE OR BY ACCIDENT FIRE LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD Disclaimer a The Software is sold on an AS IS basis Alvarion its affiliates or its licensors MAKE NO WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS A
319. roup refer to the Performance Monitoring document gt To open the Performance Monitoring Viewer In the Equipment Manager select one device whose state is Enabled right click on the entry and select the Performance option in the pop up window The Performance Monitoring Viewer for the selected device will open The Performance viewer include three sections the counter group selection section the counters selection section and the graph section For convenient viewing of the required information you can change the relative sizes of the sections by dragging the line separating them In addition there are several general control buttons at the bottom side of the window 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 8 The Performance Monitoring Viewer The Counters Group Selection Section P ao X N 4s pee gt Ri Interface Traffic Statistic C ASN GW e s G B5 1 4 217 i O 65 1 4 20 Name yael Scale 100 Geet re J Gabriel 2 3_2 5BF PM Monitoring stolid R1 Interface Traffic Statistic Postive Only AR Gl iamber of OL bursts trani oj 1 s O pi Interface Traffic Qu O Namber of Dt bursts tran o 1 E show Legend O Re Interface G Number of D bursts tran UR s t Number of DL bursts tran D ou EES Number of Total DL bursts BW 12 2 1 50 a Graph 30 Controls 20 10 E T N ee Be Counter Group Counters El Ae Graphs Area Se
320. rs related to Idle Mode Added Basic Rate parameters moved from previous Radio Advanced Page Rate Adaptation Tab Removed Max Sub Burst Size and Target Packet Error Rate August 2009 Services Page Mapping Tab Removed SDU Size Updated limitation in Service Name Updated supported options for R1 Profile Data Delivery Scheduling Type Updated limitations for R1 Profile Priority Min Reserved Traffic Rate Max Sustained Traffic Rate Latency Updated range for R6 Profile parameters Min Reserved Traffic Rate Max Sustained Traffic Rate Updated range for Map to R1 Profile parameters Min Reserved Traffic Rate Max Sustained Traffic Rate August 2009 Duplicate Site Manager New name was previously Offline Configuration Manager August 2009 Duplicate Site Manager Twin Site Creation wizard Step 2 Modified structure Updated range for Site Address Added IP Routing section Added comments on applicability of Connectivity parameters August 2009 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Duplicate Site Manager Twin Site Creation wizard Step 3 Added Service Interfaces section August 2009 Duplicate Site Manager Twin Site Creation wizard Step 4 Updated names of some parameters Removed Number Of Sub Channels UL Data Zone Added Paging Group ID Updated ra
321. rt Unique Parameters File 1 Use the Select File button to open the Open window allowing you to browse to the location of the pre prepared Excel file Select the required Excel file and click Open 2 Click Next If the number of BSs defined for each site in the Excel file does not match the number of BSs in the selected backup file an error message indicating the mismatch will be displayed 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW B Device Driver User Manual Chapter 6 The Offline Configuration Tool Using the Offline Configuration Tool Site Site 1 Number of Fully configured BS mismatch between backup file 2 and unique file 1 Figure 6 6 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Number of BSs Mismatch Message 2 If there are any detectable configuration errors in the file such as ifa parameter that should be unique appears more than once or a non valid value an Invalid Unique Parameters window will be displayed indicating the detected errors bsPagingGroupId Parameter bsPagingGroupId should have unique values but the value 9 appears more than once npulpIfip Parameter npulplflp with value 10 10 142 194 should be an IP Address in the same subnet as the External Management 10 10 141 168 255 255 255 0 from the backup file Figure 6 7 Offline Configuration Tool Wizard Invalid Unique Parameters Message The next step will become available only if a usable Excel file is selected 4Motion BTS and Min
322. rwise it is the read only data received from the GPS receiver SNTP server The format is hh mm ss dd mm yyyy hh between 0 and 23 mm between 0 and 59 ss between 0 and 59 dd mm with usual date and month rules yyyy between 2006 to 9999 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description Read GPS Time Applicable for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS when a GPS receiver is used The interval after which the NPU should obtain the GPS time for frame synchronization and send it to the AUs The available options are E Hourly E Daily BW Monthly E Yearly The default is Daily Read GPS Time At Applicable for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS when a GPS receiver is used The time when the NPU should obtain the GPS time for frame synchronization The format is hh mm ss dd mm hh between 0 and 23 mm between 0 and 59 ss between 0 and 59 dd mm with usual date and month rules Only relevant components are available for configuration according to the selected Read GPS Time The default is 04 05 00 21 04 Local Time and Date A read only display of the local date and time using 24 hour clock as calculated using the UTC Time and Date and taking into account the Time Zone Offset From UTC and Daylight Saving Time parameters The format is hh mm ss dd mm yyyy For example 13 04 23 12 07 2006 Daylight Saving The Dayligh
323. ry Topic Description Date Issued Enabling Discovery Added support of SNMP v2c March 2010 Using the Equipment Manager Revised March 2010 Managing a Single Device Completely revised and updated to reflect the March 2010 following New structure new products new features new removed modified parameters improved descriptions Template Manager Completely revised and updated to reflect March 2010 updated concept new features new removed modified parameters improved descriptions Task Manager Multiple Can be opened also from the Template March 2010 Configuration Task Manager New Preview Only option Duplicate Site Manager Updated to reflect support for all Macro BTS June 2010 devices Indoor Outdoor and Mini Centralized ASN GW Updated order of screens in the process of new site creation Managing a Single Device Service Group Page Service Flow Parameters Editor Template Manager The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page Service Flow Tab Updated range for Media Flow Type up to 15 SW Version 3 0 10 December 2010 Managing a Single Device AU Slot Page Control Tab Updated options for Shutdown Power AU to ODU Radio Added Rx Only option SW Version 3 0 10 December 2010 Managing a Single Device R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page Bearer Tab Template Manager The BS Template R6 R8 Bearer Interface Page ASNGW Pools Tab Updated configuration rule for enabling the Secondary Poo
324. ry DNS Server IP Address of the first DNS Server to be provisioned to MS from this Group The default is 0 0 0 0 In the Proxy mode this value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept Secondary DNS Server IP Address of the second DNS Server to be provisioned to MS from this Group The default is 0 0 0 0 In the Proxy mode this value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept IP Address Pool Applicable only in Server mode The range of IP addresses in the address pool From To The defaults are From 0 0 0 0 To 255 255 255 255 DHCP IP addresses in the pool shall not overlap with the DHCP address pool defined in an existing service group and with IP addresses of host interfaces Bearer External Management Internal Management and Local Management Add Excluded IP Address Applicable only in Server mode Enables you to add an IP address to the Excluded IP address List see below To add an IP address enter it in the text box and click on the Add button The default added address is 0 0 0 0 Excluded IP Address List Applicable only in Server mode The list of IP addresses that are to be excluded from the address pool The list can contain up to 16384 IP addresses To remove one or several IP addresses from the list select the addresses to be removed and click on the Delete button Subnet Mask Applicable only in Server Proxy mode I
325. s HTTP Redirect the string should be start with http or https Enable Profile Enables Disables the hot lining profile The default is Disable Profile parameters can be updated only when Enable Profile is set to Disable 7 7 5 4 Filter Rules Up to 16 Filter Rules may be associated to each Hot Lining Profile Filter Rules can be added updated only when the Enable Profile parameter in the device is set to Disable 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW The Filter Rules table includes the following parameters for each entry Parameter Description Rule Number The index number of the filter rule An auto sequential number generated automatically during filter addition The Rule Number serves also as the rule priority affecting the order of checking the rules for a match The first found match is applied Rule Name The unique per hot line profile name of the rule A string of 1 30 characters The name of an existing filter rule cannot be modified Direction The direction for which the rule should be applied Uplink or Downlink The default is Uplink IP Address If Direction is Downlink then this is the downlink Source IP Address If Direction is Uplink then this is the uplink Destination IP Address 255 255 255 255 means not applicable ignore this condition The default is 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask The Sub
326. s Profile Name The name alias of the Hot Lining Profile A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be a name of a Profile that already exists in the target managed objects Filter Rules Direction The direction for which the rule should be applied Uplink or Downlink The default is Uplink Filter Rules IP Address If Direction is Downlink then this is the downlink Source IP Address If Direction is Uplink then this is the uplink Destination IP Address 255 255 255 255 means not applicable ignore this condition The default is 0 0 0 0 in the device the default is 255 255 255 255 Filter Rules Mask The Subnet Mask associated with the configured IP Address The default is 0 0 0 0 in the device the default is 255 255 255 255 Filter Source Port Start The minimum value of source TCP UDP port range The default is 0 Filter Source Port Stop The maximum value of source TCP UDP port range The default is 0 in the device the default is 65535 Filter Rules Destination Port Start The minimum value of destination TCP UDP port range The default is 0 Filter Rules Destination Port Stop The maximum value of destination TCP UDP port range The default is 0 in the device the default is 65535 Filter Rules DSCP Start The minimum value of DSCP range The default is 0 Filter Rules DSCP Stop The maximum value of DSCP range The default is 0 in the device the default is 63 Filter Action A
327. s for each service flow of the service profile Parameter Description Flow Number The index number of the service flow An auto sequential number from 1 up toa maximum of 12 generated automatically during creation of a new service flow Flow ID The flow ID of the service flow for which the service flow configuration mode is enabled Select an entry to open the Service Flow Parameters Editor and enable the Reference Classification Rule Editor for the selected service flow The following buttons are available below the table Button Description Add Adds a new entry to the table and opens the Service Flow Parameters Editor and enable the Reference Classification Rule Editor allowing to configure parameters for the new service flow Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the table 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW 7 7 4 3 2 3 Service Flow Parameters Editor The Service Flow Parameters Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Flow ID The flow ID of the service flow A number in the range 1 255 unique per service profile The Flow ID of an existing service flow cannot be changed Convergence Sublayer Type Convergence Sublayer Type IPv4CS or vlancs VLANCS service flows can be defined only for the Default Service Profile The de
328. s not received in RADIUS Access Accept The default is 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Server Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Proxy mode IP Address of the second DNS Server to be provisioned to MS from this Group In the Proxy mode this value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept The default is 0 0 0 0 Renewal Time of Lease Time Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Proxy mode The interval as a percentage of the Lease Time after which the MS can request renewal of a lease that has expired This value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept The renewal Time must be lower than rebind Time The range is from 1 to 100 The default is 1 the default in the device is 50 Rebind Time of Lease Time Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Proxy mode The rebind interval as a percentage of the Lease Time This is passed to the MS DHCP client The range is from 1 to 99 This value is used if appropriate parameter is not received in RADIUS Access Accept The range is from 1 to 99 The default is 1 the default in the device is 75 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Parameter Description Offer Reuse Time s Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Proxy mode The interval in seconds within which the MS should send a DHC
329. s table includes the following read only parameters for each of the existing service groups Parameter Description Service Group Number The index number of the Service Group Name The name alias of the Service Group 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description DHCP Function Mode Applicable only for IP Service Groups The DHCP function mode Server Relay Proxy The following buttons are available below the Service Groups table Button Description Add Adds a new entry to the Service Groups table and opens the Editors for the Service Group Parameters and DHCP Function allowing to configure the required parameters Delete Deletes the selected entry or several selected entries from the Service Groups table A Service Group cannot be deleted if it is assigned to a Service Flow Refer to Service Profile Page on page 235 A Service Group with an associated VLAN Service Interface cannot be deleted if the Enable Service VLAN is set to enable The Service Group Parameters Editor section includes the following parameters Parameter Description Name The name alias of the service group A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Configurable only when creating a new Service Group Type The Service Group s type IP VPWS QinQ VPWS Transparent VPWS Mapped Configu
330. s the following tabs AAA Client Tab AAA Access Tab 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW ASN GW Template Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template 4 4 1 1 AAA Client Tab AAA Client L ABA Access Mode Create Update Delete Filters By clicking on a selected property name you can add it to this filter Primary Server IP Address G Secondary Server IP address 0 Radius Shared Secret UI switch over D O Redundancy x E Figure 4 5 The ASN GW Template AAA Page AAA Client Tab The AAA Client parameters are Parameter Description Primary Server IP Address The IPv4 address of the primary AAA server Cannot be the same as the Secondary Server IP Address or any of the NPU IP interfaces The default is 0 0 0 0 which is not a valid address the default in the device is 172 16 0 1 Secondary Server IP Address The IPv4 address of the secondary AAA server Cannot be the same as the Primary Server IP Address or any of the NPU IP interfaces 0 0 0 0 the default means no secondary server Must be set to a valid IP address if Redundancy is enabled RADIUS Shared Secret The shared secret between the authenticator function and the AAA server A string of 1 to 49 characters The default is an empty string which is not a valid string the default in the device is default Switch Over Enable to switch f
331. selecting the parameter s clicking on each parameter name that will change to italics font blue color and configuring the filtering value The selected criteria name and filtering value for each filtering parameter will be displayed in the Filters area Only entries that match all filtering criteria will be deleted IMPORTANT If you do not select any filters all rows of the table in the target devices will be deleted excluding default pre configured entries in certain tables that cannot be deleted After completing configuration of filters for the new row click on the Save button at the bottom of the page The color of the new row will change to black 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager Configuring Templates 4 3 3 As long as the row is colored green not saved yet you can remove it by clicking on the Revert button above the table Select a previously saved row colored black to edit its parameters To delete a previously saved row select it and click on the Remove button above the table The row will be colored red Actual deletion will take effect after clicking on the Save button Note that there are some dependencies among certain tables that should be taken into account when designing Delete Mode templates For example if you want to delete a certain Service Interface that in a target device is associated with an existing Service Group you must fir
332. signed IP address The following buttons are now available in addition to the Refresh and Home buttons Button Description Retrieve All MSs Data Click to return to the previous screen displaying summary details for all MSs served by the selected device De Register MS Click to force de registration of the MS Retrieve Selected MS Full Select an entry in the MS Data table and click to retrieve from the ASN GW full Data details for the selected MS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW nl Device Driver User Manual Chapter 3 The Network Maintenance Manager Single MS De Registration 3 4 Single MS De Registration The Single MS De Registration option is used to force de registration of a specific MS Srem Managed Network ak Management Configuration Management Service Provisoning Adminetraton Securty Management Help H JB cavemene manager x GAvecovery settings x ai res x A nemine x gf ctcate ste x gl network mantensnce x Network Maintenance Management ASN GW IP Address MS Outer NAT ei he Acts Network Markensnce Server 10 10 107 117 User odan Figure 3 3 Network Maintenance Single MS De Registration To force de registration of a specific MS enter the ASN GW IP Address of the ASN GW currently serving the MS Bearer IP address and the MS Outer NAI the complete NAI a string of up to 253 characters such as fam 1 4efd450727234884ad6bf3db0d68
333. sing the Equipment Manager ee RAR EES SE RENEEEAAShSEERAK EE 5 Chapter 3 The Network Maintenance Manager NENNEN 7 3 1 The Network Maintenance Manager ssssssennnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 9 3 2 Retrieval of MS Data ssgseestassgessgessssgeesseseetastsesbeteE speed ennseebeciavensec extacanecees 10 3 3 Retrieval of All MSs Data nnsnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 12 3 4 Single MS De Registration ccscseeccesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeesseneeeesseeneeseeseeeeeesessenees 15 3 5 AL MSS De Regl Strath ny wisi sesiccssccteseanscececacuccedanteeecndeentienialsdnckaren aanceneeeaeeeeee 16 Chapter 4 The Template Manager sibiscsccccvasesciasccsssetssewteiaiessinasceteawes 17 4 1 The Template Manager ssesennnunnnennnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnaman nnmnnn 19 4 1 1 Using the Template Manager cccccccseeeecceeeeeeeeeeneeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeneeaes 19 4 1 2 Default BS Templates AAA 21 4 2 The Template EGU iisisicacccsesensceraiaseneinasciessnsdinnisnesianteinanniaasncnenatiannniaaseiie SE 22 4 3 Configuring Template reeosgesaesgeegeeguuegetegeee ccna be stenteesden cent cee ctaeeencenne 23 4 3 1 The Template Configuration Editor 23 4 3 2 Managing Tables and Template Modes ccccceesseecceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 25 4 3 3 Updating EE E 28 4 4 ASN GW T 29 BAA ARAN PAO siiis niini a a eiia E
334. st delete the new Service Group This means that you have first to run a Multiple Configuration task using a template containing the relevant Service Group in Delete Mode and after successful completion of this task run another Multiple Configuration task using a different template containing the relevant Service Interface in Delete Mode Updating Scalars In a tab with scalar parameters select the parameters to be updated by marking the check box to the left a parameter name and configure the required value for each selected parameter Parameters that were not selected will not be affected You can select one or several parameters to be used for filtering by selecting the parameter s clicking on each parameter name that will change to italics font blue color and configuring the filtering value The selected criteria name and filtering value for each filtering parameter will be displayed in the Filters area Only devices in which the current configuration match all filtering criteria will be updated using configured values of parameters that were selected for update without being defined as filters 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW a Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager 4 4 ASN GW Template The ASN GW Template comprises the following pages AAA Page Service Group Page QoS Marking Page SFA Page Service Profile Page Hot Lining Page 4 4 1 AAA Page The AAA page comprise
335. stomer VLAN ID table includes the following parameters for each row 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 6 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Parameter Description Id The automatically generated index number of the entry Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name The Classification Rule Customer VLAN ID Row Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Classification Config Name The Classification Rule name Mandatory for Create Mode Must be a Classification Rule Name that already exists in the target managed objects Customer VLAN ID The Customer VLAN ID value to be assigned to the classification rule The range is 1 4094 The default is 1 in the device the default is null Must be set to a valid value 4 4 5 Service Profile Page The Service Profile page comprises the following tabs M Service Profile Config Tab M Service Flow Tab E UL DL Reference Classification Rule Tabs 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager 4 4 5 1 Figure 4 19 The ASN GW Template Service Profile Page Service Profile Config Tab Create Service Profile Config Tab Service Prolite Config Service Flory UL Relecence Class ication Rude E Reference Classticatice Rade Mode freie Update dekte Le Ad 3g H Revert
336. string of 1 to 128 characters The default name includes the task s type and the date and time at which the task was created Note that when using the Task Wizard the default task name automatically replaces the name selected in the first Create New Task step Description An optional brief description of the task 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Performance Collection Task 9 1 2 Entities Tab The Entities tab enables the selection of existing entities for performance collection Performance Collection General Entities Actions IP Address 4Motion BTS 233 npu_2_5 10 10 14 Up leie e El Eed EB ken Figure 9 2 Performance Collection Task Editor Entities Tab The Entities tab includes the following controls Parameter Description Add Opens the Equipment Selection window with the list of available devices allowing you to select the device s to be added to the task Remove Removes selected entities from the list The following information is displayed for each entity in the list 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 204 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Performance Collection Task Parameter Description Region The location associated with the selected equipment in the database of the management system Name The name of the device as configured in the device
337. supported by the wizard 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard Parameter Description DHCP Mode The DHCP function mode E Server The ASN GW function as a DHCP server that allocates an IP address to the MS from the local pool in the non HA mode E Relay The IP address is obtained using an external DHCP server in the non HA mode E Proxy Non HA mode In Non HA mode the DHCP proxy assigns the MS the IP address that was received from AAA in the MS profile In HA mode the DHCP proxy assigns to the MS the IP address received in the MS profile or obtains the IP address from HA using the mobile IP DHCP Own IP address Applicable only for IP Service Groups The IP address of the DHCP server relay proxy For a service group using a VLAN service interface should be in same subnet with the Default Gateway configured for the service interface associated with the service group Subnet mask is taken as the default subnet mask i e 255 255 255 0 IP Address Pool From Applicable only in Server mode The first address in the address pool IP Address Pool To Applicable only in Server mode The last address in the address pool Subnet Mask Applicable only in Server mode The subnet mask to be provided by local DHCP Server with IP address In the Proxy mode this value is used if appropriate paramet
338. t deg Used only for information inventory purposes The downwards mechanical tilt of the antenna in degrees as opposed to the electrical tilt already integrated in the antenna and thus taken as reference instead of the horizontal plane The range is from 90 0 to 90 0 using 0 1 degree resolution 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard Parameter Description Electrical Down Tilt deg Used only for information inventory purposes The downwards electrical tilt of the antenna in degrees The range is from 90 0 to 90 0 using 0 1 degree resolution Cable Loss dB Used only for information inventory purposes The attenuation in dB of the cable between the ODU port and antenna port The range is from 0 to 20 in 0 1 dB steps Click Next to open the next screen of the wizard 5 2 7 Twin Site Creation Wizard Last Step D E gt dl Equipment Manager x E Template Manager x A Duplicate Ste x Twin Site Creation Ae o asn aw s o E Serven Interfaces Number Serven trkerface N Type Desrpion Tunnel Source P Tunnel Destination 1 Service WAN ID TOnfmi Gatow 1 7 EI ep ent z d o 172 106 0 1 3 vm vlan D Man Y van TestSharon bo ay 1472 16 01 H a pp 172 416 0 1 Serve Groups Number Service Group Name Type Drttede Dr Ove IP Ad TIP Address rel iP Address Pol To S
339. t Saving parameter is used to enable or disable the daylight saving feature using the following Start Date Stop Date and Advance Hour Factor parameters The default is Disable Start Date When Daylight Saving is enabled this parameter defines the date for starting the daylight saving feature At the beginning of this date midnight at the beginning of this date the clock will be advanced by the amount of hours specified by the Advance Hour Factor see below Use the format dd mm to define the date and month at which to start activating the Daylight Saving feature Stop Date When Daylight Saving is enabled this parameter defines the date for ending the daylight saving feature at Advance Hour Factor hours after midnight at the end of this date Use the format dd mm to define the date and month at which to end activating the Daylight Saving feature 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 202 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Equipment Parameter Description Advance Hour Factor When Daylight Saving is enabled this parameter defines the amount of time by which the clock should be advanced during the daylight saving period The available values are 0 daylight saving disabled 1 and 2 hours The default is 0 7 6 2 3 2 BS Clock Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS Parameter Description External 1 PPS Clock Ind
340. t to create a new Service Group associated with a new Service Interface the Service Interface must exist in the target objects before you can create the new Service Group This means that you have first to run a Multiple Configuration task using a template containing the new Service Interface in Create Mode and after successful completion of this task run another Multiple Configuration task using a different template containing the new Service Group in Create Mode Managing Tables in Update Mode Each row in the table has one or more parameters that provides a unique identification of the entry In Update mode the row identifiers are not mandatory and will be displayed for saved entries only selected for filtering or update To add a row to the table click on the Add button above the table A row will be added to the table and a row configuration editor will open on the right side enabling you to configure the row parameters Select the parameters to be configured by marking the check box to the left a parameter name and configure 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager Configuring Templates 4 3 2 3 the required value for each selected parameter Parameters that were not selected will not be affected You can select one or several parameters to be used for filtering by selecting the parameter s clicking on each parameter name that will change to italics font blue color
341. table NOTE Download to Shadow action will be skipped if the target device is running from the Shadow version or if the specified file already exists in the device as either Shadow or Operational Set as Operational Version action will be skipped if the target device is running from the Operational version AU Software Upgrade applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS Task Name software upgrade Software Download Activity AU Software Upgrade Software Upgrade Settings Other Settings L Download To Shadow L Delete AU version from NPU L Switch Over File Name v TFTP IP Address 10 10 187 116 Select Equipment Region BTS Name Site IP AU Slot No AU Opera AU Shadow AU Curre EMS 2 10 10 14 4 Remove Remove 16e Macr 10 10 14 2 Invalid Figure 9 7 Software Upgrade Task Editor AU Software Upgrade NOTE AUs should be upgraded only after successful completion of upgrading the relevant NPU s The Software Upgrade Settings section comprises the following action options when AU Software Upgrade is selected 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks Software Upgrade Task Parameter Description Download to Shadow Loads the upgrade file selected in the File Name selection field below to the Shadow memory of the applicable AU s The file is loaded first to the applicable NPU s and then to the A
342. task You can select between AU Level Selection adding specific AUs or Site Level Selection adding all AUs in selected Sites Click on the Remove button to delete selected entries from the table 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks 4Motion File Data Aging Task 9 5 4Motion File Data Aging Task The File Data Aging Task enables limiting the time for maintaining equipment and configuration files in the database see also The File Manager on page 321 This is a system task that cannot be deleted To open the File Data Aging Task Editor select the task from the list of existing tasks right click and select the Edit option or double click on the entry File Data Aging days treshold 2019 elle e bx kal RE 3c com Figure 9 8 File Data Aging Task Editor The days threshold parameter sets the maximum time to maintain files in the database If the elapsed time since a file was added to the database is higher than the value configures for the days threshold parameter the file will be deleted from the database 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks CLI Task 9 6 CLI Task LOCAL CRAFT NOTE In the Local CRAFT Utility the CLI Task is applicable only to the managed device The CLI task enables executing a CLI script file on target device s gt To open the CLI Task Editor In the Task Manager
343. te nenenscncceieeaccem ea nacnacaecnnceeensencedie 310 CH te Uleies 313 9 8 Multiple Configuration Template Based Task ccsseseeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 316 9 9 AMotion Mutual Neighboring TaSkK usssssennnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 319 RN wn Fe File AGO ET 321 10 1 The File ET TE 323 10 2 Equipment File Manager siissciicsissiatesessnsisnnssiasesanvisteesaicenananenetinnasnnntineeneisnentenenesiuen 324 10 3 Duplicate Site File Manager ccccssseeeessseeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeneeeesseneeeseeseeeeeeseeaeeenees 327 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Figures Figures Figure 3 1 Network Maintenance Retrieval of MS Data 10 Figure 3 2 Network Maintenance Retrieval of All MSs Data 12 Figure 3 3 Network Maintenance Single MS De Heoietraton 15 Figure 3 4 Network Maintenance All MSs DeHeotestration 16 Figure 4 1 The Template Manager ss icccccscesicstcteieccenncatias tecenisedd wdesontecectdeas thcabra aneennetazeecrocendaeert 19 Figure 4 2 The Template E 22 Figure 4 3 The Template Configuration Editor Tab with Scalar Parameterg 24 Figure 4 4 The Template Configuration Editor Tab with a Table sssssesssssesssersssrrnnnersrenesnne 24 Figure 4 5 The ASN GW Template AAA Page AAA Client Tab 30 Figure 4 6 The ASN GW Template AAA Page AAA Access Tab 31 Figure 4 7 The ASN GW Template Service Group Page Service Interfaces T
344. ted Neighbor BSs Delete from Neighbors Opens the Delete from Neighbors Neighboring Task that allows deleting the current BS and its details from the Neighbor Lists of all or selected Neighbor BSs The Neighboring Task enables the BSs that will participate in a one time task according to the selected operation 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 262 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device BS Neighboring Task Operation Add neighbor Current BS BS ID LSB 0 0 3 BS Name Neighboring List Remove BTSNumber BTSName OperatorID BSIDLSB Status 127 Oded 0 0 2 3 100 14 e Die Figure 7 46 Neighboring Task Operation Add Neighbor The Neighboring Task includes the following components Parameter Description Operation The operation to be executed according to the button that initiated the task E Add neighbor E Delete neighbors E Get Update E Send Update to Neighboring E Delete from Neighboring Current BS The BS ID LSB and BS Name of the current BS Neighboring List The details of neighboring BSs that will participate in the task The initial list includes the BSs that where selected when the task was initiated You may use the Remove button to remove selected BS s from the list The details for each neighboring BS in the list includes its ID BS ID LSB Site Name and Site ID Site Number Refe
345. ted to VLAN Service Interface Updated value range for Service Group Name 1 30 characters Added VPWS Mapped option to Service Group Type Updated value range for Lease Time Added rule for DHCP Server IP Address Pool configuration Add rule for Renewal Time configuration Added general description of service groups Updated description of Subnet Mask and Default Gateway IP Address August 2009 SFA Page PHS Rule Tab Updated range for PHS Rule Name August 2009 SFA Page Classification Rule Tab Updated range for Classification Rule Name Added configuration rules for Layer 3 and Layer 4 classifiers August 2009 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW O Device Driver User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Service Profile Page Removed Uplink Downlink SDU Size Updated range for Service Profile Name Unsolicited Grant Interval uplink is not applicable for RTVR Traffic Priority not applicable for UGS Updated range for Max Sustained Traffic Rate Min Reserved Traffic Rate Added general description of service profiles and service flows Updated description of Reference Service Interface August 2009 ASN GW Keep Alive Page New Feature August 2009 BS Node Added a note regarding the need to reset the AU and or update neighbors after modifying certain parameters August 2009 Create BS Updated process n
346. th Access Accept message which includes any Hot Lining attributes ASN GW shall initiate De registration of the MS 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 239 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Hot Lining Hot Lining Proflies And Aides BR Enable Hot Liring Profle N lProfie N reto Red rale i KH Disable i 1 Deste Fier Fides Profile Number Profle Name mm Redirect URL J Enable Profien Rule Wanter RuleName Oredin IpAddress SubretMask IpProtocel Source Port Start Source Port og Destination Po Destination fo DCH Start i T 295 255 255 295 2595 285 255 295 255 a 65535 o 65535 o G Figure 7 39 Hot Lining Page The Hot Lining page is comprised of the following components E Enable Hot Lining E Profiles Table E Profile Editor E Filter Rules 1 15 1 Enable Hot Lining Parameter Description Enable Hot Lining Enable Disable the Hot Lining feature The following Hot Lining parameters are configurable only if Hot Lining is enabled The default is Enable 7 42 Profiles Table The Hot Lining Profiles table includes the following read only parameters for each entry 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Profile Number The index number of the hot lining profile An auto sequential numb
347. tion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW 75 Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template Parameter Description Start of Ranging Codes The starting number of the group of codes used for the uplink The available options are 0 64 128 192 The default is 0 Maximum Cell Radius The maximum cell radius in km The available values are 1 2 4 8 15 23 30 The default is 1 the default in the device is 2 4 5 2 2 Feedback Allocations Tab Ranging Feedback Miocatiors L Cokro Beam Forming Manapamert Qs Made Creat Update Piters 8y bla an a selected property name you can add k to this fiter LI Derne Porind Frames D ee De Figure 4 31 The BS Template Radio Advanced Page Feedback Allocations Tab The Feedback Allocations parameter is Parameter Description IR CDMA Allocation Period The period of IR CDMA allocations in frames The available options are 1 2 4 6 8 10 The default is 1 the default in the device is 2 In the current release actual value is always 2 the configured value is ignored 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW el Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager BS Template 4 5 2 3 Power Control Tab Ranging Feedback Alocatia Porrer Corkral Beem Forning Managenmert CxS Mode Creon Update eke Fiters By cicing on a selected property n
348. to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Mandatory for Create Mode The name of an existing Service Group cannot be updated The default is an empty string which is not a valid value Service Group Type Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing service group Mandatory for Create Mode The Service Group s type IP VPWS QinQ VPWS Transparent VPWS Mapped The default is IP The Type of an existing Service Group cannot be updated Service Interface Name Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing service group Applicable only for IP Service Groups Mandatory for Create Mode of an IP Service Group The Service Interface Name associated to an existing Service Group cannot be updated A string of 1 to 30 characters The referenced Service Interface must exist in the database of the relevant managed object Note that a Service Interface can be associated only to a single Service Group The default is an empty string which is not a valid value DHCP Function Mode Not applicable for Update Mode cannot be modified in an existing service group Applicable only for IP Service Groups Mandatory for Create Mode of an IP Service Group The DHCP Function Mode of an existing Service Group cannot be updated The available DHCP Function Mode options E Relay The IP address is obtained using an external DHCP server in the non HA mode E Proxy Non HA mode In Non HA mode the
349. tus of a VLAN service interface attached to the service group Not configurable when the attached Service Interface is IP in IP If a Service Group with Service VLAN enabled is attached to a Service Profile Service VLAN cannot be disabled The default is Disable MS MS Loopback Applicable only for IP Service Groups Indicates whether MS MS loopback is enabled or disabled for the service interface The default is Enable VID Mapping Range Start Applicable only for VPWS Mapped Service Groups The start value of the range of VLAN IDs for mapping The default is 0 None of the value within the range shall overlap with any existing infrastructure host interfaces VLAN IDs None of the value within the range shall overlap with VID mapping ranges of other existing Service Groups End Applicable only for VPWS Mapped Service Groups The end value of the range of VLAN IDs for mapping Cannot be lower than Start value The default is 0 None of the value within the range shall overlap with any existing infrastructure host interfaces VLAN IDs None of the value within the range shall overlap with VID mapping ranges of other existing Service Groups Accounting Accounting Mode Accounting mode for the service interface None No accounting support Time based The ASN GW send RADIUS Accounting Start Stop Requests The ASN GW shall also send Interim Accounting requests to AAA server using RADIUS Accounti
350. ubnet Mask Defaut Gateway H Ki server 2 bd b proxy 3 vm p prory 4 z relay Ss Y LU server _Sharon D server 7 KH relay al conei ged JL wert 1 Psat 4 BS Qos A eet A AlvariSTAR Rm Nectbon Shim Gocments E configure tenol DARU Lem Figure 5 6 Twin Site Creation Wizard Last Step x NOTE If the connectivity mode of the source site is Transparent this screen is not applicable The last configuration screen of the wizard includes the following parameters Parameter Description ASN GW ASN GW NAS ID The unique identifier of the ASN GW NAS Sent in Access Request message only if configured Should be in FQDN format Up to 64 characters Service Interfaces up to 10 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 5 The Duplicate Site Manager The Twin Site Creation Wizard Parameter Description Number An automatically generated number from 1 up to 10 Service Interface Name The name alias of the service interface A string of 1 to 15 characters Must be unique in the device Type The type of service interface IP in IP or VLAN Description A brief description of the service interface A string of up to 70 characters Tunnel Source IP Applicable only for IP in IP service interface The source IP address that indicates the point of origin of the tunnel for the service interface Set to the valu
351. uired C N Level for CQI 7 see CQI parameter above The default is 0 the default in the device is 9 QPSK 1 2 The C N in dB required for sending QPSK 1 2 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for CDMA 16 to Required C N Level for CDMA 14 see CDMA parameter above The default is 0 the default in the device is 13 QPSK 3 4 The C N in dB required for sending QPSK 3 4 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for QPSK 1 2 16 to Required C N Level for QPSK 1 2 14 see QPSK 1 2 parameter above The default is 0 the default in the device is 16 16 QAM 1 2 The C N in dB required for transmitting 16 QAM 1 2 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for QPSK 3 4 8 to Required C N Level for QPSK 3 4 7 see QPSK 3 4 parameter above The default is 0 the default in the device is 19 16 QAM 3 4 The C N in dB required for sending 16 QAM 3 4 reported to the MS for power control purposes The range is from 20 to 50 dB Must be in the range from Required C N Level for 16 QAM 1 2 16 to Required C N Level for 16 QAM 1 2 14 see 16 QAM 1 2 parameter above The default is 0 the default in the device is 22 64 QAM 1 2 The C N in dB required for sending 64 QAM 1 2 reported to the
352. ule Specify the PHS rule name if you want to perform PHS for this flow The default is null none Priority The priority level assigned to the classification rule The range is 0 255 The default is 0 Type The rule s type L2 or L3 The type of an existing rule cannot be modified The default is L3 Classification Rule Parameters Layer 2 applicable only for L2 rules Customer VLAN ID The Customer VLAN ID value to be assigned to the classification rule The range is 1 4094 The default is null The Customer VLAN ID of an existing rule cannot be modified Layer 3 applicable only for L3 rules Enable IP TOS Indicates whether the use of TOS based classification is enabled The default is Disable TOS Range Relevant only if Enable IP TOS is enabled Configurable only when Enable IP TOS is disabled The range of values From To of the IP TOS field from the lowest value to the highest value Values range is from 0 to 63 The default is From 0 To 0 TOS Mask Relevant only if Enable IP TOS is enabled The mask for IP TOS value This bit mask is applied to the TOS field received in the IP header to be matched within the configured TOS range The range is from 0 to 63 The default is 0 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW Parameter Description Enable IP Protocol Indicates whether the packet is cl
353. unmarked Relay Agent Information Parameters Enable Unicast Relay Agent Information Indicates whether the Unicast parameter is enabled or disabled The default is Disable Enable RADIUS Attributes Indicates whether RADIUS Attributes sub option 7 82 is enabled or disabled The default is Disable RADIUS Attribute Messages applicable only if Enable RADIUS Attributes is enabled Service Type Indicates whether Service Type attribute 6 is enabled or disabled The default is Disable Vendor Specific Indicates whether Vendor Specific attribute 26 is enabled or disabled The default is Disable Session Timeout Indicates whether Session Timeout attribute 27 is enabled or disabled The default is Disable Agent Circuit ID Sub option 1 of option 82 The available options are Not Set disable Default MS ID BS ID NAS ID NAS IP ASCII Agent Circuit ID Binary Free String Full NAI Domain ASCII MS ID ASCII BS ID ASCII BS MAC The default is Not Set For ASCII Agent Circuit ID enter the ID string in the Binary ASCII Agent Circuit ID text box up to 32 characters For Binary Free String enter a string of up to 32 hexadecimal digits no spaces in the Binary ASCII Agent Circuit ID text box Agent Remote ID Sub option 2 of option 82 The available options are Not Set disable Default MS ID BS ID NAS ID NAS IP ASCII Agent Remote ID Binary Free String Full NAI Do
354. used The currently available options are E None No external time synchronization source E Trimble Acutime Applicable only for Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS BMAX Timing GPS OGR model of outdoor GPS receiver E Trimble Lassen Applicable for Micro Outdoor BTS GPS Antenna Kit and when available Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS BMAX 4M GPS model E SNTP Applicable only for Mini Centralized ASN GW The default is None Stop Tx After Hold Over Applicable only for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS when a Timeout GPS receiver is used Indicates whether the BTS should stop data transmission if the GPS lost synchronization with its satellites and the holdover passed timeout has occurred Enable Disable When enabled the BTS will stop transmitting after being in holdover state for more than Holdover Passed Timeout The default is Enable Hold Over Passed Timeout Applicable only for a Macro Indoor Outdoor BTS and Micro Outdoor BTS when a GPS receiver is used Defines the period in minutes for which the device provides holdover when the GPS loses synchronization with its satellites The range is from 0 to 2880 minutes The default is 480 minutes Time Zone Offset From UTC The offset of the local time from the UTC The range is 12 00 to 13 00 in 30 minutes resolution The default is 00 00 UTC Time and Date The UTC Coordinated Universal Time date and time Configurable only if the GPS Type is set to None Othe
355. value of the VLAN ID assigned to the relevant interface 7 5 1 2 L1 L2 Connectivity Page for Micro Outdoor BTS 7 on 10 10 144 111 Configuring Equipment A HL Connectivity Mops e L Bech n Dos Figure 7 8 L1 L2 Connectivity Page Micro Outdoor BTS The L1 L2 Connectivity page of the Micro Outdoor BTS includes the following parameters of the Data amp DC Ethernet port Parameter Description Operational State Read only The operational status of the Ethernet port Up or Down 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Q Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity Parameter Description Administrative State The administrative status of the port Up or Down Negotiation The mode for negotiating the port speed and the duplex half or full status with the link partner The options are Auto and Manual The default is Auto Port Speed The port speed to be used for the physical interface Configurable only if Negotiation mode is Manual The available options are 10 100 and 1000 Mbps The default is 1000 Duplex Mode The duplex status for the interface Full Duplex or Half Duplex Configurable only if Negotiation mode is Manual The default is Full Duplex ad 7 5 2 1 Management Page The Management page comprises the following tabs Management Interface Tab QoS Marking Rules Tab ACL Tab IP Routing T
356. ver IP Address Applicable only for IP Service Groups using Relay mode The IP address of the external DHCP server The default is null a valid IP address must be specified the default in the device is 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode Enable Disable Relay Agent Information Option 82 The default is Enable the default in the device is Disable Unicast Relay Agent Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information Information is enabled Indicates whether the Unicast parameter is enabled or disabled The default is Enable the default in the device is Disable RADIUS Attributes Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information is enabled Indicates whether RADIUS Attributes Sub option 7 82 is enabled or disabled The default is Enable the default in the device is Disable Service Type Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information and Radius Attributes are enabled Indicates whether Service Type attribute 6 is enabled or disabled The default is Enable the default in the device is Disable 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 4 The Template Manager ASN GW Template Parameter Description Vendor Specific Applicable only for IP Service Groups in Relay mode if Relay Agent Information and Radius Attr
357. ver IP Address The IPv4 address of the secondary AAA server Cannot be the same as the Primary Server IP Address or any of the NPU IP interfaces 0 0 0 0 the default means no secondary server Must be set to a valid IP address if Redundancy is enabled Switch Over Enable and click Apply to switch from the Primary Server to Secondary Server or Vice Versa The default is Disable EN d 7 7 2 1 Service Group Page The Service Group page enables managing the service interfaces and service groups The Service Group page includes the following tabs M Service Interfaces Tab E Service Groups Tab Service Interfaces Tab The Services Interfaces tab enables viewing modifying the parameters of existing service interfaces It also enables adding new service interfaces up to a maximum of 10 and deleting service interfaces A Service Interface defines the parameters of the interface used by the NPU on the network side for services using the applicable Service Interface specified in the applicable Service Group The following types of Service Interface are available E IP in IP The Service Interface defines the parameters on the NPU side of a point to point tunnel to be used for the applicable traffic E VLAN The Service Interface defines the VLAN ID to be added removed by the NPU to from the applicable traffic 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7
358. wette d a A Click Here to send your feedback 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver for AlvariSTAR User Manual Software Version 3 0 10 February 2011 P N 215817 Document History Document History updates improvements Topic Description Date Issued Version Number and date Updated versions numbers November 2008 Cover page About this Manual Managing a BTS Site Updated to reflect Device Driver version November 2008 Chapter 2 2 5 1 19 and managed device s NPU SW version 2_5 1 8 Parameters Summary Updated to reflect Device Driver version November 2008 Chapter 4 2 5 1 19 and managed device s NPU SW version 2_5 1 8 Manual s Name Device Manager replaced by Device Driver December 2008 Using the Device Manager Chapter Chapter was removed Its contents now form December 2008 the first section in Managing a BTS Site Enabling Discovery New Chapter December 2008 The Equipment Manager New Chapter December 2008 Tasks Chapter Completely revised Overview section December 2008 removed updated version exists in the Infrastructure Manual All Task sections updated and modified The File Manager New Chapter December 2008 Offline Configuration Manager New Chapter December 2008 The Performance Viewer Updated December 2008r Managing a BTS Site and Updated to reflect 2 5 beta versions of NPU December 2008 Parameters Summar
359. window do one of the following E To open a new task use the Task Wizard and select the CLI option E To open an existing task select an existing CLI task from the list right click and select the Edit option or double click on the selected task If the task is Active the Runtime result screen is displayed displaying the status of the running task If the task is Inactive the CLI Task Editor for the selected task is displayed 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tasks CLI Task CLI Task General CLI Protocol Description Port 23 User NE Type 4M Macro BTS DI Password Ip Address Location 10 10 144 201 CLI Script e IS EE Figure 9 9 CLI Task Editor The CLI Task editor comprises the following fields Parameter Description General Name The name of the task A string of 1 to 128 characters Description An optional free text field providing a general description of the task A string of 0 to 128 characters NE Type Enables selection of the type of target Network Elements that will participate in the task CLI Protocol Protocol Enables selection of the protocol to be used Telnet or SSH The default is Telnet Port Displays the default port to be used For Telnet the default is 23 For SSH the default is 22 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW D Device Driver User Manual Chapter 9 Tas
360. x or Half Duplex 7 5 1 1 4 External Ether Type Parameter Description External Ether Type Not applicable for a BTS operating in Centralized ASN Topology The Layer 2 Ether Type configures the outer VLAN header of uplink Q in Q traffic The available values are 8100 88A8 9100 9200 The default is 88A8 7 5 1 1 5 AU Maintenance VLAN ID Parameter Description AU Maintenance VLAN ID Not applicable for Mini Centralized ASN GW The service interface of the AU is used for uploading maintenance reports to an external server Most of the service interface parameters except the VLAN ID are configured separately for each AU see AU Card Properties Tab on page 189 The AU maintenance VLAN ID is the VLAN ID used by all AU service interfaces The available range is 1 9 11 100 110 4094 The default is 14 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device Connectivity 7 5 1 1 6 Backhaul VLAN Translation The Backhaul VLAN Translation table lists the read only values of the default and current VLAN ID s used on the Backhaul Data port if the current value differs from the default Parameter Description VLAN ID The original default VLAN ID Must be a VLAN ID that is allowed on the port a Bearer VLAN ID the default is 11 b External Management VLAN ID Applicable only in In Band connectivity mode the default is 12 Changed to The current
361. y or several selected entries from the table A service Interface associated to a Service Group cannot be deleted A QinQ service interface associated to a service flow cannot be deleted 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Chapter 7 Managing a Single Device ASN GW z NOTE The Bearer Interface IP Address see ASN GW Bearer Interface Page on page 176 must be configured prior to creating any IP in IP or VLAN service interfaces The Service Interface Editor includes the following parameters Parameter Description Service Interface Name The name alias of the service interface A string of 1 to 30 characters Must be unique in the device Configurable only when adding a new service interface Description An optional brief description of the service interface A string of up to 70 characters The default is null Type The type of service interface IP in IP VLAN or QinQ Configurable only when adding a new service interface The default is IP in IP Tunnel Source IP Applicable only for IP in IP service interface Read only The source IPv4 address that indicates the point of origination of the tunnel for the service interface Set to the value of the Bearer Interface IP Address Tunnel Destination IP Applicable only for IP in IP service interface Configurable only when adding a new service interface The destination IPv4 address that indicates the po
362. y Chapters and Device Driver AlvariCRAFT Added AlvariCRAFT to the shared platform March 2009 The Equipment Manager Updated to reflect all GUI changes of August 2009 Management System Infrastructure Version 4 5 New feature Open Alarms Updated functionality of Multiple Configuration and Backup Configuration options Site Equipment View Page Added support for Outdoor BTS General August 2009 4Motion BTS and Mini Centralized ASN GW Device Driver User Manual Document History Topic Description Date Issued Site Page General Tab Removed Shelf HW Version parameter Updated range for Site Address Updated ranges for Longitude and Latitude Updated description of Product Type Updated Site Number change process Added warning a change in ASN Topology will take effect after next reset August 2009 Site Page Dry Contacts Tab New feature Send Alarm condition for Input Alarms Applicable only for Indoor BTS August 2009 Site Page Time Tab Removed Clock Source parameters August 2009 L1 L2 Connectivity Page Removed External Management VLAN ID Added AU Maintenance VLAN ID Ethernet port are configurable also if Admin Status is enabled Up Added warning a change in Connectivity Mode will take effect after next reset CSCD port is applicable only for Indoor BTS Updated description of VLAN Assigned August 2009 IP Interface Page No need to shut down the int

4Motion Device Driver Ver.3.0.10 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents